{"id":"traffic-regulations-schedule-3-arrs-1999","name":"TRAFFIC REGULATIONS, SCHEDULE 3 - AUSTRALIAN ROAD RULES 1999","slug":"traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999","collection":"regulation","jurisdiction":"nt","status":"in_force","isInForce":true,"actNumber":null,"makingDate":null,"administeringDepartment":null,"currentVersion":{"id":177222,"registerId":"nt-traffic-regulations-schedule-3-arrs-1999-current","compilationNumber":null,"startDate":"2026-04-05","status":"InForce","reasons":null,"registeredAt":null},"sections":[{"sectionNumber":"Div 2","sectionType":"division","heading":"Some features of the Australian Road Rules","content":"Division 2 Some features of the Australian Road Rules\n","sortOrder":0},{"sectionNumber":"4","sectionType":"section","heading":"Definitions – the dictionary etc.","content":"4 Definitions – the dictionary etc.\n(1) The dictionary at the end of the Australian Road Rules defines\ncertain words and expressions, and includes references to certain\nwords and expressions defined elsewhere in the Rules (signpost\ndefinitions).\nThe signpost definition road-related area see rule 13 means that the expression\nroad-related area is defined in rule 13 of the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\nThe dictionary only includes a signpost definition for a word or expression if the\nword or expression is used in 2 or more rules of the Australian Road Rules.\n(2) The dictionary is part of the Australian Road Rules.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 3\n(3) A definition in the Australian Road Rules applies to each use of the\nword or expression in the Rules, unless the contrary intention\nappears.\n","sortOrder":1},{"sectionNumber":"5","sectionType":"section","heading":"Diagrams","content":"5 Diagrams\nA diagram in the Australian Road Rules is part of the Rules.\n","sortOrder":2},{"sectionNumber":"1","sectionType":"section","heading":"If a diagram of a traffic control device, traffic-related item or symbol is in black","content":"1 If a diagram of a traffic control device, traffic-related item or symbol is in black\nand white in a rule of the Australian Road Rules, the diagram may be a black\nor white version of the device, item or symbol – see rule 314. If so, the colour\nversion of the device, item or symbol will be in Schedule 2 or 4.\n","sortOrder":3},{"sectionNumber":"2","sectionType":"section","heading":"A diagram may be an example – see rule 6(1).","content":"2 A diagram may be an example – see rule 6(1).\n","sortOrder":4},{"sectionNumber":"6","sectionType":"section","heading":"Examples","content":"6 Examples\n(1) An example (whether or not in the form of a diagram) in the\nAustralian Road Rules is part of the Rules.\n(2) If the Australian Road Rules includes an example of the operation\nof a provision of the Rules:\n(a) the example is not exhaustive; and\n(b) the example does not limit, but may extend, the meaning of\nthe provision.\n","sortOrder":5},{"sectionNumber":"7","sectionType":"section","heading":"Headings","content":"7 Headings\nA heading to a Part, Division, Schedule, rule or any other provision\nof the Australian Road Rules is part of the Rules.\n","sortOrder":6},{"sectionNumber":"8","sectionType":"section","heading":"Notes","content":"8 Notes\nA note in the Australian Road Rules is explanatory and is not part of\nthe Rules.\n","sortOrder":7},{"sectionNumber":"9","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reader's Guide","content":"9 Reader's Guide\nThe Reader's Guide is not part of the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\nThe Reader's Guide has not been included in this Schedule because it is not\nused in the Territory.\n","sortOrder":8},{"sectionNumber":"10","sectionType":"section","heading":"Offences","content":"10 Offences\n(1) The words \"Offence provision.\" in a rule of the Australian Road\nRules (or, if the rule has 2 or more subrules, in a subrule) indicates\nthat a contravention of the rule (or subrule) is an offence.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 4\n(2) The penalty for an offence is the penalty applying to the offence\nPart 2 Application of the Australian Road Rules\nDivision 1 Roads and road-related areas\n11 Australian Road Rules apply to vehicles and road users on\nroads and road-related areas\n(1) The Australian Road Rules apply to vehicles and road users on\nroads and road-related areas.\nNote\nRoad is defined in rule 12, road-related area is defined in rule 13, road user is\ndefined in rule 14, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n(2) Each reference in the Australian Road Rules (except in this\nDivision) to a road includes a reference to a road-related area,\nunless otherwise expressly stated in the Rules.\nExamples for subrule (2)\n1 A reference in rule 146 (which deals with driving within a single marked lane\nor line of traffic) to the road includes a reference to the road-related area of\n2 A reference in rule 200(1) (which deals with certain heavy or long vehicles\nstopping on roads) to a length of road includes a reference to the road-related\narea of the length of road.\n","sortOrder":9},{"sectionNumber":"3","sectionType":"section","heading":"A reference in rule 31 (which deals with starting a right turn from a road,","content":"3 A reference in rule 31 (which deals with starting a right turn from a road,\nexcept a multi-lane road) to a road does not include a reference to a road-\nrelated area, because of the definition in subrule (5) of that rule.\n","sortOrder":10},{"sectionNumber":"12","sectionType":"section","heading":"What is a road","content":"12 What is a road\n(1) A road is an area that is open to or used by the public and is\ndeveloped for, or has as one of its main uses, the driving or riding\nof motor vehicles.\nNote\n(2) However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in the\nAustralian Road Rules (except in this Division) to a road does not\ninclude a reference to:\n(a) an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of\nthis jurisdiction, not to be a road for the Australian Road\nRules; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 5\n(b) any shoulder of the road.\n(3) The shoulder of the road includes any part of the road that is not\ndesigned to be used by motor vehicles in travelling along the road,\nand includes:\n(a) for a kerbed road – any part of the kerb; and\n(b) for a sealed road – any unsealed part of the road, and any\nsealed part of the road outside an edge line on the road;\nbut does not include a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, edge line and footpath are defined in the\ndictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.\n","sortOrder":11},{"sectionNumber":"13","sectionType":"section","heading":"What is a road-related area","content":"13 What is a road-related area\n(1) A road-related area is any of the following:\n(a) an area that divides a road;\n(b) a footpath or nature strip adjacent to a road;\n(c) an area that is not a road and that is open to the public and\ndesignated for use by cyclists or animals;\n(d) an area that is not a road and that is open to or used by the\npublic for driving, riding or parking vehicles.\nNote\n(2) However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in the\nAustralian Road Rules (except in this Division) to a road-related\narea includes a reference to:\n(a) an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of\nthis jurisdiction, to be a road-related area for the Australian\nRoad Rules; or\n(b) any shoulder of a road; or\n(c) any other area that is a footpath or nature strip as defined in\nthe dictionary;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 6\nbut does not include a reference to an area so far as the area is\ndeclared, under another law of this jurisdiction, not to be a road-\nrelated area for the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\nShoulder is defined in rule 12.\nDivision 2 Road users and vehicles\n","sortOrder":12},{"sectionNumber":"14","sectionType":"section","heading":"Road users","content":"14 Road users\nA road user is a driver, rider, passenger or pedestrian.\nNote\nDriver is defined in rule 16, pedestrian is defined in rule 18, and rider is defined\nin rule 17.\n","sortOrder":13},{"sectionNumber":"15","sectionType":"section","heading":"What is a vehicle","content":"15 What is a vehicle\nA vehicle includes:\n(a) a motor vehicle, trailer and tram; and\n(b) a bicycle; and\n(c) an animal-drawn vehicle, and an animal that is being ridden or\ndrawing a vehicle; and\n(d) a combination; and\n(e) a motorised wheelchair that can travel at over 10 kilometres\nper hour (on level ground);\nbut does not include another kind of wheelchair, a train, or a\nwheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.\nNote\nVarious terms mentioned in this rule are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":14},{"sectionNumber":"16","sectionType":"section","heading":"Who is a driver","content":"16 Who is a driver\n(1) A driver is the person who is driving a vehicle (except a motor bike,\nbicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle).\n1 Bicycle and motor bike are defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined\nin rule 15.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 7\n(2) However, a driver does not include a person pushing a motorised\nwheelchair.\nNote\nWheelchair is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":15},{"sectionNumber":"17","sectionType":"section","heading":"Who is a rider","content":"17 Who is a rider\n(1) A rider is the person who is riding a motor bike, bicycle, animal or\nanimal-drawn vehicle.\n1 Bicycle and motor bike are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Ride, for the rider of a motor bike or animal-drawn vehicle, includes be in\ncontrol of – see the definition in the dictionary.\n(2) A rider does not include:\n(a) a passenger; or\n(b) a person walking beside and pushing a bicycle.\n","sortOrder":16},{"sectionNumber":"18","sectionType":"section","heading":"Who is a pedestrian","content":"18 Who is a pedestrian\nA pedestrian includes:\n(a) a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at\nover 10 kilometres per hour (on level ground); and\n(b) a person in a non-motorised wheelchair; and\n(c) a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair;\nand\n(d) a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy.\nNote\nWheelchair, wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the\n","sortOrder":17},{"sectionNumber":"19","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to driver includes rider etc.","content":"19 References to driver includes rider etc.\nUnless otherwise expressly stated in the Australian Road Rules,\neach reference in the Rules (except in this Division) to a driver\nincludes a reference to a rider, and each reference in the Rules\n(except in this Division) to driving includes a reference to riding.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 8\n","sortOrder":18},{"sectionNumber":"Part 3","sectionType":"part","heading":"Speed-limits","content":"Part 3 Speed-limits\n","sortOrder":19},{"sectionNumber":"20","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obeying the speed-limit","content":"20 Obeying the speed-limit\nA driver must not drive at a speed over the speed-limit applying to\nthe driver for the length of road where the driver is driving.\n1 The rules about speed-limits are as follows:\n• rule 21 – speed-limit where a speed-limit sign applies\n• rule 22 – speed-limit in a speed-limited area\n• rule 23 – speed-limit in a school zone\n• rule 24 – speed-limit in a shared zone\n• rule 25 – speed-limit elsewhere.\n2 Road includes a road-related area – see rule 11(2).\n3 Length of road includes a marked lane, a part of a marked lane, or another\npart of a length of road – see the definition in the dictionary.\n4 Part 20, Division 2 deals with the way in which a traffic sign applies to a\nlength of road. Part 20, Division 3 deals with the way in which the traffic sign\napplies to drivers driving on the length of road.\n","sortOrder":20},{"sectionNumber":"21","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed-limit where a speed-limit sign applies","content":"21 Speed-limit where a speed-limit sign applies\n(1) The speed-limit applying to a driver for a length of road to which a\nspeed-limit sign applies is the number of kilometres per hour\nindicated by the number on the sign.\nNote\n(2) However, if the number on the speed-limit sign is over 100 and the\ndriver is driving a bus with a GVM over 5 tonnes, or another vehicle\nwith a GVM over 12 tonnes, the speed-limit applying to the driver\nfor the length of road is 100 kilometres per hour.\n1 Bus and GVM are defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n3 If the vehicle is an oversize or overmass vehicle, the vehicle may be\nrestricted to a lower speed-limit under another law of this jurisdiction.\n(3) A speed-limit sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning\nat the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:\n(a) a speed-limit sign on the road with a different number on the\nsign;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 9\n(b) an end speed-limit sign or speed derestriction sign on the\nroad;\n1 T-intersection is defined in the dictionary.\nSpeed-limit signs\nOther signs\nEnd speed-limit sign Speed derestriction sign\n1 There is another permitted version of the speed-limit sign and the end\nspeed-limit sign – see the diagrams in Schedule 3.\n2 A speed-limit sign or end speed-limit sign may have a different number on\nthe sign – see rule 316(4).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 10\n","sortOrder":21},{"sectionNumber":"22","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed-limit in a speed-limited area","content":"22 Speed-limit in a speed-limited area\nspeed-limited area is the number of kilometres per hour indicated\nby the number on the area speed-limit sign on a road into the area,\nunless another speed-limit applies to the driver for the length of\nroad under another rule of this Part.\nExample of another speed-limit\nAlthough an area speed-limit sign on a road into a speed-limited area may\nindicate a speed-limit of 60 kilometres per hour, a particular length of road in the\narea may have a school zone sign indicating a 40 kilometres per hour speed-\nlimit for that length of road.\nNote\n(2) A speed-limited area is the network of roads in an area with:\n(a) an area speed-limit sign on each road into the area, indicating\n(b) an end area speed-limit sign on each road out of the area.\n(3) In subrule (2)(a) and (b):\nNote\nArea speed-limit sign End area speed-limit sign\n2 An area speed-limit sign or end area speed-limit sign may have a different\nnumber on the sign – see rule 316(4).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 11\n","sortOrder":22},{"sectionNumber":"23","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed-limit in a school zone","content":"23 Speed-limit in a school zone\nschool zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the\nnumber on the school zone sign on a road, or the road, into the\nzone.\n1 Length of road is defined in the dictionary.\n2 A school zone sign may indicate that it applies only at certain times, on\ncertain days or in certain circumstances – see rules 317 and 318.\n3 This subrule applies to road-related areas in the school zone – see rule 11(2).\n(2) A school zone is:\n(a) if there is a school zone sign and an end school zone sign, or\na speed-limit sign with a different number on the sign, on a\nroad and there is no intersection on the length of road\nbetween the signs – that length of road; or\n(b) if there is a school zone sign on a road that ends in a dead\nend and there is no intersection, nor a sign mentioned in\nparagraph (a), on the length of road beginning at the sign and\nending at the dead end – that length of road; or\n(c) in any other case – the network of roads in an area with:\n(i) a school zone sign on each road into the area, indicating\n(ii) an end school zone sign, or a speed-limit sign indicating\na different number, on each road out of the area.\nNote\nIntersection is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 12\n(3) In subrule (2)(c)(i) and (ii):\nNote\nSchool zone sign End school zone sign\n2 A school zone sign or end school zone sign may have a different number on\nthe sign – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":23},{"sectionNumber":"24","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed-limit in a shared zone","content":"24 Speed-limit in a shared zone\nshared zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the\nnumber on the shared zone sign on a road, or the road into the\nzone.\nNote\nA driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian in the zone –\nsee rule 83.\n(2) A shared zone is:\n(a) if there is a shared zone sign and an end shared zone sign on\na road and there is no intersection on the length of road\nbetween the signs – that length of road; or\n(b) if there is a shared zone sign on a road that ends in a dead\nend and there is no intersection on the length of road\nbeginning at the sign and ending at the dead end – that length\nof road; or\n(c) a network of roads in an area with:\n(i) a shared zone sign on each road into the area, indicating\n(ii) an end shared zone sign on each road out of the area;\nor\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 13\n(d) a road related area that is between a shared zone sign that\nrelates to the area and an end shared zone sign that relates to\nNote\nIntersection is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) In subrules (2)(c)(i) and (ii):\nNote\nShared zone sign End shared zone sign\n2 A shared zone sign may have a different number on the sign – see\n","sortOrder":24},{"sectionNumber":"25","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed-limit elsewhere","content":"25 Speed-limit elsewhere\n(1) If a speed-limit sign does not apply to a length of road and the\nlength of road is not in a speed-limited area, school zone or shared\nzone, the speed-limit applying to a driver for the length of road is\nthe default speed-limit.\nNote\nLength of road is defined in the dictionary, school zone is defined in rule 23,\nshared zone is defined in rule 24, and speed-limited area is defined in rule 22.\n(2) The default speed-limit applying to a driver for a length of road in\na built-up area is 50 kilometres per hour.\n1 The application of this subrule is modified by regulation 77 of the Traffic\n2 Built-up area is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 14\n(3) The default speed-limit applying to a driver for any other length of\nroad is:\n(a) for a driver driving a bus with a GVM over 5 tonnes, or another\nvehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes – 100 kilometres per hour;\nor\n(b) for any other driver – 100 kilometres per hour or as otherwise\nprovided under another law of this jurisdiction.\n1 Bus and GVM are defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n3 If the vehicle is an oversize or overmass vehicle, the vehicle may be\nrestricted to a lower speed-limit under another law of this jurisdiction.\n4 The application of this subrule is modified by regulation 77A of the Traffic\nPart 4 Making turns\nDivision 1 Left turns\n26 Application of Division to roundabouts, road-related areas and\n(1) This Division does not apply to a driver entering or leaving a\nroundabout.\n1 Roundabout is defined in rule 109.\n2 Part 9 deals with entering and leaving a roundabout.\n(2) This Division applies to a driver turning left from a road into a road-\nrelated area or adjacent land, or from a road-related area into a\nroad, as if the driver were turning left at an intersection.\n1 Adjacent land and intersection are defined in the dictionary and road-\nrelated area is defined in rule 13. Adjacent land or a road-related area can\ninclude a driveway, service station or shopping centre – see the definitions.\n2 Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road\nfrom a road-related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals with the give\nway rules applying to a driver entering a road-related area or adjacent land\nfrom a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a median strip\nparking area.\n3 For the meaning of left, see rule 351(1).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 15\nNote\nA road-related area includes the shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\n","sortOrder":25},{"sectionNumber":"27","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)","content":"27 Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)\n(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a road (except a multi-\nlane road) must approach and enter the intersection from as near\nas practicable to the far left side of the road.\n(1A) Subrule (1) also applies to a rider of a bicycle who approaches and\nenters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.\nNote\n(1B) Despite subrule (1), if there is space in a bicycle storage area for\n2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the right\nmay approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to\nthe right side of the other rider, but only if that other rider\napproaches and enters the intersection in accordance with this rule.\n1 Intersection and multi-lane road are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Road-related area includes any shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\nStarting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 16\n","sortOrder":26},{"sectionNumber":"28","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting a left turn from a multi-lane road","content":"28 Starting a left turn from a multi-lane road\n(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road must\napproach and enter the intersection from within the left lane unless:\n(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the\nintersection from within another marked lane under rule 88(1),\n92 or 159; or\n(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n(c) subrule (1A) or (2) applies to the driver; or.\n(d) the lane is a bus only lane.\n1 B lights, intersection, marked lane, multi-lane road, public bus and\ntraffic arrows are defined in the dictionary, left lane is defined in subrule (3)\nand bus only lane is defined in rule 154A(6).\n2 Rule 88(1) deals with left turn only signs, rule 92 deals with traffic lane\narrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring particular kinds of\nvehicles to drive in an indicated marked lane.\n3 Part 17, Division 2 provides for priority to be given to public buses at\nintersections with B lights or a white traffic arrow.\nExample for subrule (1)(a)\nStarting a left turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as required or permitted under\nrule 92\n(1A) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road that\nhas a slip lane must approach and enter the intersection:\n(a) from within the slip lane; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 17\n(b) if there is an obstruction that prevents the driver from entering\nthe intersection from within the slip lane – from within the left\nNote\nObstruction and slip lane are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked\nlane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane if:\nand\nof the intersection; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left from within the left\nlane; and\nsafely turn left at the intersection by occupying the next\nmarked lane, or both lanes.\nLong vehicle turning left from the left lane and next marked lane\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 18\n(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends\nacross one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a\nbicycle turning left must approach and enter the intersection from\nwithin the part of the bicycle storage area that is directly in front of\nthe left marked lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the left side of the\nNote\nleft lane means:\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road; or\n1 Special purpose lane is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part 11,\nDivision 6 deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.\n29 Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line\n(1) If a driver is turning left at an intersection and there is a turn line\nindicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must\nmake the turn as indicated by the turn line unless:\n(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 19\n(b) subrule (2) applies to the driver.\nNote\nB lights, intersection, traffic arrows and turn line are defined in the dictionary.\nMaking a left turn as indicated by a turn line\n(2) A driver may turn left at an intersection other than as indicated by a\nturn line if:\nand\n(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left as indicated by the\nturn line; and\n(d) the driver can safely turn left other than as indicated by the\nturn line.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 20\nDivision 2 Right turns\n","sortOrder":27},{"sectionNumber":"30","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application of Division to certain right turns","content":"30 Application of Division to certain right turns\n(1) This Division does not apply to:\n(a) a driver turning right at an intersection where there is a hook\nturn only sign; or\n(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn under Division 3; or\n(c) a driver making a U-turn; or\n(d) a driver entering or leaving a roundabout.\n1 Bicycle, intersection and U-turn are defined in the dictionary and\nroundabout is defined in rule 109.\n2 Division 3 of this Part deals with hook turns, Division 4 deals with U-turns and\nPart 9 deals with entering and leaving a roundabout.\n3 For the meaning of right, see rule 35(2).\n(2) This Division applies to a driver turning right from a road into a\nroad-related area or adjacent land, or from a road-related area into\na road, as if the driver were turning right at an intersection.\n1 Adjacent land is defined in the dictionary and road-related area is defined in\nrule 13. Adjacent land or a road-related area can include a driveway, service\nstation or shopping centre – see the definitions.\n2 Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road\nfrom a road-related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals with the give\nway rules applying to a driver entering a road-related area or adjacent land\nfrom a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a median strip\nparking area.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 21\nNote\nA road-related area includes the shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\n","sortOrder":28},{"sectionNumber":"31","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting a right turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)","content":"31 Starting a right turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a road (except a multi-\nlane road) must approach and enter the intersection in accordance\nNote\nIntersection and multi-lane road are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the road has a dividing line or median strip, the driver must\napproach and enter the intersection from the left of, parallel to, and\nas near as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.\nNote\nDividing line and median strip are defined in the dictionary.\n(3) If the road does not have a dividing line or median strip and is not a\none-way road, the driver must approach and enter the intersection\nfrom the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the centre\nof the road.\nNote\nCentre of the road and one-way road are defined in the dictionary.\n(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter\nthe intersection from as near as practicable to the far right side of\n(4A) Subrules (2), (3) and (4) also apply to a rider of a bicycle who\napproaches and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.\nNote\n(4B) Despite subrules (2), (3) and (4), if there is space in a bicycle\nstorage area for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the\nrider on the left may approach and enter the intersection as near as\npracticable to the left side of the other rider, but only if that other\nrider approaches and enters the intersection in accordance with this\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 22\nNote\nRoad-related area includes any shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\nStarting a right turn from a road with a dividing line\nStarting a right turn from a one-way road\n","sortOrder":29},{"sectionNumber":"32","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road","content":"32 Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a multi-lane road must\napproach and enter the intersection from within the right lane\n(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the\nintersection from within another marked lane in accordance\nwith rule 89(1), 92 or 159; or\n(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 23\n(c) subrule (2) applies to the driver; or.\n(d) the lane is a bus only lane.\n1 B lights, intersection, marked lane, multi-lane road, public bus and\ntraffic arrows are defined in the dictionary, right lane is defined in\nsubrule (3) and bus only lane is defined in rule 154A(6).\n2 Rule 89 (1) deals with right turn only signs, rule 92 deals with traffic lane\narrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring particular kinds of\nvehicles to drive in an indicated marked lane.\n3 Part 17, Division 2 provides for priority to be given to public buses at\nintersections with B lights or a white traffic arrow.\nExample for subrule (1)(a)\nStarting a right turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows\nas required or permitted under rule 92\n(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked\nlane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane if:\nand\nof the intersection; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right from within the\nright lane; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 24\nsafely turn right at the intersection by occupying the next\nmarked lane, or both lanes.\n(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends\nacross one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a\nbicycle turning right (but not making a hook turn) must approach\nand enter the intersection from within the part of the bicycle storage\narea that is directly in front of the right marked lane or of a bicycle\nlane that is on the right side of the road.\nNote\nright lane means:\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on\nthe road; or\n1 Dividing line, median strip, obstruction and special purpose lane are\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 25\n2 Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part 11,\nDivision 6 deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.\n33 Making a right turn\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection must make the turn in\naccordance with this rule unless:\n(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n(b) subrule (4) applies to the driver.\nNote\nB lights, intersection and traffic arrows are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If there is a turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made,\nthe driver must make the turn as indicated by the turn line.\nNote\nTurn line is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) If there is no turn line indicating how the turn is required to be\nmade, the driver must make the turn so the driver:\n(a) passes as near as practicable to the right of the centre of the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 26\n(b) turns into the left of the centre of the road the driver is\nentering, unless the driver is entering a one-way road.\nNote\nCentre of the road is defined in the dictionary.\nMaking a right turn as indicated by turn lines\nMaking a right turn from a road with no turn lines indicating how to make the turn\n(4) A driver may turn right other than as indicated by a turn line if:\nand\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 27\n(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right as indicated by\nthe turn line; and\n(d) the driver can safely make the turn other than as indicated by\nthe turn line.\n","sortOrder":30},{"sectionNumber":"Div 3","sectionType":"division","heading":"Hook turns at intersections","content":"Division 3 Hook turns at intersections\n","sortOrder":31},{"sectionNumber":"34","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign","content":"34 Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection with traffic lights and a hook\nturn only sign must turn right by making a hook turn in accordance\nNote\n(2) To make a hook turn, the driver must take, in sequence, each of\nthe following steps:\n1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as\npracticable to the far left side of the road that the driver is\nleaving.\n2 Move forward, keeping as near as practicable to the left of the\nintersection and clear of any marked foot crossing, until the\ndriver is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that\nthe driver is entering.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 28\n3 Remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic\nlights on the road that the driver is entering change to green.\n4 Turn right into that road.\nNote\nMarked foot crossing is defined in the dictionary.\nNote\nHook turn only sign Example\nMaking a hook turn at a\nhook turn only sign\n","sortOrder":32},{"sectionNumber":"35","sectionType":"section","heading":"Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider","content":"35 Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider\n(1) The rider of a bicycle turning right at an intersection without a hook\nturn only sign, or a no hook turn by bicycles sign, may turn right at\nthe intersection by making a right turn under Division 2 or a hook\nturn under this rule.\nNote\nBicycle and intersection are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The rider must make a hook turn under this rule in accordance with\nsubrule (3).\n(3) To make a hook turn under this rule, the rider must take, in\nsequence, each of the following steps:\n1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as\npracticable to the far left side of the road that the rider is\nleaving.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 29\n2 Move forward:\n(a) keeping as near as practicable to the far left side of the\n(b) keeping clear of any marked foot crossing; and\n(c) keeping clear, as far as practicable, of any driver turning\nleft from the left of the intersection;\nuntil the rider is as near as practicable to the far side of the\nroad that the rider is entering.\n3 If there are traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the\nposition reached under step 2 until the traffic lights on the road\nthat the rider is entering change to green.\n4 If there are no traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the\nposition reached under step 2 until the rider has given way to\napproaching drivers on the road that the rider is leaving.\n5 Turn right into the road that the rider is entering.\nNote\nApproaching and marked foot crossing is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) To make a hook turn under this rule at an intersection that has a\nbicycle hook turn storage area on the left side of the intersection as\nthe rider approaches the intersection, the rider must take the\nfollowing initial 2 steps instead of the initial 2 steps listed in\nsubrule (3):\n1 Approach the intersection from the far left side of the road the\nrider is leaving and enter the intersection by moving into the\nbicycle hook turn storage area, keeping clear of any marked\nfoot crossing.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 30\n2 Move forward in the bicycle hook turn storage area until the\nrider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that\nthe rider is entering.\nNote\nBicycle hook turn storage area is defined in the dictionary.\nBicycle rider making a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 31\n","sortOrder":33},{"sectionNumber":"36","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle rider making a hook turn contrary to no hook turn by","content":"36 Bicycle rider making a hook turn contrary to no hook turn by\nbicycles sign\nThe rider of a bicycle must not make a hook turn at an intersection\nthat has a no hook turn by bicycles sign.\nNote\nBicycle and intersection are defined in the dictionary.\nNo hook turn by bicycles sign\n","sortOrder":34},{"sectionNumber":"Div 4","sectionType":"division","heading":"U-turns","content":"Division 4 U-turns\nNote\n","sortOrder":35},{"sectionNumber":"37","sectionType":"section","heading":"Beginning a U-turn","content":"37 Beginning a U-turn\nA driver must not begin a U-turn unless:\n(b) the driver can safely make the U-turn without unreasonably\nobstructing the free movement of traffic.\n1 Approaching traffic means traffic approaching from any direction – see the\ndefinition in the dictionary.\n2 Traffic is defined in the dictionary.\n38 Giving way when making a U-turn\n(1) A driver making a U-turn must give way to all vehicles and\nNote\nFor this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop\nto avoid a collision – see the definition in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 32\n(2) Despite subrule (1), a driver does not have to give way to a driver\nentering the road from a road-related area or adjacent land.\nNote\nAdjacent land is defined in the dictionary and road-related area is defined in\nrule 13.\nNote\n","sortOrder":36},{"sectionNumber":"39","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a U-turn contrary to a no U-turn sign","content":"39 Making a U-turn contrary to a no U-turn sign\n(1) A driver must not make a U-turn at a break in a dividing strip on a\nroad if there is a no U-turn sign at the break in the dividing strip.\n1 Dividing strip is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 322(5) and (6) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a break in a\ndividing strip.\n(2) A driver must not make a U-turn on a length of road to which a no\nU-turn sign applies.\nNote\n(3) A no U-turn sign on a road (except a no U-turn sign at an\nintersection or at a break in a dividing strip) applies to the length of\nroad beginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:\n(a) the next intersection on the road;\n(b) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end – the end of\n1 Intersection and T-intersection are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 33\nNo U-turn signs\nThere is another permitted version of each of these no U-turn signs – see the\n","sortOrder":37},{"sectionNumber":"40","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights","content":"40 Making a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights\nA driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights\nunless there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection.\nNote\nU-turn permitted sign\n","sortOrder":38},{"sectionNumber":"41","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a U-turn at an intersection without traffic lights","content":"41 Making a U-turn at an intersection without traffic lights\nA driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection without traffic\nlights if there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.\n1 Intersection and traffic lights are defined in the dictionary.\n2 U-turns are permitted at intersections without traffic lights unless there is a no\nU-turn sign, even though traffic lane arrows indicate that the driver must or\nmay turn right – see rule 92.\n","sortOrder":39},{"sectionNumber":"42","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting a U-turn at an intersection","content":"42 Starting a U-turn at an intersection\nA driver making a U-turn at an intersection must start the U-turn:\n(a) if the road where the driver is turning has a dividing line or\nmedian strip – from the marked lane nearest, or as near as\npracticable, to the dividing line or median strip; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 34\n(b) in any other case – from the left of the centre of the road.\nNote\nCentre of the road, dividing line, intersection, marked lane and median strip\nStarting a U-turn on a road with a median strip\n","sortOrder":40},{"sectionNumber":"43","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a U-turn at certain crossings","content":"43 Making a U-turn at certain crossings\nA driver must not make a U-turn at any of the following crossings,\nwith or without traffic lights, unless there is a U-turn permitted sign\nat the crossing:\n(a) children's crossing;\n(b) level crossing;\n(c) marked foot crossing;\n(d) pedestrian crossing.\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in rule 80, level crossing is defined in rule 120,\npedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81 and marked foot crossing and traffic\nlights are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 35\n","sortOrder":41},{"sectionNumber":"43A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a U-turn on a road-related area with traffic lights","content":"43A Making a U-turn on a road-related area with traffic lights\nA driver must not make a U-turn at a place with traffic lights where a\nroad and road-related area intersect unless there is a U-turn\npermitted sign at the place.\n2 Traffic lights is defined in the dictionary and road-related area is defined in\nrule 13.\nPart 5 Change of direction and stop signals\nDivision 1 Change of direction signals\n44 Division does not apply to entering or leaving a roundabout,\nlane filtering or repositioning\nThis Division does not apply to:\n(a) a driver entering, in or leaving a roundabout; or\n(b) the rider of a motorbike while lane filtering in accordance with\nrule 151A; or\n(c) the rider of a motorbike while repositioning the motorbike\nwithin the same lane in order to avoid a hazard or reduce the\nrisk of a crash.\n1 Part 9 deals with giving change of direction signals when entering or leaving\na roundabout.\n2 Lane filtering is defined in rule 151A.\n45 What is changing direction\n(1) A driver changes direction if the driver changes direction to the left\nor the driver changes direction to the right.\n(2) A driver changes direction to the left by doing any of the\n(a) turning left;\n(b) changing marked lanes to the left;\n(c) diverging to the left;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 36\n(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the left;\n(e) moving to the left to, or from, a stationary position;\n(f) turning left into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a\nmedian strip parking area;\n(g) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the\nright – leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead\nonto the terminating road.\n1 Marked lane and median strip parking area are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For the meaning of left, see rule 351(1).\n(3) A driver changes direction to the right by doing any of the\n(a) turning right;\n(b) changing marked lanes to the right;\n(c) diverging to the right;\n(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the right;\n(e) moving to the right from a stationary position;\n(f) turning right into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a\nmedian strip parking area;\n(g) making a U-turn;\n(h) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the\nleft – leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead\nonto the terminating road.\n1 U-turn is defined in the dictionary.\n2 For the meaning of right, see rule 351(2).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 37\nExamples for subrules (2)(g) and (3)(h)\nDriver indicating change of direction\nat a T-intersection where the\ncontinuing road curves to the right\nand the driver is proceeding straight\nahead onto the terminating road\nDriver indicating change of direction\nat a T-intersection where the\ncontinuing road curves to the left\nand the driver is proceeding straight\nahead onto the terminating road\n","sortOrder":42},{"sectionNumber":"46","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a left change of direction signal","content":"46 Giving a left change of direction signal\n(1) Before a driver changes direction to the left, the driver must give a\nleft change of direction signal in accordance with rule 47 for long\nenough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the\ndriver, that subrule.\nNote\nChanges direction to the left is defined in rule 45(2).\n(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough\nto give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.\n(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a\nstationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip\nparking area, the driver must give the change of direction signal for\nat least 5 seconds before the driver changes direction.\nNote\n(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon\nas the driver completes the change of direction.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 38\n(5) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver's vehicle is not fitted\nNote\n","sortOrder":43},{"sectionNumber":"47","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give a left change of direction signal","content":"47 How to give a left change of direction signal\nThe driver of a vehicle must give a left change of direction signal by\noperating the vehicle's left direction indicator lights.\n","sortOrder":44},{"sectionNumber":"48","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a right change of direction signal","content":"48 Giving a right change of direction signal\n(1) Before a driver changes direction to the right, the driver must give a\nright change of direction signal in accordance with rule 49 for long\nenough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the\ndriver, that subrule.\nNote\nChanges direction to the right is defined in rule 45(3).\n(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough\nto give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.\n(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a\nstationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip\nparking area, the driver must give the change of direction signal for\nat least 5 seconds before the driver changes direction.\nNote\n(3A) Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle that is stopped in\ntraffic but not parked.\n(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon\nas the driver completes the change of direction.\n(5) This rule does not apply to:\n(a) the driver of a tram that is not fitted with direction indicator\nlights; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 39\n(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn.\n1 Bicycle and tram are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rules 34 and 35 deal with bicycles making hook turns.\n49 How to give a right change of direction signal\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a right change of direction signal\nby operating the vehicle's right direction indicator lights.\n(2) However, if the vehicle's direction indicator lights are not in working\norder or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with\ndirection indicator lights, the driver must give the change of\ndirection signal by giving a hand signal in accordance with rule 50,\nor using a mechanical signalling device fitted to the vehicle.\n1 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 78 of the Traffic\n2 Mechanical signalling device is defined in the dictionary.\n50 How to give a right change of direction signal by giving a hand\nsignal\nTo give a hand signal for changing direction to the right, the driver\nmust extend the right arm and hand horizontally and at right angles\nfrom the right side of the vehicle, with the hand open and the palm\nfacing the direction of travel.\nGiving a hand signal for changing direction to the right\n","sortOrder":45},{"sectionNumber":"51","sectionType":"section","heading":"When use of direction indicator lights permitted","content":"51 When use of direction indicator lights permitted\nThe driver of a vehicle must not operate a direction indicator light\nexcept:\n(a) to give a change of direction signal when the driver is required\nto give the signal under the Australian Road Rules; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 40\n(b) as part of the vehicle's hazard warning lights.\nNote\nRule 221 deals with the use of hazard warning lights.\nDivision 2 Stop signals\n","sortOrder":46},{"sectionNumber":"52","sectionType":"section","heading":"Division does not apply to bicycle riders or certain tram","content":"52 Division does not apply to bicycle riders or certain tram\ndrivers\nThis Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, or the driver of\na tram that is not fitted with brake lights.\nNote\nBicycle and tram are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":47},{"sectionNumber":"53","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a stop signal","content":"53 Giving a stop signal\n(1) A driver must give a stop signal in accordance with rule 54 before\nstopping or when suddenly slowing.\n(2) If the driver is stopping, the driver must give the stop signal for long\nenough to give sufficient warning to other road users.\n(3) If the driver is slowing suddenly, the driver must give the stop signal\nwhile slowing.\n","sortOrder":48},{"sectionNumber":"54","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give a stop signal","content":"54 How to give a stop signal\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a stop signal by means of the\nvehicle's brake lights.\n(2) However, if the vehicle's brake lights are not in working order or are\nnot clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with brake lights, the\ndriver must give the stop signal by giving a hand signal in\naccordance with rule 55, or using a mechanical signalling device\nfitted to the vehicle.\n1 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 78 of the Traffic\nRegulations 1999\n2 Mechanical signalling device is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 41\n","sortOrder":49},{"sectionNumber":"55","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give a stop signal by giving a hand signal","content":"55 How to give a stop signal by giving a hand signal\n(1) To give a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing, the driver\nmust extend the right arm and hand at right angles from the right\nside of the vehicle, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm\nand hand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm\nfacing the direction of travel.\n(2) However, the rider of a motor bike may give the hand signal by\nextending the left arm and hand at right angles from the left side of\nthe motor bike, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and\nhand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing\nthe direction of travel.\nNote\nGiving a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing\nPart 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red lights\nDivision 1 Obeying traffic lights and traffic arrows\n1 Traffic arrows and traffic lights are defined in the dictionary. Traffic arrows\nare a traffic control device designed to show a traffic arrow, or 2 or more\ntraffic arrows at different times – see the definition in the dictionary.\n2 A reference in a rule of this Part to a green, yellow or red traffic light or traffic\narrow is a reference to a steady green, yellow or red traffic light or traffic\narrow, unless otherwise stated in the rule – see rule 323.\n3 The rules dealing with T lights and B lights, which apply to drivers of trams\nand public buses, are in Part 17.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 42\n","sortOrder":50},{"sectionNumber":"56","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a red traffic light or arrow","content":"56 Stopping for a red traffic light or arrow\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red traffic light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights – as near as\n(b) if there is a stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic\nlights, but no stop line – as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the sign; or\n(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red signal sign at or\nnear the traffic lights – as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the nearest or only traffic lights;\nand must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red signal\nsign or nearest or only traffic lights (as the case may be) until the\ntraffic lights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic\nNote\nRed traffic light and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\nExample for subrule (1)(b)\nStopping at a stop here on red signal sign on a road the driver is entering\nIn this example the driver may go straight ahead, or turn right or left, if there is a\ngreen traffic light showing at 1. However, the driver must not go beyond the stop\nhere on red signal sign at 2 if there is a red traffic light showing on the road the\ndriver is entering (see 2 and 3).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 43\n(1A) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\nNote\n(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a red traffic arrow\nwho is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop:\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows – as near as\n(b) if there is a stop here on red arrow sign at or near the traffic\narrows, but no stop line – as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the sign; or\n(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red arrow sign at or near\nthe traffic arrows – as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the nearest or only traffic arrows;\nand must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red arrow\nsign or nearest or only traffic arrows (as the case may be) until the\ntraffic arrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no\ntraffic arrow.\n1 Red traffic arrow is defined in the dictionary.\n2 This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane if the red traffic\nlight or red traffic arrow applies to the slip lane – see Part 20, Divisions 2\nand 3, especially rules 330 and 345.\n3 Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.\n4 The driver of a tram or a public bus does not have to stop at traffic lights\nshowing a red traffic light if a white T light (for trams) or a white B light (for\npublic buses) is also showing, or a white traffic arrow is showing and the\ndriver is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow – see rules 278\nand 285.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 44\nStop here on red signal sign Stop here on red arrow sign\nThere is another permitted version of the stop here on red signal sign – see the\ndiagram in Schedule 3.\n(3) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to\nin subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1)(a)\nor (2)(a):\n(a) in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the\nfirst stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching\nthe lights;\n(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop\nline that is nearest to the intersection.\nNote\n","sortOrder":51},{"sectionNumber":"57","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a yellow traffic light or arrow","content":"57 Stopping for a yellow traffic light or arrow\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a yellow traffic light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the stop line – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the traffic lights – as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic\nlights; or\n(c) if the traffic lights are at an intersection and the driver cannot\nstop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can\nstop safely before entering the intersection – before entering\nthe intersection;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 45\nand must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic\nlights, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic\nlights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic light.\nNote\nEnter, intersection, stop line and yellow traffic light are defined in the\n(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a yellow traffic\narrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must\nstop:\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the stop line – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the\ndriver can stop safely before reaching the traffic arrows – as\nnear as practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only\ntraffic arrows; or\n(c) if the traffic arrows are at an intersection and the driver cannot\nstop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can\nstop safely before entering the intersection – before entering\nthe intersection;\nand must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic\narrows, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic\narrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic\nNote\nEnter, intersection, stop line and yellow traffic arrow are defined in the\n(3) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) are at an\nintersection and the driver is not able to stop safely under\nsubrule (1) or (2) (as the case may be) and enters the intersection,\nthe driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do\nso safely.\n1 Intersection does not include a road-related area – see the definition in the\nDictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 46\n2 This rule applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane only if the yellow\ntraffic light or yellow traffic arrow (as the case may be) applies to the slip\nlane – see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and 345.\n3 Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop at a yellow traffic\n(4) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to\nin subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1)(a)\nor (2)(a):\n(a) in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the\nfirst stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching\nthe lights;\n(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop\nline that is nearest to the intersection.\nNote\n","sortOrder":52},{"sectionNumber":"58","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to stopping for a red or yellow traffic light","content":"58 Exceptions to stopping for a red or yellow traffic light\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red or yellow\ntraffic light does not have to stop if a green traffic arrow is also\nNote\nGreen traffic arrow, red traffic light and yellow traffic light are defined in the\n(2) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights who approaches\nor is at a red traffic light on the road that the driver is entering does\nnot have to stop for that traffic light if there is no stop line or stop\nhere on red signal sign at or near the traffic light.\nNote\nIntersection and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":53},{"sectionNumber":"59","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through a red traffic light","content":"59 Proceeding through a red traffic light\n(1) If traffic lights at an intersection or marked foot crossing are\nshowing a red traffic light, a driver must not enter the intersection or\nmarked foot crossing.\n1 Enter, intersection, marked foot crossing and red traffic light are defined\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 47\n2 Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic light, and\nproceeding while the light remains red or yellow. Rule 60 deals with\nproceeding through a red traffic arrow.\n(2) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\nNote\n(3) Also, subrule (1) does not apply to a driver if rule 58(1) applies to\nNote\nRule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.\nLeft turn on red after stopping sign\n","sortOrder":54},{"sectionNumber":"60","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through a red traffic arrow","content":"60 Proceeding through a red traffic arrow\nIf traffic arrows at an intersection or marked foot crossing are\nshowing a red traffic arrow, and a driver is turning in the direction\nindicated by the arrow, the driver must not enter the intersection or\nmarked foot crossing.\n1 Enter, intersection, marked foot crossing and red traffic arrow are\n2 Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic arrow.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 48\n","sortOrder":55},{"sectionNumber":"60A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through a bicycle storage area before a red traffic","content":"60A Proceeding through a bicycle storage area before a red traffic\nlight or arrow\n(1) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic lights that are\nshowing a red traffic light, a driver of a motor vehicle must not allow\nany part of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.\nNote\nBicycle storage area, red traffic light, and motor vehicle are defined in the\n(2) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic arrows that are\nshowing a red traffic arrow, and a driver of a motor vehicle is\nturning in the direction indicated by the arrow, the driver must not\nallow any part of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.\nNote\nRed traffic arrow is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":56},{"sectionNumber":"61","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows at an intersection","content":"61 Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows at an intersection\nchange to yellow or red\n(a) a driver at an intersection with traffic lights showing a green\ntraffic light who has stopped after the stop line, stop here on\nred signal sign, or nearest or only traffic lights, at the\nintersection and is not making a hook turn at the intersection;\nor\n(b) a driver at an intersection with traffic arrows showing a green\ntraffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the\narrow and has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red\narrow sign, or nearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.\nA driver may stop after the stop line at an intersection with traffic lights showing a\ngreen traffic light, and not proceed through the intersection, because traffic is\ncongested.\n1 Green traffic arrow, green traffic light, intersection and stop line are\n2 Hook turns are dealt with in rules 34 and 35.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 49\n(2) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) change to\nyellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has not\nentered the intersection, the driver must not enter the intersection.\nNote\nEnter is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\nNote\n(4) Also, subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if rule 58(1) applies to\nNote\nRule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.\n(5) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) change to\nyellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has entered\nthe intersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as\nthe driver can do so safely.\nNote\nIntersection does not include a road-related area – see the definition in the\nDivision 2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic arrows\nNote\nTraffic lights are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":57},{"sectionNumber":"62","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when turning at an intersection with traffic lights","content":"62 Giving way when turning at an intersection with traffic lights\n(1) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights must give way\nto:\n(a) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 50\n(b) if the driver is turning left at a left turn on red after stopping\nsign at the intersection:\n(i) any vehicle approaching from the right, turning right at\nthe intersection into the road the driver is entering or\nmaking a U-turn; and\n(ii) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is on the\nroad the driver is leaving; and\n(c) if the driver is turning right – any oncoming vehicle that is\ngoing straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except\na vehicle turning left using a slip lane).\n1 Intersection, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, straight ahead and U-turn are\nto proceed – see the definition in the dictionary.\n3 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at an intersection.\n4 A driver turning left at a left turn on red after stopping sign, at an intersection\nwith traffic lights showing a red traffic light, must stop in accordance with\nrule 56(1) before making the turn.\n5 The application of this rule and rule 353(1) and (2) is modified by\n6 In relation to paragraph (a), rule 353(1), as modified by regulation 78AAA,\n(2) However, a driver who is turning at an intersection with traffic\narrows showing a green traffic arrow need not give way to an\noncoming vehicle if the driver is turning in the direction indicated by\nthe green traffic arrow.\nNote\nGreen traffic arrow is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 51\nGiving way to a pedestrian on the road\nthe driver is entering\noncoming vehicle going straight ahead\nDriver turning right does not have to give way to an oncoming vehicle that is\nturning left into the road the driver is entering using a slip lane\nIn example 1, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\nIn examples 2 and 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":58},{"sectionNumber":"63","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at an intersection with traffic lights not operating","content":"63 Giving way at an intersection with traffic lights not operating\nor only partly operating\n(1) This rule applies to a driver at an intersection if traffic lights at the\nintersection are not operating, or the traffic lights are showing only a\nflashing yellow traffic light.\nNote\nIntersection and yellow traffic light are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 52\n(2) If there is a traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must\ncomply with rule 67 as if the sign were a stop sign at an intersection\nwithout traffic lights.\n1 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at an intersection.\n2 Rule 67 deals with stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an\nintersection without traffic lights.\n3 There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver to stop for a\nflashing yellow traffic light or traffic lights that are not operating.\n(3) If there is no traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must\ngive way to vehicles and pedestrians at or near the intersection in\naccordance with rule 72 or 73 as if the intersection were an\nintersection without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give way\nsign or give way line.\n1 Give way line and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rules 72 and 73 deal with giving way at an intersection (except a\nroundabout) without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or\ngive way line applying to the driver.\nTraffic light-stop sign\n(4) Subrule (3) does not apply if the intersection is a roundabout.\n1 Roundabout is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 114 requires a driver entering a roundabout to give way to any vehicle\nin the roundabout and to any tram that is entering or approaching the\nroundabout.\n","sortOrder":59},{"sectionNumber":"64","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection","content":"64 Giving way at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection\nA driver turning in the direction indicated by a flashing yellow traffic\narrow at an intersection with traffic lights must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the road the driver is entering; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 53\n(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering; and\n(c) if the driver is turning right – any oncoming vehicle that is\ngoing straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except\na vehicle turning left using a slip lane).\n1 Intersection, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, straight ahead and yellow\ntraffic arrow are defined in the dictionary.\n3 There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver to stop for a\nflashing yellow traffic arrow.\n4 The application of this rule and rule 353(1) and (2) is modified by\n5 In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353(1), as modified by regulation 78AAA,\n65 Giving way at a marked foot crossing (except at an\nintersection) with a flashing yellow traffic light\n(1) This rule applies to a driver approaching or at a marked foot\ncrossing (except at or near an intersection) with a flashing yellow\ntraffic light at the crossing.\nNote\nIntersection, marked foot crossing and yellow traffic light are defined in the\n(2) The driver must:\n(a) give way to any pedestrian on or entering the crossing; and\n(b) not obstruct any pedestrian on the crossing; and\n(c) not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give\nway at the crossing; and\n(d) give way to any bicycle rider on or entering the crossing.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 54\n1 Overtake is defined in the dictionary.\n2 For subrule (2), give way means the driver must slow down and, if\n(3) If there is no pedestrian or bicycle rider on the crossing, and no\nother vehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver that is\nstopping, or has stopped, to give way at the crossing, the driver\nmay proceed through the crossing.\nDivision 3 Twin red lights (except at level crossings)\n","sortOrder":60},{"sectionNumber":"66","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossings)","content":"66 Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossings)\n(1) A driver approaching or at twin red lights on a road (except at a\nlevel crossing) must stop in accordance with subrules (2) and (3).\n1 Level crossing is defined in rule 120, and twin red lights is defined in the\n2 Rule 322(1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device on a\n3 Twin red lights are generally erected at bridges, ambulance stations, fire\nstations or level crossings. The rules about stopping at level crossings are in\nPart 10.\n(2) If there is a stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop\nsafely before reaching the stop line, the driver must stop as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the stop line.\nNote\nStop line is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) If there is no stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop\nsafely before reaching the lights, the driver must stop as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the lights.\n(4) If the driver stops for the lights, the driver must not proceed until the\nlights are not showing.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 55\n","sortOrder":61},{"sectionNumber":"Part 7","sectionType":"part","heading":"Giving way","content":"Part 7 Giving way\n1 The rules in this Part deal with giving way in most situations. In addition, other\nrules requiring a driver to give way include:\n• making a U-turn – rule 38\n• turning at traffic lights at an intersection – rule 62\n• at an intersection with traffic lights that are not operating or only partly\noperating – rule 63\n• turning at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection – rule 64\n• at a marked foot crossing with a flashing yellow traffic light – rule 65\n• entering and driving in a roundabout – rule 114\n• by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving a roundabout – rule 119\n• at a stop sign at a level crossing – rule 121\n• at a give way sign or give way line at a level crossing – rule 122\n• moving from one marked lane to another marked lane, or from one line of\ntraffic to another line of traffic – rule 148\n• when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic – rule 149\n• for pedestrians crossing the road near a stopped tram – rules 163, 164 and\n164A.\n2 For the meaning of left and right, see rule 351(1) and (2).\n","sortOrder":62},{"sectionNumber":"Div 1","sectionType":"division","heading":"Giving way at a stop sign, stop line, give way sign","content":"Division 1 Giving way at a stop sign, stop line, give way sign\nor give way line applying to the driver\nNote\nFor a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic sign or road marking\nis a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying to the driver – see\nrules 338 to 341.\n","sortOrder":63},{"sectionNumber":"67","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an","content":"67 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an\nintersection without traffic lights\n(1) A driver at an intersection with a stop sign or stop line, but without\ntraffic lights, must stop and give way in accordance with this rule.\n1 Intersection and stop line are defined in the dictionary. This rule applies\nalso to T-intersections – see the definition of intersection.\n3 Part 6 deals with stopping and giving way at an intersection with traffic lights.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 56\n4 This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane if the stop sign\nor stop line applies to the slip lane – see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3,\nespecially rules 330 and 345.\n(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching:\n(a) the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line – the intersection.\n(3) The driver must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching\nthe intersection except:\n(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the\ndriver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane; or\n(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.\nNote\nEnter, give way line, oncoming vehicle, slip lane and U-turn are defined in the\n(4) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver\nmust also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection\nwho is crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 57\n(5) For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a\nT-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be turning.\nStop line\nsign to vehicles on the left and right\nIn example 2, vehicle B must stop and give way to each vehicle A.\nsign to an oncoming vehicle at a\nstop sign\nsign to an oncoming vehicle that is\nnot at a stop sign or give way sign\nIn examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle A.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 58\n","sortOrder":64},{"sectionNumber":"68","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at other","content":"68 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at other\nplaces\n(1) A driver approaching or at a place with a stop sign or stop line must\nstop and give way in accordance with this rule, unless the place is:\n(a) an intersection; or\n(b) a children's crossing; or\n(c) an area of a road that is not a children's crossing only\nbecause it does not have:\n(i) children crossing flags; or\n(ii) children's crossing signs and twin yellow lights; or\n(d) a level crossing; or\n(e) a place with twin red lights.\n1 A stop sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road used by\nthe main body of moving vehicles from a service road.\n2 A stop sign on an exit from a carpark where the exit joins the road.\n1 Children's crossing is defined in rule 80, intersection, stop line and twin\nred lights are defined in the dictionary, and level crossing is defined in\nrule 120.\n3 For the stopping and giving way rules applying to a driver at an intersection or\nlevel crossing with a stop sign or stop line, see rule 67 (intersections) and\nrule 121 (level crossings). Rule 80 deals with stopping at a stop line at a\nchildren's crossing.\n(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching:\n(a) the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line – the stop sign.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 59\n(3) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the\nstop line or stop sign.\nsign at a break in a dividing strip\nStopping and giving way at a\nstop sign where a carpark exit joins\na road\nIn each example, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":65},{"sectionNumber":"69","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at an","content":"69 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at an\nintersection (except a roundabout)\n(1) A driver at an intersection (except a roundabout) with a give way\nsign or give way line must give way in accordance with this rule.\n1 Give way line and intersection are defined in the dictionary, and\nroundabout is defined in rule 109. This rule also applies to T-intersections –\nsee the definition of intersection.\n(2) Unless the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must\ngive way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the intersection\nexcept:\n(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the\ndriver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane; or\n(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.\nNote\nEnter, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, stop line and U-turn are defined in the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 60\n(2A) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way\nto:\n(a) any vehicle on the road the driver is entering, or turning right\nat the intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a\nvehicle making a U-turn at the intersection); and\n(b) any other vehicle or pedestrian on the slip lane.\n(3) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver\nmust also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection\nwho is crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.\n(4) For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a\nT-intersection on the continuing rod is taken not to be turning.\nGive way line\nGiving way at a give way sign to\nvehicles on the left and right\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 61\nIn example 2, vehicle B must give way to each vehicle A.\nGiving way at a give way sign to an\noncoming vehicle at a give way sign\nGiving way at a give way sign to an\noncoming vehicle that is not at a\nstop sign or give way sign\nIn examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nDriver turning right at a give way line does not have to\ngive way to a vehicle turning left using a slip lane\nIn example 5, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":66},{"sectionNumber":"70","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or length of narrow","content":"70 Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or length of narrow\nroad\nA driver approaching a bridge or length of narrow road with a give\nway sign must give way to any oncoming vehicle that is on, or\napproaching, the bridge or length of road when the driver reaches\nthe sign.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 62\nGiving way at a bridge\nGiving way at a length of\nnarrow road\nIn each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":67},{"sectionNumber":"71","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other places","content":"71 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other places\n(1) A driver approaching or at a place (except an intersection, bridge or\nlength of narrow road, level crossing, or a place with twin red lights)\nwith a give way sign or give way line must give way in accordance\n1 A give way sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road\nused by the main body of moving vehicles from a service road.\n2 A give way sign on a road at a place where a bicycle path meets the road.\n1 Give way line, intersection and twin red lights are defined in the\ndictionary, and level crossing is defined in rule 120.\n3 For the give way rules applying to a driver at an intersection, bridge or length\nof narrow road, or level crossing, with a give way sign or give way line, see\nrule 69 (intersections), rule 70 (bridges and lengths of narrow road) and\nrule 122 (level crossings).\n(2) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the\ngive way sign or give way line.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 63\nGiving way at a give way sign at a\nbreak in a dividing strip\nGiving way at a give way sign\nwhere a bicycle path\nmeets a road\nIn example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nIn example 2, the motor vehicle must give way to the bicycle.\nDivision 2 Giving way at an intersection without traffic lights\nor a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way\nline applying to the driver\nNote\nFor a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic sign or road marking\nis a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying to the driver – see\nrules 338 to 341.\n","sortOrder":68},{"sectionNumber":"72","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or","content":"72 Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or\nroundabout)\n(1) A driver at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout)\nwithout traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give\nway line, must give way in accordance with this rule.\n1 Give way line, intersection, stop line, T-intersection and traffic lights are\ndefined in the dictionary, and roundabout is defined in rule 109.\n(2) If the driver is going straight ahead, the driver must give way to any\nvehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line,\ngive way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the\napproaching vehicle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 64\nDriver going straight ahead giving\nway to a vehicle on the right that is\ngoing straight ahead\nDriver going straight ahead giving\nway to a vehicle on the right that is\nturning right\nIn each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nNote\nStraight ahead is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane),\nthe driver must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign,\nstop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of\nthe approaching vehicle; and\n(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering.\nDriver turning left giving way to a\nvehicle on the right that is going\nstraight ahead\nDriver turning left giving way\nto a pedestrian on the road the\ndriver is entering\nIn example 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nIn example 4, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 65\n1 Slip lane is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way\nto:\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right or turning right at the\nintersection into the road the driver is entering (except a\nvehicle making a U-turn at the intersection); and\n(b) any pedestrian on or entering the slip lane.\nDriver turning left using a slip lane\ngiving way to a vehicle that is turning\nright into the road the driver is entering\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nNote\n(4A) Subrule (4)(b) does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction does\nnot require a driver who is turning left using a slip lane to give way\nto a pedestrian on or entering a slip lane.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 66\n(5) If the driver is turning right, the driver must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign,\nstop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of\nthe approaching vehicle; and\n(b) any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning\nleft at the intersection, unless:\n(i) a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line\napplies to the driver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(ii) the oncoming vehicle is turning left using a slip lane; and\n(c) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering.\n3 In relation to paragraph (c), rule 353(1), as modified by regulation 78AAA,\nDriver turning right giving way to a\nvehicle on the right that is turning\nright into the road the driver is\nleaving\noncoming vehicle that is going\nstraight ahead on the road the\ndriver is leaving\nIn examples 6 and 7, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 67\nExample 8\noncoming vehicle that is turning left\ninto the road the driver is entering\nExample 9\nDriver turning right giving way\nto a pedestrian on the road the\ndriver is entering\nIn example 8, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nIn example 9, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\n","sortOrder":69},{"sectionNumber":"73","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a T-intersection","content":"73 Giving way at a T-intersection\n(1) A driver at a T-intersection without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop\nline, give way sign or give way line, must give way in accordance\n1 Give way line, stop line, T-intersection and traffic lights are defined in the\n3 Rule 75(1)(d) requires a driver at a T-intersection to give way when crossing\nthe continuing road to enter a road-related area or adjacent land.\n(2) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) or\nright from the terminating road into the continuing road, the driver\nmust give way to:\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection);\nand\n(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road at or near\n1 Continuing road, slip lane and terminating road are defined in the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 68\nvehicle on the continuing road\nDriver turning left (except if the\ndriver is using a slip lane) from the\npedestrian on the continuing road\nIn example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nIn example 2, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\n(3) If the driver is turning left from the terminating road into the\ncontinuing road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection);\nand\n(b) any pedestrian on the slip lane.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 69\n(4) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane)\nfrom the continuing road into the terminating road, the driver must\ngive way to any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at\nor near the intersection.\nDriver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the continuing road giving\nway to a pedestrian on the terminating road\nIn this example, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\n(5) If the driver is turning from the continuing road into the terminating\nroad using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn from the terminating road at the\nT-intersection); and\n(b) any pedestrian on or entering the slip lane.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 70\n(5A) Subrule (5)(b) does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction does\nnot require a driver who is turning from a continuing road into a\nterminating road using a slip lane to give way to a pedestrian on or\nentering a slip lane.\nNote\n(6) If the driver is turning right from the continuing road into the\nterminating road, the driver must give way to:\n(a) any oncoming vehicle that is travelling through the intersection\non the continuing road or turning left at the intersection; and\n(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near\nturning left from the continuing road into the terminating road,\nfor a driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the right\nat a T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight\nahead onto the terminating road.\nturning right from the continuing road into the terminating\nroad, for a driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the\nleft at a T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed\nstraight ahead onto the terminating road.\nNote\nStraight ahead is defined in the dictionary\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 71\ncontinuing road giving way to an\noncoming vehicle travelling through\nthe intersection on the\ncontinuing road\nDriver leaving the continuing road to\nproceed straight ahead on the\nvehicle travelling through the\nintersection on the continuing road\nExample 5 shows a T-intersection where the continuing road (which is marked\nwith broken white lines) goes around a corner. Vehicle B is leaving the continuing\nroad to enter the terminating road. In examples 4 and 5, vehicle B must give way\nto vehicle A.\ncontinuing road giving way to an\noncoming vehicle turning left from\nthe continuing road\ncontinuing road giving way to a\npedestrian on the terminating road\nIn example 6, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nIn example 7, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 72\nDivision 3 Entering or leaving road-related areas and\n","sortOrder":70},{"sectionNumber":"74","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when entering a road from a road-related area or","content":"74 Giving way when entering a road from a road-related area or\n(1) A driver entering a road from a road-related area, or adjacent land,\nwithout traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give\nway line must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the road or turning into the road\n(except a vehicle turning right into the road from a road-related\narea or adjacent land); and\n(ab) a driver making a U-turn on the road; and\n(b) any pedestrian on the road; and\n(c) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road-related area that the\ndriver crosses to enter the road; and\n(d) for a driver entering the road from a road-related area:\n(i) any pedestrian on the road-related area; and\n(ii) any other vehicle ahead of the driver's vehicle or\napproaching from the left or right.\n1 Adjacent land, give way line, stop line, traffic lights and U-turn are\ndefined in the dictionary, and road-related area is defined in rule 13.\n2 Adjacent land or a road-related area can include a driveway, service station\nor shopping centre – see the definitions of adjacent land and road-related\narea. Some shopping centres may include roads – see the definition of road\nin rule 12.\n3 Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68 applies to the\ndriver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if\nthere is a give way sign or give way line.\n4 For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary,\n5 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 78AAA of the Traffic\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 73\nNote\nDriver entering a road from a road-related area giving way\nto a pedestrian on the footpath and a vehicle on the road\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to the pedestrian on the footpath and to\nvehicle A.\n","sortOrder":71},{"sectionNumber":"75","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when entering a road-related area or adjacent land","content":"75 Giving way when entering a road-related area or adjacent land\nfrom a road\n(1) A driver entering a road-related area or adjacent land from a place\non a road without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way\nsign or give way line must give way to:\n(a) any pedestrian on the road; and\n(b) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road-related area that the\ndriver crosses or enters; and\n(c) if the driver is turning right from the road – any oncoming\nvehicle on the road that is going straight ahead or turning left;\nand\n(d) if the road the driver is leaving ends at a T-intersection\nopposite the road-related area or adjacent land and the driver\nis crossing the continuing road – any vehicle on the continuing\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 74\n1 Adjacent land, continuing road, give way line, oncoming vehicle, stop\nline, straight ahead, T-intersection and traffic lights are defined in the\ndictionary, and road-related area is defined in rule 13.\n2 Adjacent land or a road-related area can include a driveway, service station\nor shopping centre – see the definitions of adjacent land and road-related\narea. Some shopping centres may include roads – see the definition of road\nin rule 12.\n4 Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68 applies to the\ndriver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if\nthere is a give way sign or give way line.\nNote\nDriver turning right from a road into\na road related area giving way to an\noncoming vehicle that is going\nstraight ahead and to a pedestrian\non the footpath\nDriver crossing a continuing road\nat a T-intersection to enter a road-\nrelated area giving way to a\nvehicle on the continuing road\nIn each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. In example 1, vehicle B\nmust also give way to the pedestrian on the footpath.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 75\nDivision 4 Keeping clear of and giving way to particular\n","sortOrder":72},{"sectionNumber":"76","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes etc.","content":"76 Keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes etc.\n(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching tram\ntravelling in a tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left\nside of the tracks by a broken or continuous yellow line parallel to\nthe tracks.\nNote\nApproaching, left, tram and tram tracks are defined in the dictionary, and tram\nlane is defined in rule 155.\n(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching tram travelling in a tram\nlane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a\nbroken or continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks, the driver\nmust move out of the path of the tram as soon as the driver can do\nso safely.\nNote\nBus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":73},{"sectionNumber":"77","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to buses","content":"77 Giving way to buses\n(1) A driver driving on a length of road in a built-up area, in the left lane\nor left line of traffic, or in a bicycle lane on the far left side of the\nroad, must give way to a bus in front of the driver if:\n(a) the bus has stopped, or is moving slowly, at the far left side of\nthe road, on a shoulder of the road, or in a bus-stop bay; and\n(b) the bus displays a give way to buses sign and the right\ndirection indicator lights of the bus are operating; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 76\n(c) the bus is about to enter or proceed in the lane or line of traffic\nin which the driver is driving.\n1 Built-up area, bus and length of road are defined in the dictionary, left lane\nand left line of traffic are defined in subrule (2), and shoulder is defined in\nrule 12.\n3 The driver of the bus must give the change of direction signal for long enough\nto give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians – see rule 48(2)\n4 Under rule 87(1), a driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the\nside of the road must give way to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line of\ntraffic. However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a\nvehicle if the vehicle is required to give way to the bus under this rule and it\nis safe for the bus to enter the lane, or line of traffic, in which the other vehicle\nis travelling – see rule 87(2).\nleft lane, of a road, means:\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road (the\nfirst lane) or, if the first lane is a bicycle lane, the marked lane\nnext to the first lane; or\n(b) if there is an obstruction in the first lane (for example, a parked\ncar or roadworks) and the first lane is not a bicycle lane – the\nmarked lane next to the first lane.\nleft line of traffic, for a road, means the line of traffic nearest to the\nfar left side of the road.\nNote\nMarked lane and obstruction are defined in the dictionary, and bicycle lane is\ndefined in rule 153.\nGive way to buses sign\nThis sign is displayed on buses.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 77\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 78AA of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":74},{"sectionNumber":"78","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping clear of police and emergency vehicles","content":"78 Keeping clear of police and emergency vehicles\n(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching police or\nemergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light\n(whether or not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an\nalarm.\nNote\nApproaching, emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the\n(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching police or emergency\nvehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not\nit is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm, the driver\nmust move out of the path of the vehicle as soon as the driver can\ndo so safely.\n(3) This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of the\n","sortOrder":75},{"sectionNumber":"79","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to police and emergency vehicles","content":"79 Giving way to police and emergency vehicles\n(1) A driver must give way to a police or emergency vehicle that is\ndisplaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also\ndisplaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.\n1 Emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For this rule, give way means:\n(a) if the driver is stopped – remain stationary until it is safe to proceed;\nor\n(b) in any other case – slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a\ncollision;\n– see the definition in the dictionary.\n(2) This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of the\nAustralian Road Rules that would otherwise require the driver of a\npolice or emergency vehicle to give way to the driver.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 78\n","sortOrder":76},{"sectionNumber":"Div 5","sectionType":"division","heading":"Crossings and shared zones","content":"Division 5 Crossings and shared zones\n","sortOrder":77},{"sectionNumber":"80","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at a children's crossing","content":"80 Stopping at a children's crossing\n(1) A driver approaching a children's crossing must drive at a speed at\nwhich the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in subrule (6).\n(2) A driver approaching or at a children's crossing must stop as near\nas practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line at the crossing\nif:\n(a) a hand-held stop sign is displayed at the crossing; or\n(b) a pedestrian or bicycle rider is on or entering the crossing.\n1 Stop line is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device at a\nplace.\n(3) If a driver stops at a children's crossing for a hand-held stop sign,\nthe driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian or bicycle\nrider on or entering the crossing and the holder of the sign:\n(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver; or\n(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.\n(4) If a driver stops at a children's crossing for a pedestrian or bicycle\nrider, the driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian or\nbicycle rider on or entering the crossing.\n(5) For this rule, if a children's crossing extends across a road with a\ndividing strip, the part of the children's crossing on each side of the\ndividing strip is taken to be a separate children's crossing.\nNote\nDividing strip is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 79\n(6) A children's crossing is an area of a road:\n(a) at a place with stop lines marked on the road, and:\n(i) children crossing flags; or\n(ii) children's crossing signs and twin yellow lights; and\n(b) indicated by:\n(i) 2 red and white posts erected on each side of the road;\nor\n(ii) 2 parallel continuous or broken lines on the road surface\nfrom one side of the road completely or partly across the\n(c) extending across the road between the posts or lines.\nNote\nTwin yellow lights is defined in the dictionary.\nChildren crossing flag Children's crossing sign\nHand-held stop signs\n1 There is another permitted version of the children's crossing sign and a\nnumber of other permitted versions of the hand-held stop signs – see the\n2 A children's crossing sign may have a different number on the sign – see\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 80\nDriver stopped at stop line for\npedestrians on a children's crossing\nwith children crossing flags\nDriver stopped at stop line for\npedestrians on a children's crossing\nwith children's crossing signs and\ntwin yellow lights\nIn each of these examples, the driver must stop at the stop line because there\nare pedestrians on the children's crossing.\n","sortOrder":78},{"sectionNumber":"81","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a pedestrian crossing","content":"81 Giving way at a pedestrian crossing\n(1) A driver approaching a pedestrian crossing must drive at a speed at\nwhich the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.\nNote\nPedestrian crossing is defined in subrule (3).\n(2) A driver must give way to any pedestrian or bicycle rider on or\nentering a pedestrian crossing.\nNote\nFor this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop\nto avoid a collision – see the definition in the dictionary.\n(3) A pedestrian crossing is an area of a road:\n(a) at a place with white stripes on the road surface that:\n(i) run lengthwise along the road; and\n(ii) are of approximately the same length; and\n(iii) are approximately parallel to each other; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 81\n(iv) are in a row that extends completely, or partly, across\nthe road; and\n(b) with or without either or both of the following:\n(i) a pedestrian crossing sign;\n(ii) alternating flashing twin yellow lights.\n1 Twin yellow lights is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a place.\nPedestrian crossing sign\nGiving way to a pedestrian on\na pedestrian crossing\nGiving way to a pedestrian on a\npedestrian crossing at a slip lane\nIn each of these examples, the driver must give way to the pedestrian on the\n","sortOrder":79},{"sectionNumber":"82","sectionType":"section","heading":"Overtaking or passing a vehicle at a children's crossing or","content":"82 Overtaking or passing a vehicle at a children's crossing or\npedestrian crossing\nA driver approaching a children's crossing, or pedestrian crossing,\nmust not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way\nto a pedestrian at or bicycle rider on or entering the crossing.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 82\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in rule 80, overtake is defined in the dictionary,\nand pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.\nDriver not passing a vehicle that has stopped to give way to a\npedestrian at a pedestrian crossing\nIn the example, vehicle A has stopped to give way to a pedestrian on the crossing.\nVehicle B must not overtake or pass vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":80},{"sectionNumber":"83","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to pedestrians in a shared zone","content":"83 Giving way to pedestrians in a shared zone\nA driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian in\nthe zone.\n1 Shared zone is defined in rule 24.\nDivision 6 Other give way rules\n84 Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip\n(1) If a driver drives through a break in a dividing strip that has no stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, the driver must give\nway to:\n(a) any tram on the dividing strip; and\n(b) any vehicle travelling on the part of the road the driver is\nentering (except a vehicle to which a stop sign, stop line, give\nway sign, or give way line, applies).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 83\n1 Dividing strip, give way line, stop line and tram are defined in the\n2 Rule 68 applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71\napplies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way line.\nNote\nBus and travelling along tram tracks is defined in the dictionary.\nGiving way when driving through a break in a median strip\nGiving way when driving through\na break in a dividing strip to leave\na service road\nGiving way when driving through a\nbreak in a dividing strip to enter a\nservice road\nIn each of the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\nNote to examples\nA median strip is a particular kind of dividing strip – see the definition of median\nstrip in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 84\n","sortOrder":81},{"sectionNumber":"85","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way on a painted island","content":"85 Giving way on a painted island\nA driver entering a turning lane from a painted island must give way\nto:\n(a) any vehicle in the turning lane; or\n(b) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the far left\nside of the road – any vehicle entering the turning lane from\nthe marked lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the right of\nthe turning lane; or\n(c) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the\ndividing line or median strip on the road or the far right side of\nthe road – any vehicle entering the turning lane from the\nmarked lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the left of the\nturning lane.\n1 Line of traffic, marked lane, painted island and turning lane are defined in\n2 Rules 138 and 139(4) allow a driver to drive on a painted island in certain\ncircumstances.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 85\nDriver entering a turning lane from\na painted island giving way to a\nvehicle entering the turning lane\nfrom the marked lane immediately\nto the right of the turning lane.\nDriver entering a turning lane from\na painted island giving way to a\nvehicle entering the turning lane\nfrom the marked lane immediately\nto the left of the turning lane.\nIn the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 86\n","sortOrder":82},{"sectionNumber":"86","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way in median turning bays","content":"86 Giving way in median turning bays\n(1) A driver entering a median turning bay must give way to any\noncoming vehicle already in the turning bay.\nmedian turning bay means a marked lane, or the part of a marked\nlane:\n(a) to which a median turning lane sign applies; or\n(b) where traffic lane arrows applying to the lane indicate that\nvehicles travelling in opposite directions must turn right.\nNote\nMarked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the dictionary.\nThere is another permitted version of the median turning lane sign – see the\ndiagram in Schedule 3.\nGiving way in a median turning bay\nIn the example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 87\n","sortOrder":83},{"sectionNumber":"87","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving from a side of a road or a median","content":"87 Giving way when moving from a side of a road or a median\nstrip parking area\n(1) A driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the far left\nor right side of a road must give way to any vehicle travelling in the\nlane or line of traffic.\n1 Line of traffic and marked lane are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For subrule (1), give way means:\n(a) if the driver is stopped – remain stationary until it is safe to proceed;\nor\n(b) in any other case – slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a\ncollision;\n– see the definition in the dictionary.\n(2) However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a\nvehicle if:\n(a) the driver of the vehicle is required to give way to the bus\nunder rule 77; and\n(b) it is safe for the bus to enter the lane or line of traffic in which\nthe vehicle is driving.\n1 Public bus is defined in the dictionary.\n2 The bus must display a give way to buses sign and the right direction\nindicator lights of the bus must be operating – see rule 77.\n(3) A driver turning from a median strip parking area into a marked\nlane, or a line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in\nthe lane or line of traffic.\n1 Median strip parking area is defined in the dictionary.\n2 For subrule (3), give way means the driver must slow down and, if\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 88\nNote\n","sortOrder":84},{"sectionNumber":"Part 8","sectionType":"part","heading":"Traffic signs and road markings","content":"Part 8 Traffic signs and road markings\n1 The rules in this Part cover most traffic signs and road markings. However,\nsome traffic signs and road markings are dealt with in other Parts dealing with\nparticular subjects. These include:\n• speed-limits (including speed-limits in speed-limited areas and shared\nzones) – see Part 3\n• U-turns – see Part 4, Division 4\n• traffic lights – see Part 6\n• stop signs and give way signs – see Part 7, Division 1\n• roundabouts – see Part 9\n• level crossings – see Part 10\n• keeping left and lane signs – see Part 11\n• stopping and parking – see Part 12\n• pedestrians – see Part 14\n• bicycle riders – see Part 15.\n2 Rule 322 deals with the meaning of traffic control devices on a road or in or\nat an area or place (including an intersection).\n3 For a driver, a traffic sign or road marking mentioned in a rule is, unless the\ncontrary intention appears, a sign or marking that applies to the driver. To find\nout how traffic signs and road markings apply to a driver, see rules 338\nto 341.\nDivision 1 Traffic signs and road markings at intersections\nand other places\nNote\nIntersection, road marking and traffic sign are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 89\n","sortOrder":85},{"sectionNumber":"88","sectionType":"section","heading":"Left turn signs","content":"88 Left turn signs\n(1) If there is a left turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn\nleft at the intersection.\nNote\nFor the meaning of left, see rule 351(1).\n(2) If there is a left lane must turn left sign at an intersection, a driver\nwho is in the left marked lane when entering the intersection must\nturn left at the intersection.\nNote\nLeft turn only sign Left lane must turn left sign\nThere is another permitted version of each of these signs – see the diagrams in\n","sortOrder":86},{"sectionNumber":"89","sectionType":"section","heading":"Right turn signs","content":"89 Right turn signs\n(1) If there is a right turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn\nright at the intersection.\nNote\nFor the meaning of right, see rule 351(2).\n(2) If there is a right lane must turn right sign at an intersection, a driver\nwho is in the right marked lane when entering the intersection must\nturn right at the intersection.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 90\nturn right does not include make a U-turn.\nNote\nRight turn only sign Right lane must turn right sign\nThere are a number of other permitted versions of the right turn only sign, and\nanother permitted version of the right lane must turn right sign – see the\n","sortOrder":87},{"sectionNumber":"90","sectionType":"section","heading":"No turns signs","content":"90 No turns signs\nIf there is a no turns sign at an intersection, a driver must not turn\nleft or right, or make a U-turn, at the intersection.\nNote\nNo turns sign\n","sortOrder":88},{"sectionNumber":"91","sectionType":"section","heading":"No left turn and no right turn signs","content":"91 No left turn and no right turn signs\n(1) If there is a no left turn sign at an intersection, or another place on a\nroad, a driver must not turn left at the intersection or place.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 91\n(2) If there is a no right turn sign at an intersection, or another place on\na road, a driver must not turn right or make a U-turn at the\nintersection or place.\nNo left turn signs\nNo right turn signs\nThere is another permitted version of each of the no left turn sign and a number\nof other permitted versions of the no right turn signs – see the diagrams in\n(3) However, a driver may make a U-turn at the intersection or place if\nthere is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection or place.\n","sortOrder":89},{"sectionNumber":"92","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic lane arrows","content":"92 Traffic lane arrows\n(1) If a driver is driving in a marked lane at an intersection (except a\nroundabout) and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane,\nthe driver must:\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction – drive in that direction;\nor\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions – drive in one of\nthose directions.\n1 Marked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Part 9 deals with traffic lane arrows at roundabouts.\n3 Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 92\n(2) However, this rule does not apply to a driver if:\n(a) the arrows indicate a direction to the right (whether or not they\nalso indicate another direction) at an intersection and the\ndriver is making a U-turn at the intersection; or\n(b) a traffic sign indicates that the driver may drive in a direction\ndifferent to that indicated by the traffic lane arrows; or\n(c) the driver is driving in the direction indicated by traffic lane\narrows that apply to one or more marked lanes and there is an\nobstruction in each of those lanes; or\n(d) the driver is turning at an intersection in accordance with\nrule 28(2) or 32(2).\n1 Obstruction and U-turn are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rules 40 and 41 deal with making a U-turn at an intersection. If there are\ntraffic lights at the intersection, the driver may make a U-turn only if there is a\nU-turn permitted sign at the intersection. If there are no traffic lights at the\nintersection, the driver may make a U-turn unless there is a no U-turn sign at\n3 Rule 28(2) deals with vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer turning left at an\nintersection from within the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or\ninstead of, the left lane on a multi-lane road. Rule 32(2) deals with vehicles\n7.5 metres long or longer turning right at an intersection from within the\nmarked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane on a\nmulti-lane road.\nTraffic lane arrows on the\nsurface of marked lanes\nTraffic lane arrows on a traffic sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 93\n(3) The existence of a bicycle storage area in a marked lane does not\nalter a driver's obligation to comply with this rule.\nNote\nDivision 2 Traffic signs and road markings generally\n","sortOrder":90},{"sectionNumber":"93","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking or passing signs","content":"93 No overtaking or passing signs\n(1) A driver must not:\n(a) drive past a no overtaking or passing sign if any oncoming\nvehicle is on the bridge or length of road to which the sign\napplies; or\n(b) overtake a vehicle on a bridge or length of road to which a no\novertaking or passing sign applies.\nNote\nOncoming vehicle and overtake are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A no overtaking or passing sign on a road applies to the length of\nroad (including a length of road on a bridge) beginning at the sign\nand ending:\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance – at that\ndistance past the sign; or\n(b) if the sign applies to a bridge – at the end of the bridge; or\n(c) at an end no overtaking or passing sign on the road.\nNote\nNo overtaking or passing sign End no overtaking or passing sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 94\n","sortOrder":91},{"sectionNumber":"94","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking on bridge signs","content":"94 No overtaking on bridge signs\nA driver on a bridge with a no overtaking on bridge sign must not\novertake a vehicle between the sign and the far end of the bridge.\nNote\n","sortOrder":92},{"sectionNumber":"95","sectionType":"section","heading":"Emergency stopping lane only signs","content":"95 Emergency stopping lane only signs\n(1) A driver must not drive in an emergency stopping lane unless:\n(a) the driver needs to drive in the emergency stopping lane to\navoid a collision, to stop in the lane, or because the driver's\nvehicle is disabled; or\n(b) the driver is permitted to drive in the emergency stopping lane\n2 Rule 178 deals with stopping in an emergency stopping lane.\n(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle.\n2 If a no bicycles sign applies to the emergency stopping lane, the rider must\nnot ride in the lane – see rule 252.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 95\nemergency stopping lane means a marked lane, or the part of a\nmarked lane, to which an emergency stopping lane only sign\n1 Marked lane is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.\nEmergency stopping lane only sign\nThe sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":93},{"sectionNumber":"96","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keep clear markings","content":"96 Keep clear markings\n(1) A driver must not stop on an area of a road marked with a keep\nclear marking.\nkeep clear marking means the words \"keep clear\" marked across\nall or part of a road, with or without continuous lines marked across\nall or part of the road.\nKeep clear marking bounded\nby line road markings\nKeep clear marking with no line\nroad markings\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 96\n","sortOrder":94},{"sectionNumber":"97","sectionType":"section","heading":"Road access signs","content":"97 Road access signs\n(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a road access\nsign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that the\ndriver or the driver's vehicle is not permitted beyond the sign.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle, length of road and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A road access sign on a road applies to the length of road\nbeginning at the sign (including any road into which the length of\nroad merges) and ending:\n(a) if the sign is on a freeway – at an end freeway sign or end\nroad access sign on the road; or\n(b) if the sign is not on a freeway – at the nearer of the following:\n(i) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end – the\nend of the road;\n(ii) an end road access sign on the road.\nA road access sign on an access ramp to a freeway applies to the access ramp\nand the freeway into which the access ramp merges.\n1 Freeway is defined in rule 177, and road marking, T-intersection and traffic\nsign are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 229 applies the road access sign to pedestrians.\nRoad access sign End freeway sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 97\nEnd road access sign\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of the road access sign and\nthe end freeway sign – see the diagrams in Schedule 3.\n2 A road access sign may indicate that it applies to different or additional\nvehicles or persons – see rule 316(4).\n98 One-way signs\n(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a one-way sign\napplies except in the direction indicated by the arrow on the sign.\nNote\n(2) A one-way sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at\nthe sign and ending at the nearer of the following:\n(a) a two-way sign on the road;\n(b) a keep left sign on the road;\n(c) another sign or road marking on the road that indicates that\nthe road is a two-way road;\n(d) if the road ends at a T-intersection – the end of the road.\n1 Road marking, T-intersection and two-way road are defined in the\n2 There is a diagram of a keep left sign in rule 99.\n(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider:\n(a) is riding on a bicycle path, footpath, nature strip, separated\nfootpath or shared path adjacent to the length of road; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 98\n(b) is permitted to ride on the bicycle path, footpath, nature strip,\nseparated footpath or shared path under the Australian Road\nNote\nthe dictionary, bicycle path, and separated footpath are defined in rule 239,\nand shared path is defined in rule 242.\nOne-way sign Two-way sign\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of the one-way sign and\nanother permitted version of the two-way sign – see the diagrams in\n2 A one-way sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction – see\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 78A of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":95},{"sectionNumber":"99","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keep left and keep right signs","content":"99 Keep left and keep right signs\n(1) A driver driving past a keep left sign must drive to the left of the\n(2) A driver driving past a keep right sign must drive to the right of the\n(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider:\n(a) is riding on a bicycle path, footpath, nature strip, separated\nfootpath or shared path; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 99\n(b) is permitted to ride on the bicycle path, footpath, nature strip,\nseparated footpath or shared path under the Australian Road\nNote\nthe dictionary, bicycle path and separated footpath are defined in rule 239, and\nKeep left sign Keep right sign\nThere is another permitted version of the keep right sign – see the diagram in\n","sortOrder":96},{"sectionNumber":"100","sectionType":"section","heading":"No entry signs","content":"100 No entry signs\nA driver must not drive past a no entry sign.\n","sortOrder":97},{"sectionNumber":"101","sectionType":"section","heading":"Hand-held stop signs","content":"101 Hand-held stop signs\n(1) A driver approaching a hand-held stop sign must stop before\nreaching the sign.\n(2) The driver must not proceed until the holder of the sign:\n(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 100\n(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.\n(3) This rule does not apply to a driver approaching or at a hand-held\nstop sign at a children's crossing.\nNote\nRule 80 defines children's crossing, and deals with hand-held stop signs at\nchildren's crossings.\nHand-held stop signs\n","sortOrder":98},{"sectionNumber":"101A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Safety ramp and arrester bed signs","content":"101A Safety ramp and arrester bed signs\n(1) A driver must not drive on a safety ramp or arrester bed unless:\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to do so in the interests of safety;\nor\n(b) the driver is permitted to do so under another law of this\narrester bed means an area to which an arrester bed sign applies.\nsafety ramp means an area to which a safety ramp sign applies.\nArrester bed sign Safety ramp sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 101\nDivision 3 Signs for trucks, buses and other large vehicles\n","sortOrder":99},{"sectionNumber":"102","sectionType":"section","heading":"Clearance and low clearance signs","content":"102 Clearance and low clearance signs\n(1) A driver must not drive past a clearance sign, or a low clearance\nsign, if the driver's vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is higher\nthan the height (in metres) indicated by the sign.\nNote\nvehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.\nClearance sign Low clearance sign\n","sortOrder":100},{"sectionNumber":"103","sectionType":"section","heading":"Load limit signs","content":"103 Load limit signs\n(1) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (gross mass) sign or\ngross load limit sign if the total of the gross mass (in tonnes) of the\ndriver's vehicle, and any vehicle connected to it, is more than the\ngross mass indicated by the sign.\nNote\n(2) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (mass per axle\ngroup) sign if the mass (in tonnes) carried by an axle group of the\ndriver's vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is more than the\nmass indicated by the sign for the axle group.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 102\nvehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.\nBridge load limit (gross mass) sign Gross load limit sign\nBridge load limit (mass per axle group) sign\nThere are a number of other permitted versions of the bridge load limit (mass per\naxle group) sign – see the diagrams in Schedule 3.\n","sortOrder":101},{"sectionNumber":"104","sectionType":"section","heading":"No trucks signs","content":"104 No trucks signs\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks\nsign that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM\nof the driver's vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination, any\nvehicle in the combination) is more than that mass, unless the\ndriver is permitted to drive the vehicle on a route passing the sign\nNote\nBus, combination, driver's vehicle, GVM and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks\nsign that has information on or with it indicating a length if the\nlength of the driver's vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a\ncombination, the length of the combination) is longer than that\nlength, unless the driver is permitted to drive the vehicle on a route\npassing the sign under another law of this jurisdiction.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 103\n(3) The driver of a truck must not drive past a no trucks sign that has\nno information on or with it indicating a mass or length, unless the\ndriver is permitted to drive the truck on a route passing the sign\nNote\nTruck is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) This rule does not apply to a driver if the destination of the driver\nlies beyond a no trucks sign and:\n(a) there is no other route by which the driver's vehicle could\nreach that destination; or\n(b) any other route by which the driver's vehicle could reach that\ndestination would require the vehicle to pass another no trucks\nNo trucks sign\n","sortOrder":102},{"sectionNumber":"105","sectionType":"section","heading":"Trucks must enter signs","content":"105 Trucks must enter signs\nIf the driver of a truck drives past a trucks must enter sign, the\ndriver must enter the area indicated by information on or with the\nNote\nTruck and with are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 104\n","sortOrder":103},{"sectionNumber":"106","sectionType":"section","heading":"No buses signs","content":"106 No buses signs\n(1) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has\ninformation on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM of the bus is\nmore than that mass.\nNote\nBus, GVM and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has\ninformation on or with it indicating a length if the bus is longer than\nthat length.\n(3) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has no\ninformation on or with it indicating a mass or length.\nNo buses sign\n","sortOrder":104},{"sectionNumber":"107","sectionType":"section","heading":"Buses must enter signs","content":"107 Buses must enter signs\nIf the driver of a bus drives past a buses must enter sign, the driver\nmust enter the area indicated by information on or with the sign.\nNote\nBus and with are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 105\n","sortOrder":105},{"sectionNumber":"108","sectionType":"section","heading":"Trucks and buses low gear signs","content":"108 Trucks and buses low gear signs\n(1) If the driver of a truck or bus is driving on a length of road to which\na trucks and buses low gear sign applies, the driver must drive the\ntruck or bus in a gear that is low enough to limit the speed of the\ntruck or bus without the use of a primary brake.\nNote\nBus, length of road and truck are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to the driver of a bus if information on or\nwith the sign indicates that it applies only to trucks.\nNote\n(3) A trucks and buses low gear sign on a road applies to the length of\nroad beginning at the sign and ending:\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance – at that\ndistance on the road from the sign; or\n(b) in any other case – at an end trucks and buses low gear sign\non the road.\nprimary brake means the footbrake, or other brake, fitted to a truck\nor bus that is normally used to slow or stop the vehicle.\nTrucks and buses low gear sign End trucks and buses low gear sign\nThere are a number of other permitted versions of the trucks and buses low gear\nsign, and another permitted version of the end trucks and buses low gear sign –\nsee the diagrams in Schedule 3\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 106\n","sortOrder":106},{"sectionNumber":"Part 9","sectionType":"part","heading":"Roundabouts","content":"Part 9 Roundabouts\n","sortOrder":107},{"sectionNumber":"109","sectionType":"section","heading":"What is a roundabout","content":"109 What is a roundabout\nA roundabout is an intersection:\n(a) with either:\n(i) one or more marked lanes, all of which are for the use of\nvehicles travelling in the same direction around a central\ntraffic island; or\n(ii) room for one or more lines of traffic travelling in the\nsame direction around a central traffic island; and\n(b) with or without a roundabout sign at each entrance.\n1 Intersection, marked lane, traffic and traffic island are defined in the\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a place.\nRoundabout sign\n110 Meaning of halfway around a roundabout\nA driver leaves a roundabout halfway around the roundabout if the\ndriver leaves the roundabout on a road that is straight ahead, or\nsubstantially straight ahead, from the road on which the driver\nenters the roundabout.\n","sortOrder":108},{"sectionNumber":"111","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road or a road with 2","content":"111 Entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road or a road with 2\nor more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction\n(1) A driver entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road, or a road\nwith room for 2 or more lines of traffic (other than motor bikes,\nbicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals) travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver, must enter the roundabout in accordance\nNote\nMulti-lane road is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 107\n(2) If the driver is to leave the roundabout less than halfway around it,\nthe driver must enter the roundabout from the left marked lane or, if\nthe road is not a multi-lane road, as near as practicable to the left\nside of the road.\nNote\nLeaving a roundabout less than halfway around it\n(3) If the driver is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it,\nthe driver must enter the roundabout from the right marked lane or,\nif the road is not a multi-lane road, from the left of, parallel to, and\nas near as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.\nLeaving a roundabout more than halfway around it\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 108\n(4) If the driver is to leave the roundabout halfway around it, the driver\nmay enter the roundabout from any marked lane or, if the road is\nnot a multi-lane road, anywhere on the part of the road on which\nvehicles travelling in the same direction as the driver may travel.\nLeaving a roundabout halfway around it\n(5) Despite subrules (2) to (4), if the driver is entering the roundabout\nfrom a marked lane and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the\nlane, the driver must:\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction – drive in that direction\nafter entering the roundabout; or\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions – drive in one of\nthose directions after entering the roundabout.\nNote\nTraffic lane arrows is defined in the dictionary.\nRoundabout with 3 entry points\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 109\nRoundabout with 5 entry points\nNotes for examples 4 and 5\n1 Rule 116 requires a driver to obey traffic lane arrows when driving in or\nleaving a roundabout.\n2 The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes, and moving from one\nmarked lane or line of traffic, apply to a driver driving in a roundabout – see\nrules 146 to 148.\n(6) Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.\nNote\n(7) Subrule (5) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal if the\nrider is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it.\n(8) Despite subrule (2), a driver may approach and enter the\nroundabout from the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or\ninstead of, the left lane if:\nand\nof the roundabout; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout less\nthan halfway around it from within the left lane; and\nsafely leave the roundabout less than halfway around it by\noccupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 110\n(9) Despite subrule (3), the driver may approach and enter the\nroundabout from the marked lane next to the right lane as well as,\nor instead of, the right lane if:\nand\nof the roundabout; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout more\nthan halfway around it from within the right lane; and\nsafely leave the roundabout more than halfway around it by\noccupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.\n(10) In this rule:\nleft lane means:\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road; or\nright lane means:\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on\nthe road; or\n","sortOrder":109},{"sectionNumber":"112","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a left change of direction signal when entering a","content":"112 Giving a left change of direction signal when entering a\n(1) This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if:\n(a) the driver is to leave the roundabout at the first exit after\nentering the roundabout; and\n(b) the exit is less than halfway around the roundabout.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 111\n(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a left change\nof direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other\ndrivers and pedestrians.\nNote\n(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal until\nthe driver has left the roundabout.\n(4) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver's vehicle is not fitted\nNote\n","sortOrder":110},{"sectionNumber":"113","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a right change of direction signal when entering a","content":"113 Giving a right change of direction signal when entering a\n(1) This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if the driver is to\nleave the roundabout more than halfway around it.\n(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a right change\nof direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other\ndrivers and pedestrians.\nNote\n(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal\nwhile the driver is driving in the roundabout, unless:\n(a) the driver is changing marked lanes, or entering another line\nof traffic; or\n(b) the driver's vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights; or\n(c) the driver is about to leave the roundabout.\n1 Driver's vehicle and marked lane are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 112\n2 Rule 117 deals with giving change of direction signals before changing\nmarked lanes, or entering another line of traffic, in a roundabout.\n3 Rule 118 requires a driver, if practicable, to give a left change of direction\nsignal when leaving a roundabout.\n114 Giving way when entering or driving in a roundabout\n(1) A driver entering a roundabout must give way to:\n(a) any vehicle in the roundabout; and\n(b) a tram that is entering or approaching the roundabout.\n1 Tram is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give way to a tram that is in,\nentering or approaching the roundabout.\n1 Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For the give way rules applying to a driver moving from one marked lane or\nline of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic, see rule 148.\n115 Driving in a roundabout\n(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must drive:\n(a) to the left of the central traffic island in the roundabout; or\n(b) if subrule (2) applies to the driver – on the edge of the central\ntraffic island, to the left of the centre of the island; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 113\n(c) if subrule (3) applies to the driver – over the central traffic\nisland, as near as practicable to the left of the centre of the\ncentral traffic island.\nNote\nTraffic island is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) This subrule applies to a driver if:\n(a) the driver's vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout\nwithout driving on the edge of the central traffic island; and\n(b) the driver can safely drive on the edge of the central traffic\nisland.\nNote\n(3) This subrule applies to a driver if:\n(a) the driver's vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout\nwithout driving over the central traffic island; and\n(b) the central traffic island is designed to allow a vehicle of that\nkind to be driven over it; and\n(c) the driver can safely drive over the central traffic island.\n","sortOrder":111},{"sectionNumber":"116","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a","content":"116 Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a\nIf a driver is driving in a marked lane in a roundabout and there are\ntraffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must:\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction – drive in or leave the\nroundabout in that direction; or\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions – drive in or leave\nthe roundabout in one of those directions.\nNote\nMarked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 114\n","sortOrder":112},{"sectionNumber":"117","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a change of direction signal when changing marked","content":"117 Giving a change of direction signal when changing marked\nlanes or lines of traffic in a roundabout\n(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change of direction\nsignal before the driver changes marked lanes to the left, or enters\na part of the roundabout where there is room for another line of\ntraffic to the left, in the roundabout, unless the driver's vehicle is not\nfitted with direction indicator lights.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and left change of direction signal are defined in the\n(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a right change of\ndirection signal before the driver changes marked lanes to the right,\nor enters a part of the roundabout where there is room for another\nline of traffic to the right, in the roundabout.\nNote\n","sortOrder":113},{"sectionNumber":"118","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving a left change of direction signal when leaving a","content":"118 Giving a left change of direction signal when leaving a\n(1) If practicable, a driver driving in a roundabout must give a left\nchange of direction signal when leaving the roundabout.\nNote\n(2) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon\nas the driver has left the roundabout.\n(3) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver's vehicle is not fitted\n2 The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes and moving from one\nmarked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic apply to a\ndriver leaving a roundabout – see rules 146 to 148.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 115\n","sortOrder":114},{"sectionNumber":"119","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle","content":"119 Giving way by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle\nleaving a roundabout\nThe rider of a bicycle or animal who is riding in the far left marked\nlane of a roundabout with 2 or more marked lanes, or the far left\nline of traffic in a roundabout with room for 2 or more lines of traffic\n(other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or\nanimals), must give way to any vehicle leaving the roundabout.\n1 Bicycle and marked lane are defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is\n2 For this rule, give way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary,\nPart 10 Level crossings\n120 What is a level crossing\n(1) A level crossing is:\n(a) an area where a road and a railway meet at substantially the\nsame level, whether or not there is a level crossing sign on the\nroad at all or any of the entrances to the area; or\n(b) an area where a road and tram tracks meet at substantially\nthe same level and that has a level crossing sign on the road\nat each entrance to the area.\nNote\nTram tracks is defined in the dictionary.\n(1A) A reference to a level crossing in this rule includes a reference to\nany area adjacent to the crossing that is denoted by painted\ncross-hatched road markings.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 116\nLevel crossing signs\n","sortOrder":115},{"sectionNumber":"121","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a level crossing","content":"121 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a level crossing\nA driver at a level crossing with a stop sign must:\n(a) stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop\nline or, if there is no stop line, as near as practicable to, but\nbefore reaching, the stop sign; and\n(b) give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the\n1 Approaching, enter, stop line and tram are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":116},{"sectionNumber":"122","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at a level","content":"122 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at a level\ncrossing\nA driver at a level crossing with a give way sign or give way line\nmust give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the\n1 Approaching, enter, give way line and tram are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 117\n","sortOrder":117},{"sectionNumber":"123","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering a level crossing when a train or tram is approaching","content":"123 Entering a level crossing when a train or tram is approaching\netc.\nA driver must not enter a level crossing if:\n(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red\nlights) are operating or warning bells are ringing; or\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening\nor closing; or\n(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing; or\n(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the\ncrossing, or is sounding a warning, and there would be a\ndanger of a collision with the train or tram if the driver entered\nthe crossing; or\n(e) the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the\ncrossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.\nExamples for paragraph (e)\na pedestrian, or by stock on the road.\nNote\nApproaching, enter, tram and twin red lights are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":118},{"sectionNumber":"124","sectionType":"section","heading":"Leaving a level crossing","content":"124 Leaving a level crossing\nA driver who enters a level crossing must leave the level crossing\nas soon as the driver can do so safely.\nNote\nEnter is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 118\n","sortOrder":119},{"sectionNumber":"Part 11","sectionType":"part","heading":"Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules","content":"Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules\n","sortOrder":120},{"sectionNumber":"125","sectionType":"section","heading":"Unreasonably obstructing drivers or pedestrians","content":"125 Unreasonably obstructing drivers or pedestrians\n(1) A driver must not unreasonably obstruct the path of another driver\nor a pedestrian.\nNote\nDriver includes a person in control of a vehicle – see the definition of drive in the\n(2) For this rule, a driver does not unreasonably obstruct the path of\nanother driver or a pedestrian only because:\n(a) the driver is stopped in traffic; or\n(b) the driver is driving more slowly than other vehicles (unless\nthe driver is driving abnormally slowly in the circumstances).\nExample of a driver driving abnormally slowly\nA driver driving at a speed of 20 kilometres per hour on a length of road to which\na speed-limit of 80 kilometres per hour applies when there is no reason for the\ndriver to drive at that speed on the length of road.\n","sortOrder":121},{"sectionNumber":"126","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping a safe distance behind vehicles","content":"126 Keeping a safe distance behind vehicles\nA driver must drive a sufficient distance behind a vehicle travelling\nin front of the driver so the driver can, if necessary, stop safely to\navoid a collision with the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":122},{"sectionNumber":"127","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping a minimum distance between long vehicles","content":"127 Keeping a minimum distance between long vehicles\n(1) The driver of a long vehicle must drive at least the required\nminimum distance behind another long vehicle travelling in front of\nthe driver, unless the driver is:\n(a) driving on a multi-lane road or any length of road in a built-up\narea; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 119\n(b) overtaking.\nNote\nBuilt-up area, length of road, multi-lane road and overtake are defined in the\nlong vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or\nprojection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer.\nNote\nVehicle includes a combination – see rule 15(d).\nrequired minimum distance means:\n(a) for a road train that is behind a long vehicle – 200 metres or, if\nanother law of this jurisdiction specifies a different distance,\nthat distance; or\n(b) for a long vehicle other than a road train that is behind a long\nvehicle – 60 metres or, if another law of this jurisdiction\nspecifies a different distance, that distance.\nroad train means a combination that is a road train for the\nAustralian Road Rules under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nCombination is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":123},{"sectionNumber":"128","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering blocked intersections","content":"128 Entering blocked intersections\nA driver must not enter an intersection if the driver cannot drive\nthrough the intersection because the intersection, or a road beyond\nthe intersection, is blocked.\nThe intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, may be blocked by\ncongested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a\nvehicle and a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.\nNote\nEnter and intersection are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 120\n","sortOrder":124},{"sectionNumber":"128A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering blocked crossings","content":"128A Entering blocked crossings\n(1) A driver must not enter a children's crossing, marked foot crossing\nor pedestrian crossing if the driver cannot drive through the\ncrossing because the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is\nblocked.\na pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.\nNote\nChildren's crossing, enter, marked foot crossing and pedestrian crossing\n(2) Despite subrule (1), a driver may enter a children's crossing or a\npedestrian crossing if:\n(a) the crossing is immediately before an intersection that does\nnot have traffic lights; and\n(b) the crossing is not blocked; and\n(c) before entering the crossing, the driver gives way to any\npedestrian on the crossing.\nNote\n(3) Subrule (2) applies despite anything to the contrary in rule 171\nor 172.\n(4) However, subrule (3) is not intended to permit a driver to park a\nvehicle contrary to rule 171 or 172.\nDivision 2 Keeping to the left\n","sortOrder":125},{"sectionNumber":"129","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to the far left side of a road","content":"129 Keeping to the far left side of a road\n(1) A driver on a road (except a multi-lane road) must drive as near as\npracticable to the far left side of the road.\nNote\nMulti-lane road is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 121\n(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.\nNote\nNote\nRoad-related area includes the shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\n","sortOrder":126},{"sectionNumber":"130","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road","content":"130 Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road\n(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a multi-lane road if:\n(a) the speed-limit applying to the driver for the length of road\nwhere the driver is driving is over 80 kilometres per hour; or\n(b) a keep left unless overtaking sign applies to the length of road\nwhere the driver is driving.\n1 Length of road and multi-lane road are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Part 3 deals with speed-limits.\n(2) The driver must not drive in the right lane unless:\n(a) the driver is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of\nthe road, and is giving a right change of direction signal; or\n(b) the driver is overtaking; or\n(c) a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic lane arrows apply to\nany other lane and the driver is not turning left; or\n(d) the driver is required to drive in the right lane under rule 159;\nor\n(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(f) the traffic in each other lane is congested; or\n(g) the traffic in every lane is congested; or\n(h) the right lane is a special purpose lane in which the driver,\nunder another provision of the Australian Road Rules, is\npermitted to drive; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 122\n(i) there are only 2 marked lanes and the left lane is a slow\nvehicle turn out lane.\n1 Centre of the road, left traffic lane arrows, obstruction, overtake, right\nchange of direction signal, special purpose lane, traffic and U-turn are\n2 Rule 159 deals with traffic signs that require a particular kind of vehicle to\ndrive in the marked lane indicated by the signs.\n3 Rule 329 deals with when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.\n(3) A keep left unless overtaking sign on a multi-lane road applies to\nthe length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of\nthe following:\n(a) an end keep left unless overtaking sign on the road;\n(b) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that\nthe road is no longer a multi-lane road;\nNote\nRoad marking, T-intersection and traffic sign are defined in the dictionary.\nlane, for a driver, means a marked lane for vehicles travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver, but does not include a special purpose\nlane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.\n1 Marked lane and special purpose lane are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and Division 6 of this\nPart deals with driving in other special purpose lanes\nslow vehicle turn out lane means a marked lane, or the part of a\nmarked lane, to which a slow vehicle turn out lane sign applies.\nNote\nA slow vehicle turn out lane is designed for slow-moving vehicles to move into to\nallow faster vehicles to pass in an adjacent marked lane.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 123\nKeep left unless overtaking sign End keep left unless overtaking sign\nSlow vehicle turn out lane sign\nThere is another permitted version of the End keep left unless overtaking sign –\nsee the diagram in Schedule 3\n","sortOrder":127},{"sectionNumber":"131","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles","content":"131 Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles\n(1) A driver must drive to the left of any oncoming vehicle unless:\n(a) the driver is turning right at an intersection; and\n(b) the driver is passing an oncoming vehicle turning right at the\n(c) there is no traffic sign or road marking indicating that the driver\nmust pass to the left of the oncoming vehicle.\n1 Intersection, oncoming vehicle, road marking and traffic sign are defined\n2 Part 4, Division 2 deals with making right turns.\n(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if:\n(a) the rider is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path;\nand\n(b) the rider is permitted to rider on the footpath, nature strip or\nshared path under the Australian Road Rules or another law\nof this jurisdiction; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 124\n(c) either:\n(i) the oncoming vehicle is not on the footpath, nature strip\nor shared path; or\n(ii) the oncoming vehicle is not permitted, under the\nAustralian Road Rules or under another law of this\njurisdiction, to be on the footpath, nature strip or shared\npath.\nNote\nthe dictionary and shared path is defined in rule 242.\nDriving to the left of an\noncoming vehicle\nOncoming vehicles turning right\npassing to the right of each other\n","sortOrder":128},{"sectionNumber":"132","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the dividing line","content":"132 Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the dividing line\n(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip\nmust drive to the left of the centre of the road, except as permitted\nunder rule 133 or 139(1).\n1 Centre of the road, dividing line, median strip and two-way road are\n2 For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see rule 351(3).\n3 Rule 133 deals with driving to the right of the centre of the road to overtake\nanother vehicle, to enter or leave a road, to move from one part of the road to\nanother, or because of the width or condition of the road. Rule 139(1) deals\nwith driving to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an obstruction.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 125\n(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line must drive to the left of the\ndividing line, except as permitted under rule 134 or 139(2).\nNote\nRule 134 deals with driving to the right of the dividing line to overtake another\nvehicle, to enter or leave a road, or to move from one part of the road to another.\nRule 139(2) deals with driving to the right of the dividing line to avoid an\nobstruction.\nThe effect of this subrule, in relation to continuous dividing lines, is as follows:\n• in the case of a dividing line that is only a single continuous dividing line, or\nthat is a broken dividing line to the right of a single continuous dividing line, a\ndriver may only drive to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in\nrules 134(3) and 139(2) (as supplemented by rule 139(3));\n• in the case of a dividing line that is a single continuous dividing line to the right\nof a broken dividing line, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line in\nthe circumstances set out in rules 134(2), 134(3) and 139(2);\n• in the case of a dividing line that is 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, a driver\nmay only drive to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in\nrule 139(2) (as supplemented by rule 139(3)).\n(2A) A driver on a road with a single continuous dividing line, a single\ncontinuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line or\n2 parallel continuous dividing lines must not drive across the\ndividing lines to perform a U-turn.\nDriving across a\nsingle continuous\ndividing line to\nmake a U-turn is\nnot permitted\ncontinuous dividing line\nto the left of a broken\ndividing line to make a\nU-turn is not permitted\nDriving across 2\nparallel continuous\ndividing lines to\nmake a\nU-turn is not\npermitted\n(3) This rule, and rules 133, 134 and 139(1) and (2), apply to a service\nroad to which a two-way sign applies as if it were a separate road,\nbut do not apply to any other service road.\n1 Service road is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 126\n2 Rule 136 deals with driving on a service road without a two-way sign.\nroad does not include a footpath, nature strip, bicycle path,\nseparated footpath or shared path.\nNote\nFootpath and nature strip are defined in the dictionary, bicycle path and\nseparated footpath are defined in rule 239 and shared path is defined in\nrule 242.\nThere is another permitted version of the two-way sign – see the diagram in\nExamples for subrule (2)\nDriving to the left of a single\ncontinuous dividing line only\nDriving to the left of a single\ncontinuous dividing line to the left of\na broken dividing line\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 127\nDriving to the left of 2 parallel continuous dividing lines\nNote\n","sortOrder":129},{"sectionNumber":"133","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to keeping to the left of the centre of a road","content":"133 Exceptions to keeping to the left of the centre of a road\n(1) This rule applies to a driver on a two-way road without a dividing\nline or median strip.\nNote\nDividing line, median strip and two-way road are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The driver may drive to the right of the centre of the road:\n(a) to overtake another driver; or\n(b) to enter or leave the road; or\n(c) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nor emergency stopping lane).\nNote\nCentre of the road, overtake and service road are defined in the dictionary,\nand emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.\n(3) The driver may also drive to the right of the centre of the road if:\n(a) because of the width or condition of the road, it is not\npracticable to drive to the left of the centre of the road; and\n(b) the driver can do so safely.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 128\n","sortOrder":130},{"sectionNumber":"134","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to keeping to the left of a dividing line","content":"134 Exceptions to keeping to the left of a dividing line\n(1) This rule applies to a driver on a road with a dividing line.\nNote\nDividing line is defined the dictionary.\n(2) If the dividing line is a single broken dividing line only, or a broken\ndividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line, or 2\nparallel broken dividing lines, the driver may drive to the right of the\ndividing line:\n(a) to overtake another driver; or\n(b) to perform a U-turn, unless another rule would prohibit the\ndriver performing the U-turn.\n1 Overtake is defined the dictionary.\n2 A driver must not overtake another driver unless the driver has a clear view of\nany approaching traffic, and it is safe to overtake the other driver – see\nrule 140.\n(3) If the dividing line is a single continuous or broken dividing line, or a\nbroken dividing line to the left or right of a single continuous dividing\nline, or 2 parallel broken dividing lines, the driver may drive to the\nright of the dividing line:\n(b) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nor emergency stopping lane); or\n(c) to park in angle parking on the opposite side of the road\nprovided that the driver does not need to perform a U-turn to\nreach the parking area.\n1 Angle parking, overtake, parking area and U-turn are defined in the\n2 Emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95, and service road is defined\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 129\nDriving to the right of the centre\nof the road permitted –\novertaking on a road with a\nbroken dividing line only\nDriving to the right of the centre\nof the road permitted –\novertaking on a road with a\nbroken dividing line to the left of\na single continuous dividing line\nExample 2A\ncontinuous dividing line is\npermitted to enter or leave\nthe road\nExample 2B\ncontinuous dividing line is\npermitted to leave the road to\nenter a road-related area\nExample 2C\ncontinuous dividing line to the\nleft of a broken dividing line is\npermitted to enter or leave\nthe road\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 130\nDriving to the right of the centre of\nthe road not permitted – overtaking\non a road with a single continuous\ndividing line only\nDriving to the right of the centre of the\nroad not permitted – overtaking on a road\nwith a single continuous dividing line to\nthe left of a broken dividing line\nDriving to the right of the centre of the\nroad not permitted – overtaking on a\nroad with 2 parallel continuous dividing\nlines\n","sortOrder":131},{"sectionNumber":"135","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to the left of a median strip","content":"135 Keeping to the left of a median strip\n(1) A driver on a road with a median strip must drive to the left of the\nmedian strip, unless the driver is:\n(a) entering or driving in a median strip parking area; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 131\n(b) required to drive to the right of the median strip by a keep right\n1 Median strip and median strip parking area are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see rule 351(3).\nmedian strip does not include a painted island.\n2 Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted islands.\n136 Driving on a one-way service road\nA driver on the part of the road that is a service road (except a\nservice road to which a two-way sign applies) must drive in the\nsame direction as a vehicle travelling on the part of the road closest\nto the service road is required to travel.\nNote\nService road are defined in the dictionary.\nThere is another permitted version of the two-way sign – see the diagram in\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 132\n","sortOrder":132},{"sectionNumber":"137","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping off a dividing strip","content":"137 Keeping off a dividing strip\n(1) A driver must not drive on a dividing strip, except as permitted\nunder this rule or rule 139(4).\n1 Dividing strip is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a road.\n(2) A driver may drive on a dividing strip that is at the same level as the\nroad, and marked at each side by a continuous line:\n(b) to enter or leave an area on the dividing strip to which a\nparking control sign applies if the driver is permitted to park in\n(2A) For the purposes of subrule (2), a dividing strip is to be treated as\nbeing at the same level as the road even if it contains one or more\nraised pavement bars or markers.\ndividing strip does not include a painted island.\n2 Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted islands.\n3 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 79 of the Traffic\n138 Keeping off a painted island\n(1) A driver must not drive on or over a single continuous line, or 2\nparallel continuous lines, along a side of or surrounding a painted\nisland, except as permitted under this rule or rule 139(4).\n2 Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a road.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 133\n3 Subrule (3) excludes certain painted islands from the application of\nparagraph (a).\nPainted island surrounded by 2 parallel continuous lines\nIn this example, vehicle B is contravening the rule.\n(2) A driver may drive on or over a single continuous line along the side\nof or surrounding a painted island for up to 50 metres:\n(b) to enter a turning lane that begins immediately after the\npainted island; or\n(c) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nor emergency stopping lane); or\n(d) to park in angle parking on the opposite side of the road\nprovided that the driver does not need to perform a U-turn to\nreach the parking area.\n1 Angle parking, parking area, service road, turning lane and U-turn are\ndefined in the dictionary and emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.\n2 Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a turning\nlane from a painted island and rule 197 deals with stopping on painted\nislands.\n(3) Subrule (2)(a) does not apply in the case of a painted island:\n(a) that separates a road that takes vehicles in one direction from\nanother road that takes vehicles in the same direction at a\nplace where the roads merge; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 134\n(b) that separates one part of a road from other parts of the road\nto create a slip lane.\nNote\nSlip lane is defined in the dictionary.\nIn these examples, vehicle B is contravening the rule.\nNote\n","sortOrder":133},{"sectionNumber":"139","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on a road","content":"139 Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on a road\n(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip\nmay drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an\nobstruction if:\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for\nthe driver to drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid\nthe obstruction; and\nNote\nApproaching, centre of the road, dividing line, median strip, obstruction,\ntraffic and two-way road are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line may drive to the right of the\ndividing line to avoid an obstruction if:\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for\nthe driver to drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid the\nobstruction; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 135\n(3) For subrule (2), if the dividing line is a single continuous dividing\nline to the left of a broken dividing line, a single continuous dividing\nline only or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, the hazard in driving\nto the right of such a dividing line must be taken into account in\ndeciding whether it is reasonable to drive to the right of the dividing\nline.\n(4) A driver may drive on a dividing strip, or on or over a single\ncontinuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or\nsurrounding a painted island, to avoid an obstruction if:\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable to drive on the dividing strip or\npainted island to avoid the obstruction; and\nNote\nDividing strip and painted island are defined in the dictionary.\nDivision 3 Overtaking\n","sortOrder":134},{"sectionNumber":"140","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking unless safe to do so","content":"140 No overtaking unless safe to do so\nA driver must not overtake a vehicle unless:\n(b) the driver can safely overtake the vehicle.\n1 Approaching, overtake and traffic are defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver is not permitted to overtake another vehicle by crossing a single\ncontinuous dividing line only, a single continuous dividing line to the left of a\nbroken dividing line or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines – see rules 134(2)\nand 132(2).\n","sortOrder":135},{"sectionNumber":"141","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking etc. to the left of a vehicle","content":"141 No overtaking etc. to the left of a vehicle\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not overtake a vehicle\nto the left of the vehicle unless:\n(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can\nbe safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle;\nor\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 136\n(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre\nof the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and\nit is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle; or\n(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of\nthe vehicle; or\n(d) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with rule 151A.\nNote\nLane filtering is defined in rule 151A.\nNote\nBicycle, centre of the road, marked lane, multi-lane road, overtake, right\nchange of direction signal and U-turn are defined in the dictionary.\n(1A) Subrule (1)(d) does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction does\nnot permit a driver to lane filter.\n(2) The rider of a bicycle must not ride past, or overtake, to the left of a\nvehicle that is turning left and is giving a left change of direction\nsignal.\nNote\nvehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks,\nor any vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n1 Bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.\n3 Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams (and buses\ntravelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or passing a\nvehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 137\n","sortOrder":136},{"sectionNumber":"142","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking to the right of a vehicle turning right etc.","content":"142 No overtaking to the right of a vehicle turning right etc.\n(1) A driver must not overtake to the right of a vehicle if the vehicle is\nturning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is\ngiving a right change of direction signal.\nNote\nCentre of the road, overtake, right change of direction signal and U-turn are\nvehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks,\nor any vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n1 Bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.\n3 Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams (and buses\ntravelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or passing a\nvehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n","sortOrder":137},{"sectionNumber":"143","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking a vehicle displaying a do not overtake","content":"143 Passing or overtaking a vehicle displaying a do not overtake\nturning vehicle sign\n(1) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is\nturning left and is giving a left change of direction signal, unless it is\nsafe to do so.\nNote\nLeft change of direction signal and overtake are defined in the dictionary.\n(1A) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign unless:\n(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can\nbe safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle;\nor\n(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre\nof the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and\nit is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 138\n(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of\nthe vehicle.\nNote\nCentre of the road, marked lane, multi-lane road, overtake, right change of\ndirection signal and U-turn are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the right of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is\nturning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is\ngiving a right change of direction signal, unless it is safe to do so.\nA driver driving on a multi-lane road who is turning right at an intersection to\nwhich a right turn only sign applies may drive past a vehicle displaying a do not\novertake turning vehicle sign that is turning right from another marked lane, and\ngiving a right change of direction signal, if it is safe to do so.\nNote\nCentre of the road, right change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in\nNote\nPart 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 139\n","sortOrder":138},{"sectionNumber":"144","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping a safe distance when overtaking","content":"144 Keeping a safe distance when overtaking\nA driver overtaking a vehicle:\n(a) must pass the vehicle at a sufficient distance to avoid a\ncollision with the vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle;\nand\n(b) must not return to the marked lane or line of traffic where the\nvehicle is travelling until the driver is a sufficient distance past\nthe vehicle to avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing\nthe path of the vehicle.\n1 Marked lane and overtake are defined in the dictionary.\n2 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 80 of the Traffic\n145 Driver being overtaken not to increase speed\nIf a driver is overtaking another driver on a two-way road by\ncrossing a dividing line, or crossing to the right of the centre of the\nroad, the other driver must not increase the speed at which the\ndriver is driving until the first driver:\n(a) has passed the other driver; and\n(b) has returned to the marked lane or line of traffic where the\nother driver is driving; and\n(c) is a sufficient distance in front of the other driver to avoid a\ncollision.\nNote\nCentre of the road, dividing line, marked lane, overtake and two-way road\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 140\nDivision 4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of traffic\n","sortOrder":139},{"sectionNumber":"146","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving within a single marked lane or line of traffic","content":"146 Driving within a single marked lane or line of traffic\n(1) A driver on a multi-lane road must drive so the driver's vehicle is\ncompletely in a marked lane, unless the driver is:\n(a) entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nor a shoulder of the road); or\n(b) entering or leaving the road; or\n(c) moving from one marked lane to another marked lane; or\n(d) avoiding an obstruction; or\n(e) obeying a traffic control device applying to the marked lane; or\n(ea) lane filtering in accordance with rule 151A; or\n(f) permitted to drive in more than one marked lane under\nanother provision of the Australian Road Rules or under\n1 Driver's vehicle, marked lane, multi-lane road, obstruction, service road\nand traffic control device are defined in the dictionary, lane filtering is\ndefined in rule 151A and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\n2 A driver is generally not permitted to move from one marked lane to another\nmarked lane across a continuous line separating the lanes – see rule 147.\n3 Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one marked lane to\nanother marked lane.\n4 An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked\n5 Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when\n(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver, but without marked lanes, must drive\nso the driver's vehicle is completely in a single line of traffic unless:\n(a) it is not practicable to drive completely in a single line of traffic;\nor\n(b) the driver is entering a part of the road of one kind from a part\nof the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a\nservice road or a shoulder of the road); or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 141\n(c) the driver is entering or leaving the road; or\n(d) the driver is moving from one line of traffic to another line of\ntraffic; or\n(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(f) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with rule 151A.\n1 Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one line of traffic to\nanother line of traffic.\n2 Lane filtering is defined in rule 151A.\n3 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 79 of the Traffic\n147 Moving from one marked lane to another marked lane across a\ncontinuous line separating the lanes\n(1) A driver on a multi-lane road must not move from one marked lane\nto another marked lane by crossing a continuous line separating the\nlanes unless:\n(a) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(b) the driver is obeying a traffic control device applying to the first\nmarked lane; or\n(c) the driver is permitted to drive in both marked lanes under\nanother provision of the Australian Road Rules or under\nanother law of this jurisdiction; or\n(d) either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane in which\nthe driver is permitted to drive under the Australian Road\nRules and the driver is moving to or from the special purpose\nlane; or\n(e) either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane during\nspecified times only and the driver:\n(i) is moving to or from that lane outside of the times during\nwhich it is a special purpose lane; and\n(ii) is permitted to drive in that lane outside of the times\nduring which it is a special purpose lane under the\nAustralian Road Rules; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 142\n(f) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with rule 151A.\n1 Marked lane, multi-lane road, obstruction, special purpose lane and\ntraffic control device are defined in the dictionary and lane filtering is\ndefined in rule 151A.\n2 An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked\n3 Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when\n4 Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and Division 6 of this\nPart deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.\n(2) Subrule (1)(f) does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction does\nnot permit a driver to lane filter.\nNote\n","sortOrder":140},{"sectionNumber":"148","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving from one marked lane or line of","content":"148 Giving way when moving from one marked lane or line of\ntraffic to another marked lane or line of traffic\n(1) A driver who is moving from one marked lane (whether or not the\nlane is ending) to another marked lane must give way to any\nvehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver in the marked\nlane to which the driver is moving.\n1 Marked lane and multi-lane road are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 143\nGiving way when moving from one marked lane to another marked lane\nIn these examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver, and who is moving from one line of\ntraffic to another line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle\ntravelling in the same direction as the driver in the line of traffic to\nwhich the driver is moving.\n(3) Subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if the line of traffic in which\nthe driver is driving is merging with the line of traffic to which the\ndriver is moving.\nNote\nRule 149 deals with giving way when lines of traffic merge.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 144\nGiving way when moving from one line of traffic to another line of traffic when the\nlines are not merging\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A\n","sortOrder":141},{"sectionNumber":"148A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving within a single marked lane","content":"148A Giving way when moving within a single marked lane\nIf a driver diverges to the left or right within a marked lane, the\ndriver must give way to any vehicle that is in the lane.\nNote\n","sortOrder":142},{"sectionNumber":"149","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of","content":"149 Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of\ntraffic\nA driver in a line of traffic that is merging with one or more lines of\ntraffic travelling in the same direction as the driver must give way to\na vehicle in another line of traffic if any part of the vehicle is ahead\nof the driver's vehicle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 145\nGiving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":143},{"sectionNumber":"150","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on or across a continuous white edge line","content":"150 Driving on or across a continuous white edge line\n(1) A driver must not drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a\nroad unless subrule (1A) or (1B) applies to the driver.\n1 Edge line is defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a continuous yellow\nedge line – see rule 169.\n(1A) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a\nroad if the driver is:\n(a) overtaking a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn\nfrom the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of\ndirection signal; or\n(b) driving a slow-moving vehicle, and it is necessary for the\ndriver to drive on or over the edge line to allow the vehicle to\nbe overtaken or passed by another vehicle; or\n(c) driving a vehicle that is too wide, or too long, to drive on the\nroad without driving on or over the edge line; or\n(d) permitted to drive on or over the edge line under another law\nof this jurisdiction; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 146\n(e) avoiding an obstruction.\nNote\nCentre of the road, obstruction, overtake, right change of direction signal\nand U-turn are defined in the dictionary.\n(1B) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a\nroad for up to 100 metres if the driver is:\n(a) turning at an intersection; or\n(b) entering or leaving the road; or\n(c) entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nof another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road,\na shoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane); or\n(d) stopping at the side of the road (including any shoulder of the\nroad).\nNote\nIntersection and service road are defined in the dictionary, emergency\nstopping lane is defined in rule 95, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\n(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.\nNote\n(3) For this rule, a driver drives over a continuous white edge line on a\nroad if:\n(a) for a line on the far left side of the road – the driver's vehicle is\nwholly or partly to the left of the line; or\n(b) for a line on the far right side of the road – the driver's vehicle\nis wholly or partly to the right of the line.\n","sortOrder":144},{"sectionNumber":"151","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding a motor bike or bicycle alongside more than one other","content":"151 Riding a motor bike or bicycle alongside more than one other\nrider\n(1) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride on a road that is\nnot a multi-lane road alongside more than one other rider, unless\nsubrule (3) applies to the rider.\nNote\nBicycle, motor bike and multi-lane road are defined in the dictionary, and rider\nis defined in rule 17.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 147\n(2) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride in a marked lane\nalongside more than one other rider in the marked lane, unless\nsubrule (3) applies to the rider.\nNote\n(3) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle may ride alongside more than\none other rider if the rider is:\n(a) overtaking the other riders; or\n(b) permitted to do so under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\n(4) If the rider of a motor bike or bicycle is riding on a road that is not a\nmulti-lane road alongside another rider, or in a marked lane\nalongside another rider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not\nover 1.5 metres from the other rider.\nroad does not include a road-related area, but includes a bicycle\npath, shared path and any shoulder of the road.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, road-related area is defined in rule 13,\nshared path is defined in rule 242, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\n","sortOrder":145},{"sectionNumber":"151A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Lane filtering between vehicles on a motor bike","content":"151A Lane filtering between vehicles on a motor bike\n(1) A rider of a motor bike is lane filtering along a length of road if the\nrider rides the motor bike between 2 vehicles, each vehicle\ntravelling in:\n(a) the same direction as the motor bike; and\n(b) separate, but adjacent, marked lanes or lines of traffic.\n(2) The rider of a motor bike must not unlawfully lane filter along a\nlength of road.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 148\n(3) For subrule (2), it is unlawful for a rider to lane filter along a length\nof road if any of the following circumstances apply:\n(a) the rider is edge filtering;\n(b) the rider is riding at a speed of more than 30km/h;\n(c) the rider is riding in a school zone (unless the rider is\npermitted to lane filter in a school zone under another law of\nthis jurisdiction);\n(d) a no filtering sign applies to the length of road;\n(e) it is not safe to lane filter.\n(4) Subrule (3)(a) does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction\nallows a rider to edge filter.\n(5) A no filtering sign on a road applies to a length of road starting at\nthe sign and ending at the nearer of the following:\n(a) if the length of road ends at a T-intersection or dead end – the\nend of the length of road;\n(b) the next end no filtering sign that is on the road.\n(6) For this rule, a rider of a motor bike is edge filtering along a length\nof road if:\n(a) the rider changes direction towards the edge of the road to\npass one or more vehicles on the road; or\n(b) the rider changes direction towards the edge of the road to\npass between 2 vehicles, one of which is stationary.\nend no filtering sign means a traffic sign:\n(a) with a symbol displaying a motor bike positioned between\n2 vehicles with a black diagonal line across the symbol; and\n(b) with a symbol positioned below the symbol mentioned in\nparagraph (a) displaying the word \"END\" in black letters.\nno filtering sign means:\n(a) a traffic sign with a symbol displaying a motor bike positioned\nbetween 2 vehicles with a red diagonal line across the symbol;\nor\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 149\n(b) a traffic sign displaying the words \"no filtering\".\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 80A of the Traffic\nDivision 5 Obeying overhead lane control devices applying to\nmarked lanes\n","sortOrder":146},{"sectionNumber":"152","sectionType":"section","heading":"Complying with overhead lane control devices","content":"152 Complying with overhead lane control devices\n(1) A driver in a marked lane to which an overhead lane control device\napplies must comply with this rule.\nNote\nMarked lane and overhead lane control device are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the device displays an illuminated red diagonal cross or is a traffic\nsign displaying a red diagonal cross, the driver must not drive in the\nmarked lane past the device.\n(3) If the device displays a flashing illuminated red diagonal cross, the\ndriver must leave the marked lane as soon as it is safe to do so.\n(4) If the device displays an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow\npointing downwards or indicating one or more directions, the driver\nmay drive in the marked lane past the device.\nOverhead lane control device applying to marked lanes\nIf the device displays an arrow indicating one or more directions, the device\noperates also as traffic lane arrows – see the definition of traffic lane arrows in\nthe dictionary. Rule 92 deals with traffic lane arrows.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 150\n","sortOrder":147},{"sectionNumber":"Div 6","sectionType":"division","heading":"Driving in marked lanes designated for special","content":"Division 6 Driving in marked lanes designated for special\npurposes\n","sortOrder":148},{"sectionNumber":"153","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle lanes","content":"153 Bicycle lanes\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive in a bicycle\nlane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bicycle lane under\nthis rule or rule 158.\n(2) If stopping or parking is permitted at a place in a bicycle lane under\nanother law of this jurisdiction, a driver may drive for up to\n50 metres in the bicycle lane to stop or park at that place.\nNote\n","sortOrder":149},{"sectionNumber":"Part 12","sectionType":"part","heading":"deals with parking and restricted stopping areas.","content":"Part 12 deals with parking and restricted stopping areas.\n(3) A driver may drive for up to 50 metres in a bicycle lane if:\n(a) the driver is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is\ndropping off or picking up, passengers; and\n(b) there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the driver\nfrom driving in the bicycle lane.\nNote\nPublic bus, public minibus and taxi are defined in the dictionary.\n(4) A bicycle lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:\n(a) beginning at a bicycle lane sign applying to the lane, or a road\nmarking comprising both a white bicycle symbol and the word\n\"lane\" painted in white; and\n(b) ending at the nearest of the following:\n(i) an end bicycle lane sign applying to the lane, or a road\nmarking comprising both a white bicycle symbol and the\nwords \"end lane\" painted in white;\n(ii) an intersection (unless the lane is at the unbroken side\nof the continuing road at a T-intersection or continued\nacross the intersection by broken lines);\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 151\n(iii) if the road ends at a dead end – the end of the road.\nNote\nContinuing road, intersection, marked lane and T-intersection are defined in\nBicycle lane sign End bicycle lane sign\nThere are a number of other permitted version of the bicycle lane sign, and\nanother permitted version of the end bicycle lane sign – see the diagrams in\n","sortOrder":150},{"sectionNumber":"154","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bus lanes","content":"154 Bus lanes\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not drive in a bus\nlane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bus lane under\n1 Public bus is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A bus lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:\n(a) beginning at a bus lane sign (whether or not there is also a\nbus lane road marking) and ending at the nearest of the\n(i) an end bus lane sign;\n(ii) a traffic sign that indicates the beginning of another\nspecial purpose lane; or\n(b) beginning at a bus lane road marking (if there is no bus lane\nsign) and ending at the next intersection.\nNote\nIntersection, marked lane, special purpose lane and traffic sign are defined\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 152\nbus lane road marking means a road marking consisting of:\n(a) the letters \"BL\"; or\n(b) the words \"bus lane\".\nNote\nBus lane sign End bus lane sign\n","sortOrder":151},{"sectionNumber":"154A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bus only lanes","content":"154A Bus only lanes\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not drive in a bus\nonly lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bus only lane\nunder subrule (2).\nNote\nBus and public bus are defined in the dictionary and bus only lane is defined in\nsubrule (6).\n(2) A driver may drive in a bus only lane if:\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the bus only lane to\navoid an obstruction; and\n(b) the driver does not obstruct the path of a public bus travelling\nin the bus only lane; and\n(c) where the driver is approaching the bus only lane from the\nsame direction as a vehicle in a bus only lane – the driver\napproaches the bus only lane from the lane nearest to the bus\nonly lane; and\n(d) the driver gives way to any vehicles driving in the bus only\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 153\n(3) A driver must not drive across a bus only lane, unless the driver is\npermitted to drive across the bus only lane under subrule (4).\n(4) A driver may drive across a bus only lane only if:\n(a) the driver is driving across the bus only lane to:\n(i) enter or leave a road; or\n(ii) enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the\nroad of another kind; and\n(b) where the driver is approaching the bus only lane from the\nsame direction as a vehicle in a bus only lane – the driver\napproaches the bus only lane from the lane nearest to the bus\nonly lane; and\n(c) the driver gives way to any vehicles driving in the bus only\nExample for subrule (4)(a)(ii)\nMoving to or from a service road, the shoulder of the road or an emergency\nstopping lane.\n(5) A driver turning at an intersection immediately after a bus only lane\nmust:\n(a) if the driver is approaching the bus only lane from the same\ndirection as a vehicle in a bus only lane – approach the bus\nonly lane from the lane nearest to the bus only lane; and\n(b) give way to any vehicles driving in the bus only lane.\n(6) A bus only lane is a marked lane or the part of a marked lane:\n(a) beginning at a bus only lane sign (whether or not there is also\na bus only lane road marking) and ending at the nearest of the\n(i) an end bus only lane sign;\n(ii) a traffic sign that indicates the beginning of a special\npurpose lane;\n(iii) a traffic sign that indicates drivers of vehicles may drive\nin the lane beyond the sign;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 154\n(iv) an intersection with traffic lights or traffic arrows; or\n(b) beginning at a bus only lane road marking (if there is no bus\nonly lane sign) and ending at the next intersection; or\n(c) that is marked with a continuous line starting at the beginning\nof a bus only lane road marking and ending at an end bus only\nlane road marking.\nNote\nBus only lane road marking, marked lane, special purpose lane and traffic\nsign are defined in the dictionary.\nBus only lane sign End bus only lane sign\n","sortOrder":152},{"sectionNumber":"155","sectionType":"section","heading":"Tram lanes","content":"155 Tram lanes\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public\nbus) must not drive in a tram lane, unless the driver is permitted to\ndrive in the tram lane under this rule or rule 158.\n1 Public bus, tram and tram recovery vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver may drive in a tram lane if the driver is driving a truck and it\nis necessary for the driver to drive in the tram lane to reach a place\nto drop off, or pick up, passengers or goods.\n(3) A tram lane is a part of a road with tram tracks that:\n(a) is between a tram lane sign and an end tram lane sign; and\n(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the\ndirection of travel of a tram on the tracks) by a continuous\nyellow line parallel to the tracks.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 155\nNote\nTram tracks is defined in the dictionary.\nTram lane sign End tram lane sign\nTram lane\n","sortOrder":153},{"sectionNumber":"155A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Tramways","content":"155A Tramways\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public\nbus) must not drive in a tramway, unless the driver is permitted to\ndrive in the tramway under subrule (2).\n1 Public bus, tram and tram recovery vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n2 The exceptions and defence provided in rule 158 do not apply to tramways.\n(2) A driver may drive in a tramway if:\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tramway to avoid\nan obstruction; and\n(b) when driving in the tramway, the driver does not move into the\npath of an approaching tram or public bus travelling in the\ntramway.\nNote\nObstruction is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 156\n(3) A tramway is a part of a road with tram tracks that:\n(a) is between a tramway sign and an end tramway sign; and\n(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the\ndirection of travel of a tram on the tracks) by either:\n(i) 2 continuous yellow lines parallel to the tracks; or\n(ii) a structure (for example, a dividing strip, pedestrian\nrefuge, traffic island, row of bollards or separation kerb),\nwhether or not the structure is also being used to\nindicate a safety zone;\nbut does include any part of the road where vehicles are permitted\nto cross the tramway.\n(4) For the purposes of subrule (3)(b)(i), a line is to be considered to be\ncontinuous despite any break in it that is designed to permit\nvehicles to cross the tramway.\nNote\nDividing strip, traffic island and tram tracks are defined in the dictionary and\nTramway sign End tramway sign\nTramway with double yellow Tramway with separation\nline kerb\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 157\n","sortOrder":154},{"sectionNumber":"156","sectionType":"section","heading":"Transit lanes","content":"156 Transit lanes\n(1) A driver must not drive in a transit lane unless:\n(a) the driver is driving:\n(i) a public bus, public minibus, motor bike, taxi or tram; or\n(ii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a\ntransit lane (T2) sign – a vehicle carrying at least one\nother person; or\n(iii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a\ntransit lane (T3) sign – a vehicle carrying at least 2 other\npeople; or\n(b) the driver is permitted to drive in the transit lane under\n1 Motor bike, public bus, public minibus, taxi and tram are defined in the\n(2) A transit lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:\n(a) beginning at a transit lane sign; and\n(b) ending at an end transit lane sign.\nNote\nTransit lane signs\nTransit lane (T2) sign Transit lane (T3) sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 158\nEnd transit lane signs\nEnd transit lane (T2) sign End transit lane (T3) sign\nThere are a number of other permitted version of the transit lane sign and\nanother permitted version of the end transit lane sign – see the diagrams in\n","sortOrder":155},{"sectionNumber":"157","sectionType":"section","heading":"Truck lanes","content":"157 Truck lanes\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a truck) must not drive in a truck lane,\nunless the driver is permitted to drive in the truck lane under\n1 Truck is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A truck lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:\n(a) beginning at a truck lane sign; and\n(b) ending at an end truck lane sign.\nNote\nTruck lane sign End truck lane sign\nThere is another permitted version of the end truck lane sign – see the diagram in\n","sortOrder":156},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 3","sectionType":"schedule","heading":null,"content":"Schedule 3\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 159\n","sortOrder":157},{"sectionNumber":"158","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to driving in special purpose lanes","content":"158 Exceptions to driving in special purpose lanes\n(1) The driver of any vehicle may drive for up to the permitted distance\nin a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if it is\nnecessary for the driver to drive in the lane:\n(b) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road\nof another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road,\nthe shoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane); or\n(c) to overtake a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn\nfrom the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of\ndirection signal; or\n(d) to enter a marked lane, or part of the road where there is room\nfor a line of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised\nwheelchairs or animals), from the side of the road.\n1 Permitted distance is defined in subrule (4).\n2 Bicycle lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in rule 154,\nemergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95, centre of the road, marked\nlane, overtake, right change of direction signal, service road and U-turn\nare defined in the dictionary, shoulder is defined in rule 12, tram lane is\ndefined in rule 155, transit lane is defined in rule 156, and truck lane is\ndefined in rule 157.\n3 A driver must keep clear of a tram travelling in a tram lane – see rule 76.\n(2) The driver of any vehicle may drive in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram\nlane, transit lane or truck lane if:\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to avoid an\nobstruction; or\n(b) information on or with a traffic sign applying to the lane\nindicates that the driver may drive in the lane; or\n(c) the driver is permitted to drive in the lane under another law of\nNote\nObstruction, traffic sign and with are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 160\n(3) It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a\nprovision of this Division for driving in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram\nlane, transit lane or truck lane if:\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to stop at a\nplace in the lane; and\nAustralian Road Rules or another law of this jurisdiction, or it\nis a defence under rule 165 for the driver to stop at that place;\nand\n(c) if the lane is a bicycle lane – the driver drives in the lane for no\nmore than the permitted distance.\nNote\nRule 165 provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against\na provision of Part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking). The defence is\navailable, for example, if the driver needs to stop to deal with a medical or other\nemergency.\npermitted distance means:\n(a) for a bicycle lane or tram lane – 50 metres; or\n(b) for any other lane – 100 metres.\n","sortOrder":158},{"sectionNumber":"159","sectionType":"section","heading":"Marked lanes required to be used by particular kinds of","content":"159 Marked lanes required to be used by particular kinds of\n(1) If information on or with a traffic sign applying to a length of road\nindicates that a vehicle of a particular kind must drive in a particular\nmarked lane, a driver driving a vehicle of that kind on the length of\nroad must drive in the indicated lane, unless the driver is:\n(a) avoiding an obstruction; or\n(b) obeying a traffic control device applying to the indicated lane;\nor\n(c) permitted to drive in the indicated lane and also another\nmarked lane under another provision of the Australian Road\nRules or under another law of this jurisdiction; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 161\n(d) intending to turn off the road or to make a U-turn, and in order\nto do so safely without disrupting other vehicles on the road it\nis necessary to position the vehicle in another lane before\nstarting the turn, or to make the turn.\n1 Length of road, marked lane, obstruction, traffic control device, traffic\nsign and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked\n3 Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when\n(2) A traffic sign mentioned in this rule that is on a road applies to the\nlength of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that\nthe first traffic sign no longer applies;\n(b) the next intersection on the road;\n1 Intersection, road marking, T-intersection and traffic sign are defined in\nExamples of a traffic sign mentioned in the rule and a traffic sign indicating that\nthe first traffic sign no longer applies\nTrucks use left lane sign End trucks use left lane sign\nThere is another permitted version of the trucks use left lane sign – see the\ndiagrams in Schedule 3\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 162\n","sortOrder":159},{"sectionNumber":"Div 7","sectionType":"division","heading":"Passing trams and safety zones","content":"Division 7 Passing trams and safety zones\nNote\nBus, tram, tram tracks and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the\n","sortOrder":160},{"sectionNumber":"160","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking a tram that is not at or near the left side","content":"160 Passing or overtaking a tram that is not at or near the left side\nof a road\n(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks that\nare not at or near the far left side of the road.\n(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the right of the\ntram, unless the driver is permitted to do so by a traffic sign or road\nmarking.\nNote\n(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is\nturning left or is giving a left change of direction signal, unless the\ndriver is turning left and there is no danger of a collision with the\ntram.\nNote\n","sortOrder":161},{"sectionNumber":"161","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking a tram at or near the left side of a road","content":"161 Passing or overtaking a tram at or near the left side of a road\n(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks at or\nnear the far left side of the road.\n(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the left of the\ntram unless the driver is turning left and there is no danger of a\ncollision with the tram.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 163\n(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is\nturning right or is giving a right change of direction signal.\nNote\n","sortOrder":162},{"sectionNumber":"162","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving past a safety zone","content":"162 Driving past a safety zone\n(1) A driver driving past a safety zone:\n(a) must not drive on the safety zone; and\n(b) must drive to the left of the safety zone at a speed that does\nnot put at risk the safety of any pedestrian crossing the road to\nor from the safety zone.\n(2) A safety zone is an area of a road:\n(a) at a place with safety zone signs at or near a tram stop; and\n(b) indicated by a structure on the road (for example, a dividing\nstrip, pedestrian refuge or traffic island).\nNote\nDividing strip and traffic island are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":163},{"sectionNumber":"163","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at a tram stop","content":"163 Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at a tram stop\n(a) the driver is driving behind the rear of a tram travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver; and\n(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 164\nand\n(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (5))\nthat permits the driver to pass the tram without stopping.\nNote\nDividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the dictionary, and\n(2) The driver must stop before passing the rear of the tram.\n(3) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not\nproceed if:\n(4) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains at\nthe tram stop and subrule (3)(a) and (b) do not apply, the driver\nmust not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than\n10 kilometres per hour.\n(5) However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is\ndirected to drive past the tram by an authorised person or a police\nNote\n","sortOrder":164},{"sectionNumber":"164","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tram stop","content":"164 Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tram stop\n(a) the driver is driving alongside, or overtaking, a tram travelling\nin the same direction as the driver; and\n(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 165\nand\n(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (5))\nthat permits the driver to pass the tram without stopping.\nNote\nDividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the dictionary, and\n(2) The driver must stop.\n(3) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not\nproceed if:\n(4) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains at\nthe tram stop and subrule (3)(a) and (b) do not apply, the driver\nmust not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than\n10 kilometres per hour.\n(5) However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is\ndirected to drive past the tram by an authorised person or a police\nNote\n","sortOrder":165},{"sectionNumber":"164A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Staying stopped if a tram comes from behind a stopped driver","content":"164A Staying stopped if a tram comes from behind a stopped driver\nand stops\n(a) the driver is stopped beside a tram stop; and\n(b) a tram stops at the tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 166\nand\n(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (4))\nthat permits the driver to proceed past the tram.\nNote\nDividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the dictionary. Safety\nzone is defined in rule 162.\n(2) The driver must not proceed if:\n(3) If the tram remains at the tram stop and subrules (2)(a) and (b) do\nnot apply, the driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed\ngreater than 10 kilometres per hour.\n(4) However, subrules (2) and (3) do not apply if the driver is directed\nto proceed past the tram by an authorised person or a police officer.\nNote\nPart 12 Restrictions on stopping and parking\n1 For the general rules about the application of traffic signs (including parking\ncontrol signs), see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3 especially rules 332 to 335 and\n346. Parking control signs often include information about the times they\napply and the types of vehicles to which they do not apply – see rules 317\nand 318. For the meaning of abbreviations and symbols on parking control\nsigns, see rule 347 and Schedule 1.\n2 Park and stop are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 167\n","sortOrder":166},{"sectionNumber":"165","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in an emergency etc. or to comply with another rule","content":"165 Stopping in an emergency etc. or to comply with another rule\nIt is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a\nprovision of this Part if:\n(a) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\navoid a collision, and the driver stops for no longer than is\nnecessary to avoid the collision; or\n(b) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the driver's vehicle is disabled, and the driver stops\nfor no longer than is necessary for the vehicle to be moved\nsafely to a place where the driver is permitted to park the\nvehicle under the Australian Road Rules; or\n(c) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ndeal with a medical or other emergency, or to assist a disabled\nvehicle, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in\nthe circumstances; or\n(d) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the condition of the driver, a passenger, or the\ndriver's vehicle makes it necessary for the driver to stop in the\ninterests of safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is\nnecessary in the circumstances; or\n(e) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ncomply with another provision of the Australian Road Rules or\na provision of another law, and the driver stops for no longer\nthan is necessary to comply with the other provision.\nExample for paragraph (e)\nIf a driver stops at an intersection at a stop line, stop sign, or traffic lights, or to\ngive way to a vehicle, in accordance with the Australian Road Rules, the driver\ndoes not contravene rule 170 (stopping in or near an intersection).\n1 See rule 125 (in Part 11) for the offence of unreasonably obstructing the path\nof another vehicle or a pedestrian.\n2 Driver's vehicle is defined in the dictionary.\n166 Application of Part to bicycles\nThis Part does not apply to a bicycle that is parked at a bicycle rail\nor in a bicycle rack.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 168\nDivision 2 No stopping and no parking signs and road\nmarkings\n","sortOrder":167},{"sectionNumber":"167","sectionType":"section","heading":"No stopping signs","content":"167 No stopping signs\nA driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a\nno stopping sign applies.\nNote\nAnother law of this jurisdiction may provide transitional arrangements dealing\nwith no standing signs.\nNo stopping signs\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of these signs – see the\n2 A no stopping sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n168 No park ing signs\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not stop on a length of road or in an\narea to which a no parking sign applies, unless the driver:\n(a) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods; and\n(b) does not leave the vehicle unattended; and\n(c) completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the passengers or\ngoods, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case,\nwithin the required time after stopping.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 169\n(2) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest\npoint of the vehicle.\nrequired time means:\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a time – the\nindicated time; or\n(b) if there is no indicated time – 2 minutes; or\n(c) if there is no indicated time, or the indicated time is less than\n5 minutes, and rule 206 applies to the driver – 5 minutes.\n1 With is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 206 applies to a driver if the driver's vehicle displays a current parking\npermit for people with disabilities and the driver complies with the conditions\nof use of the permit – see rule 206(1).\nNo parking signs\n2 A no parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n","sortOrder":168},{"sectionNumber":"169","sectionType":"section","heading":"No stopping on a road with a yellow edge line","content":"169 No stopping on a road with a yellow edge line\nA driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a\ncontinuous yellow edge line.\nNote\nEdge line is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 170\nDivision 3 Stopping at intersections and crossings\n","sortOrder":169},{"sectionNumber":"170","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in or near an intersection","content":"170 Stopping in or near an intersection\n(1) A driver must not stop in an intersection unless:\n(a) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under the\nAustralian Road Rules; or\n(b) the intersection is a T-intersection without traffic lights and the\ndriver stops along the continuous side of the continuing road\nat the intersection.\nNote\nContinuing road, intersection and T-intersection are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver must not stop on a road within 20 metres from the nearest\npoint of an intersecting road at an intersection with traffic lights,\nunless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area,\nto which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to\nstop at that place under the Australian Road Rules.\n1 Parking control sign and traffic lights are defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from an intersection if the driver\nstops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance – see\n(3) A driver must not stop on a road within 10 metres from the nearest\npoint of an intersecting road at an intersection without traffic lights,\nunless the driver stops:\n(a) at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop\nat that place under the Australian Road Rules; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 171\n(b) if the intersection is a T-intersection – along the continuous\nside of the continuing road at the intersection.\nNote\nContinuing road and T-intersection are defined in the dictionary.\n(4) For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which the\ndriver is driving, and:\n(a) for subrule (2) – as shown in example 1; or\n(b) for subrule (3) – as shown in example 2.\nNote\nMeasurement of distance – intersection with traffic lights\nMeasurement of distance – T-intersection without traffic lights\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 172\n","sortOrder":170},{"sectionNumber":"171","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near a children's crossing","content":"171 Stopping on or near a children's crossing\n(1) A driver must not stop on a children's crossing, or on the road within\n20 metres before the crossing and 10 metres after the crossing,\nunless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area,\nto which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to\nstop at that place under the Australian Road Rules.\n1 Children's crossing is defined in rule 80, and parking control sign is\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from a children's crossing if the\ndriver stops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance – see\n(b) as shown in example 1 or 2.\nNote\nMeasurement of distance – children's crossing with red and white posts\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 173\nMeasurement of distance – children's crossing with\n2 parallel continuous or broken lines\n","sortOrder":171},{"sectionNumber":"172","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing (except at an","content":"172 Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing (except at an\n(1) A driver must not stop on a pedestrian crossing that is not at an\nintersection, or on the road within 20 metres before the crossing\nand 10 metres after the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place\non a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign\napplies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under the\n1 Intersection and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary, and\npedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from a crossing if the driver stops\nso any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance – see rule 350(2).\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 174\nMeasurement of distance – pedestrian crossing\n","sortOrder":172},{"sectionNumber":"173","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing (except at an","content":"173 Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing (except at an\n(1) A driver must not stop on a marked foot crossing that is not at an\nintersection, or on the road within 10 metres before the traffic lights\npole nearest to the driver at the crossing and 3 metres after the\ncrossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in\nan area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is\npermitted to stop at that place under the Australian Road Rules.\n1 Intersection, marked foot crossing, parking control sign and traffic\nlights pole are defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from a traffic lights pole or a\ncrossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that\ndistance – see rule 350(2).\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 175\nMeasurement of distance – marked foot crossing\n","sortOrder":173},{"sectionNumber":"174","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near a bicycle crossing (except at an","content":"174 Stopping on or near a bicycle crossing (except at an\n(2) A driver must not stop on a bicycle crossing or within 10 metres\nbefore the traffic lights nearest to the driver at the bicycle crossing,\nand 3 metres after the traffic lights, unless the driver stops at a\nplace on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control\nsign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from traffic lights if the driver stops\nso any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance – see rule 350(2).\n(3) For this rule, distances are measured:\nbicycle crossing means an area of road:\n(a) with bicycle crossing lights facing bicycle riders crossing the\n(b) with traffic lights facing traffic travelling on the road; and\n(c) that is not at an intersection.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 176\nNote\nBicycle crossing lights, intersection and traffic lights are defined in the\ndictionary, road-related area is defined in rule 13 and shoulder is defined in\nrule 12.\nMeasurement of distance – bicycle crossing lights\n","sortOrder":174},{"sectionNumber":"175","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near a level crossing","content":"175 Stopping on or near a level crossing\n(1) A driver must not stop on a level crossing, or on a road within\n20 metres before the nearest rail or track to the driver approaching\nthe crossing and 20 metres after the nearest rail or track to the\ndriver leaving the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a\nlength of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies\nand the driver is permitted to stop at that place under the Australian\nRoad Rules.\n1 Level crossing is defined in rule 120, and parking control sign is defined in\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance from a level crossing if the driver\nstops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance – see\n(2) For this rule, distances are measured as shown in the example.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 177\nNote\nMeasurement of distance – level crossing\nDivision 4 Stopping on clearways and freeways and in\nemergency stopping lanes\n","sortOrder":175},{"sectionNumber":"176","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a clearway","content":"176 Stopping on a clearway\n(1) A driver must not stop on a length of road to which a clearway sign\napplies, unless subrule (2) or (3) applies to the driver.\n(1A) In subrule (1):\nNote\n(2) The driver of a public bus or public minibus may stop on the length\nof road if the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.\nNote\nPublic bus and public minibus are defined in the dictionary.\n(3) The driver of a taxi may stop on the length of road if:\n(a) the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 178\n(b) there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the driver\nof a taxi from stopping on a length of road to which a clearway\nsign applies.\nNote\nTaxi is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) A clearway sign applies, for the days or times indicated on the sign,\nto a length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest\nof the following:\n(a) a clearway sign on the road that indicates different days or\ntimes;\n(b) an end clearway sign on the road;\n(c) the end of the road.\nClearway sign End clearway sign\nAnything on these signs may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":176},{"sectionNumber":"177","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a freeway","content":"177 Stopping on a freeway\n(1) A driver must not stop on a freeway unless:\n(a) the driver stops in an emergency stopping lane; or\n(b) the driver's vehicle is permitted to stop on the freeway under\n1 Driver's vehicle is defined in the dictionary, and emergency stopping lane\nis defined in rule 95.\n2 Rule 178 sets out when a driver can stop in an emergency stopping lane.\n(2) A freeway is a length of road to which a freeway sign applies.\n(3) A freeway sign on a road applies to a length of road beginning at\nthe sign (including any road into which the length of road merges)\nand ending at the next end freeway sign on the road.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 179\nFreeway signs\n","sortOrder":177},{"sectionNumber":"178","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in an emergency stopping lane","content":"178 Stopping in an emergency stopping lane\nA driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop in an\nemergency stopping lane unless:\n(a) the condition of the driver, a passenger or the driver's vehicle,\nor any other factor, makes it necessary or desirable for the\ndriver to stop in the emergency stopping lane in the interests\nof safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary\nin the circumstances; or\n(b) the driver is permitted to stop in the emergency stopping lane\nNote\nBicycle and driver's vehicle are defined in the dictionary, and emergency\nstopping lane is defined in rule 95.\nDivision 5 Stopping in zones for particular vehicles\n3 The signs mentioned in this Division are particular types of parking control\nsign (defined in the dictionary) to which the general rules about the\napplication of parking control signs apply – see rules 332 to 335.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 180\n","sortOrder":178},{"sectionNumber":"179","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a loading zone","content":"179 Stopping in a loading zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a loading zone unless the driver is driving:\n(a) a public bus that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers; or\n(b) a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods; or\n(c) a vehicle that is permitted to stop in the loading zone under\nNote\nPublic bus and truck are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver who is permitted to stop in a loading zone must not stay\ncontinuously in the zone for longer than:\n(a) 30 minutes; or\n(b) if information on or with the loading zone signs applying to the\nloading zone indicates another time – the indicated time; or\n(c) for a driver who is permitted to stop in the loading zone under\nanother law of this jurisdiction that provides for a shorter\nperiod – that period.\nNote\n(3) A loading zone is a length of a road to which a loading zone sign\ndiagrams in Schedule 3\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 181\n2 A loading zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 81A of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":179},{"sectionNumber":"180","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a truck zone","content":"180 Stopping in a truck zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a truck zone unless the driver is driving:\n(a) a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods; or\n(b) a vehicle that is permitted to stop in the truck zone under\nNote\nTruck is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A truck zone is a length of a road to which a truck zone sign\n1 There is another permitted version of this sign – see the diagram in\n2 A truck zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n181 Stopping in a works zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a works zone unless the driver is driving a\nvehicle that is:\n(a) engaged in construction work in or near the zone; or\n(b) permitted to stop in the works zone under another law of this\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 182\n(2) A works zone is a length of a road to which a works zone sign\n1 There is another permitted version of this sign – see the diagram in\n2 A works zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n182 Stopping in a taxi zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a taxi zone, unless the driver is driving a\ntaxi.\nNote\nTaxi is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A taxi zone is a length of a road to which a taxi zone sign applies.\n2 A taxi zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 183\n","sortOrder":180},{"sectionNumber":"183","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a bus zone","content":"183 Stopping in a bus zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a bus zone unless the driver is driving a\npublic bus (except a public bus of a kind that is not permitted to\nstop in the bus zone by information on or with the bus zone sign\napplying to the bus zone).\nNote\nPublic bus and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A bus zone is a length of a road to which a bus zone sign applies.\n2 A bus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n","sortOrder":181},{"sectionNumber":"184","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a minibus zone","content":"184 Stopping in a minibus zone\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public minibus) must not stop in a\nminibus zone.\nNote\nPublic minibus is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 184\n(2) A minibus zone is a length of road to which a minibus zone sign\nMinibus zone sign\nA minibus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n","sortOrder":182},{"sectionNumber":"185","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a permit zone","content":"185 Stopping in a permit zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a permit zone unless the driver's vehicle\ndisplays a current permit issued under another law of this\njurisdiction that permits the vehicle to stop in the zone.\nNote\n(2) A permit zone is a length of a road to which a permit zone sign\n2 A permit zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and\n","sortOrder":183},{"sectionNumber":"186","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a mail zone","content":"186 Stopping in a mail zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a mail zone.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 185\n(2) A mail zone is a length of a road to which a mail zone sign applies.\nNote\nExemptions for drivers of postal vehicles may be provided under rule 313.\nMail zone sign\nA mail zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything\non the sign may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\nDivision 6 Other places where stopping is restricted\n","sortOrder":184},{"sectionNumber":"187","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a bicycle lane, bus lane, bus only lane, tram lane,","content":"187 Stopping in a bicycle lane, bus lane, bus only lane, tram lane,\ntramway, transit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks\n(1) A driver must not stop in a bus lane, transit lane or truck lane\nunless the driver:\n(a) is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping\noff or picking up, passengers; and\n(b) is permitted to drive in the lane under the Australian Road\n(2) A driver must not stop in a bicycle lane unless:\n(a) the driver:\n(i) is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is\ndropping off or picking up, passengers; and\n(ii) is permitted to drive in the lane under the Australian\nRoad Rules or another law of this jurisdiction; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 186\n(b) the driver is permitted to stop or park in the bicycle lane under\n(3) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a\npublic bus) must not stop in a tram lane, a tramway or on tram\ntracks.\n(4) A driver must not stop in a bus only lane unless the driver:\n(a) is driving a public bus and is dropping off, or picking up,\npassengers; and\n(b) is permitted to drive in the bus only lane under the Australian\nRoad Rules or another law of this jurisdiction.\n1 Bicycle lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in rule 154, bus only\nlane is defined in rule 154A, tram lane is defined in rule 155, tramway is\ndefined in rule 155A, transit lane is defined in rule 156, truck lane is defined\nin rule 157, and public bus, public minibus, taxi, tram and tram tracks are\n2 Rule 76 deals with drivers keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes or\non tram tracks marked on each side by a yellow line.\n3 Part 11, Division 6 deals with driving in bicycle lanes, bus lanes, tram lanes,\ntramways, transit lanes and truck lanes.\n188 Stopping in a shared zone\nA driver must not stop in a shared zone unless:\nto stop at that place under the Australian Road Rules; or\nstop in the parking bay under the Australian Road Rules; or\n(c) the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods;\nor\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 187\n(d) the driver is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection\nof goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage.\nNote\nParking bay and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary, and shared\nzone is defined in rule 24.\n","sortOrder":185},{"sectionNumber":"189","sectionType":"section","heading":"Double parking","content":"189 Double parking\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road if to do so would put any part of\nthe vehicle that the driver is driving between a vehicle that is parked\non the road and the centre of the road.\nDouble parked on a two-way\nroad without a dividing line\nDouble parked on a two-way\nroad with a dividing line\nExample 3 Example 4\nDouble parked on the right side\nof a one-way road with no\nvehicles parked on the left side\nof the road\nDouble parked on the left side of\na one-way road with other\nvehicles lawfully parked on the\nright side of the road\nIn the examples, the vehicle marked with an \"X\" is stopped in contravention of\nNote\nOne-way road and two-way road are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 188\n(2) A driver does not contravene this rule by parking on the side of the\nroad, or in a median strip parking area, in accordance with rule 210.\nNote\nIn the example, the vehicle marked with an \"X\" is stopped in contravention of this\n","sortOrder":186},{"sectionNumber":"190","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in or near a safety zone","content":"190 Stopping in or near a safety zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a safety zone, or on a road within\n10 metres before or after a safety zone, unless the driver stops at a\nplace on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control\nsign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under\n1 Parking control sign is defined in the dictionary, and safety zone is defined\nin rule 162.\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance before or after something if the\ndriver stops so any part of the vehicle is within that distance – see\n(b) from the end of the structure; and\n(c) as shown in the example.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 189\nNote\nMeasurement of distance – safety zone\nIn the example, the vehicles marked with an \"X\" are stopped in contravention of\n","sortOrder":187},{"sectionNumber":"191","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near an obstruction","content":"191 Stopping near an obstruction\nA driver must not stop on a road near an obstruction on the road in\na position that obstructs traffic on the road.\nNote\nObstruction is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":188},{"sectionNumber":"192","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc.","content":"192 Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc.\n(1) A driver must not stop on a bridge, causeway, ramp or similar\nstructure unless:\n(a) the road is at least as wide on the structure as it is on each of\nthe approaches; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 190\nNote\n(2) A driver must not stop in a tunnel or underpass unless:\n(a) the road is at least as wide in the tunnel or underpass as it is\non each of the approaches; or\nStopping on a bridge where the road on the bridge is\nnarrower than on an approach\nIn the example, the vehicle is stopped in contravention of subrule (1).\n","sortOrder":189},{"sectionNumber":"193","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up area","content":"193 Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up area\n(1) A driver must not stop on or near a crest or curve on a length of\nroad that is not in a built-up area unless:\n(a) the driver's vehicle is visible for 100 metres to drivers\napproaching the vehicle and travelling in the direction of travel\nof traffic on the same side of the road as the vehicle; or\nNote\nBuilt-up area, driver's vehicle and parking control sign are defined in the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 191\nNote\n","sortOrder":190},{"sectionNumber":"194","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near a fire hydrant etc.","content":"194 Stopping near a fire hydrant etc.\n(1) A driver must not stop within 1 metre of a fire hydrant, fire hydrant\nindicator, or fire plug indicator, unless:\n(a) the driver is driving a public bus, and the driver stops at a bus\nstop or in a bus zone and does not leave the bus unattended;\nor\n(b) the driver is driving a taxi, and the driver stops in a taxi zone\nand does not leave the taxi unattended; or\n(c) the driver is driving a public minibus, and the driver stops in a\nminibus zone and does not leave the minibus unattended.\nNote\nBus zone is defined in rule 183, public bus, public minibus and taxi are\ndefined in the dictionary, minibus zone is defined in rule 184, and taxi zone is\ndefined in rule 182.\n(2) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest\npoint of the vehicle.\nfire hydrant means an upright pipe with a spout, nozzle or other\noutlet for drawing water from a main or service pipe in case of fire\nor other emergency.\nFire hydrant indicators\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 192\nFire plug indicator\n","sortOrder":191},{"sectionNumber":"195","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at or near a bus stop","content":"195 Stopping at or near a bus stop\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not stop at a bus\nstop, or on the road, within 20 metres before a sign on the road that\nindicates the bus stop, and 10 metres after the sign, unless the\ndriver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at\nthat place under the Australian Road Rules.\n1 Parking control sign and public bus are defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance before or after a sign indicating a\nbus stop if the driver stops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that\ndistance – see rule 350(2).\n(2) For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which the\nNote\n","sortOrder":192},{"sectionNumber":"196","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at or near a tram stop","content":"196 Stopping at or near a tram stop\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a\npublic bus travelling along tram tracks) must not stop at a tram stop\nor on the road within 20 metres before a sign that indicates a tram\nstop, unless:\nwhich a parking control sign applies; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 193\n1 Parking control sign, public bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks\n2 A driver stops within a particular distance before a sign indicating a tram stop\nif the driver stops so any part of the driver's vehicle is within that distance –\nsee rule 350(2).\n(2) For this rule, the distance is measured in the direction in which the\nNote\n","sortOrder":193},{"sectionNumber":"197","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip, painted island","content":"197 Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip, painted island\nor traffic island\n(1) A driver must not stop on a bicycle path, footpath, shared path or\ndividing strip, or a nature strip adjacent to a length of road in a built-\nup area, unless:\nto stop at that place under the Australian Road Rules; or\n(b) the driver is permitted to stop under another law of this\n1 Bicycle path is defined in rule 239, built-up area, dividing strip, footpath,\nnature strip and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary, and\n2 A separated footpath is a particular kind of footpath – see rule 239.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 194\n(1A) A driver must not stop on a painted island.\n2 Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a turning\nlane from a painted island and rule 138 deals with keeping off painted\nislands.\n(1B) A driver must not stop on a traffic island.\nNote\nTraffic island is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) Subrules (1) and (1B) do not apply to the rider of a bicycle or\nanimal.\nNote\n","sortOrder":194},{"sectionNumber":"198","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway etc.","content":"198 Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway etc.\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road in a position that obstructs access\nby vehicles or pedestrians to or from a footpath ramp or a similar\nway of access to a footpath, or a bicycle path or passageway\n(a) the driver is driving a public bus that is dropping off, or picking\nup, passengers; or\nstop in the parking bay under the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, and footpath, parking bay and public bus\n(2) A driver must not stop on or across a driveway or other way of\naccess for vehicles travelling to or from adjacent land unless:\n(a) the driver:\n(i) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers; and\n(ii) does not leave the vehicle unattended; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 195\n(iii) completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the\npassengers, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in\nany case, within 2 minutes after stopping; or\nstop in the parking bay under the Australian Road Rules.\n1 Adjacent land is defined in the dictionary.\n2 A driver stops on or across a driveway or way of access if any part of the\nvehicle is on or across the driveway or way of access – see rule 350.\nBlocking a driveway\nIn the example, the vehicle marked with an \"X\" is stopped in contravention of\nsubrule (2).\n(3) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so that the driver is over 3 metres from the\nclosest point of the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":195},{"sectionNumber":"199","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near a postbox","content":"199 Stopping near a postbox\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road within 3 metres of a public\npostbox, unless the driver:\n(a) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or mail; or\n(b) stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop\nat that place under the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 196\npublic postbox means a structure that is declared to be a public\npostbox, for the Australian Road Rules, under another law of this\n","sortOrder":196},{"sectionNumber":"200","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on roads – heavy and long vehicles","content":"200 Stopping on roads – heavy and long vehicles\n(1) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a\nlength of road that is not in a built-up area, except on the shoulder\nof the road.\nNote\nBuilt-up area and heavy vehicle are defined in the dictionary. Shoulder is\ndefined in rule 12.\n(2) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a\nLength of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour, unless the\ndriver is permitted to stop on the length of road for longer than\n1 hour by information on or with a traffic control device, or under\nsubrule (2A) or another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nTraffic control device and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2A) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, other than a bus, is\npermitted to stop on a length of road in a built up area for longer\nthan 1 hour if, throughout the period when the vehicle is stopped on\nthe length of road, the driver is engaged in dropping off, or picking\nup, goods.\nlong vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or\nprojection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer.\n1 GVM is defined in the dictionary, road-related area is defined in rule 13, and\nshoulder is defined in rule 12.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 197\n","sortOrder":197},{"sectionNumber":"201","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a road with a bicycle parking sign","content":"201 Stopping on a road with a bicycle parking sign\nA driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop on a length of\nroad to which a bicycle parking sign applies, unless the driver is\ndropping off, or picking up, passengers.\nNote\nBicycle parking sign\nAnything on this sign may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":198},{"sectionNumber":"202","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on a road with a motor bike parking sign","content":"202 Stopping on a road with a motor bike parking sign\nA driver (except the rider of a motor bike) must not stop on a length\nof road to which a motor bike parking sign applies, unless the driver\nis dropping off, or picking up, passengers.\nNote\nMotor bike parking sign\nAnything on this sign may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 198\n","sortOrder":199},{"sectionNumber":"203","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a parking area for people with disabilities","content":"203 Stopping in a parking area for people with disabilities\n(1) A driver must not stop in a parking area for people with disabilities\n(a) the driver's vehicle displays a current parking permit for\npeople with disabilities; and\n(b) the driver complies with the conditions of use of the permit.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and parking permit for people with disabilities are defined in\n(2) A parking area for people with disabilities is a length or area of a\nroad:\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying a people with\ndisabilities symbol applies; or\n(b) to which a people with disabilities parking sign applies; or\n(c) indicated by a road marking (a people with disabilities road\nmarking) that consists of, or includes, a people with\ndisabilities symbol.\nPeople with disabilities symbols\ndisplaying a people with\ndisplaying a people with\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 199\nPeople with disabilities parking sign\nAnything on these signs may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":200},{"sectionNumber":"203A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a slip lane","content":"203A Stopping in a slip lane\nA driver must not stop in a slip lane unless:\n(a) a parking control sign applies to the place where the driver\nstops; and\nNote\nParking control sign and slip lane are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":201},{"sectionNumber":"203B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a parking area for electric-powered vehicles","content":"203B Stopping in a parking area for electric-powered vehicles\n(1) A driver of a vehicle that is not an electric-powered vehicle must not\nstop in a parking area for electric-powered vehicles.\n(2) A parking area for electric-powered vehicles is a length or area of a\nroad:\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying an\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol applies; or\n(b) to which an electric-powered vehicle parking sign applies; or\n(c) indicated by a road marking that consists of, or includes, an\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol.\nNote\n(3) An electric-powered vehicle is a vehicle that:\n(a) is powered by one or more electric motors or traction motors,\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 200\nregardless of whether the vehicle is also powered by another\nform of propulsion; and\n(b) can be recharged from an external source of electricity.\nElectric-powered vehicle symbol\n","sortOrder":202},{"sectionNumber":"203C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in a parking area for the charging of electric-powered","content":"203C Stopping in a parking area for the charging of electric-powered\n(1) A driver must not stop in a parking area for the charging of\nelectric-powered vehicles unless:\n(a) the driver's vehicle is an electric-powered vehicle; and\n(b) the electric-powered vehicle is plugged in to an external\nsource of electricity.\nNote\nElectric-powered vehicle is defined in rule 203B.\n(2) A parking area for the charging of an electric-powered vehicle is a\nlength or area of a road:\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying an\nelectric-powered vehicle charging symbol applies; or\n(b) to which an electric-powered vehicle charging parking sign\napplies; or\n(c) indicated by a road marking that consists of, or includes, an\nelectric-powered vehicle charging symbol.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 201\nElectric-powered vehicle charging symbol\nDivision 7 Permissive parking signs and parking fees\n","sortOrder":203},{"sectionNumber":"204","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of certain information on or with permissive parking","content":"204 Meaning of certain information on or with permissive parking\nsigns\n(1) This rule explains the meaning of certain information on or with a\npermissive parking sign applying to a length of road or an area.\nNote\n2 A permissive parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction\nand anything on the sign may be differently arranged – see rule 316(4).\nNote\nRule 318(1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or with a traffic control\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 202\ndevice (including a permissive parking sign) that limits the application of the\ndevice to particular times or days. Under rule 318(3), if the information indicates\nthat the device applies on a particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not\nhave effect on a Friday that is a public holiday unless otherwise stated.\n(2) A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction,\nimmediately to the left of the letter ‘P' indicates that a driver must\nnot park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for\nlonger than the period of hours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the\nnumber, fraction, or number and fraction, shown.\nExamples of permissive parking signs showing permitted parking periods and\ntimes of operation\napplying to a length of road with\na whole number to the left of P\napplying to an area with a whole\nnumber to the left of P\nIn example 1, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for\nlonger than 1 hour on Saturdays between 9 am and 12 noon.\nIn example 2, the sign indicates that a driver must not park in the area for longer\nthan 2 hours on Mondays to Fridays between 8.30 am and 5 pm, and on\nSaturdays between 8.30 am and 12 noon, unless permitted by information on or\nwith another traffic control device.\n(3) A number, together with the word ‘minute', immediately to the right\nof the letter ‘P' indicate that a driver must not park on the length of\nroad, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number of\nminutes shown.\nPermissive parking sign with a number of minutes to the right of P\nIn this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for\nlonger than 5 minutes on Mondays to Fridays between 9 am and 4 pm.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 203\n(4) The word ‘parking', together with words indicating a number of\nhours or minutes, indicate that a driver must not park on the length\nof road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number of\nhours or minutes shown.\n","sortOrder":204},{"sectionNumber":"205","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking for longer than indicated","content":"205 Parking for longer than indicated\n(1) A driver must not park continuously on a length of road, or in an\narea, to which a permissive parking sign applies for longer than the\nperiod indicated by information on or with the sign or, if rule 206\napplies to the driver, the period allowed under that rule.\nNote\n(1A) If a permissive parking sign does not indicate a period and does not\nindicate that it applies at particular times, or at particular times on\nparticular days, a driver may, at any time, park continuously on a\nlength of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies, unless:\n(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or\narea; and\n(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in\nthe area, under the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\n(2) For subrule (1), a driver parks continuously on a length of road, or\nin an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies, from the\ntime when the driver parks on the length of road, or in the area, until\nthe driver, or another driver, moves the vehicle off the length of\nroad, or out of the area, to which the permissive parking sign\n","sortOrder":205},{"sectionNumber":"205A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking outside times indicated","content":"205A Parking outside times indicated\nIf a permissive parking sign indicates that it applies at particular\ntimes, or at particular times on particular days, a driver may park on\nthe length of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies at a time,\nor at a time on a day, when the sign does not apply, unless:\n(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or\narea; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 204\n(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in\nthe area, at that time, or at that time on that day, under the\n2 Rule 318(1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or with a traffic\ncontrol device (including a permissive parking sign) that limits the application\nof the device to particular times or days. Under rule 318(3), if the information\nindicates that the device applies on a particular day, for example Friday, the\nsign does not have effect on a Friday that is a public holiday at the place\nwhere the device is located, unless otherwise stated.\n","sortOrder":206},{"sectionNumber":"206","sectionType":"section","heading":"Time extension for people with disabilities","content":"206 Time extension for people with disabilities\n(1) This rule applies to a driver:\n(a) if the driver's vehicle displays a current parking permit for\npeople with disabilities; and\n(b) the driver complies with the conditions of use of the permit.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and parking permit for people with disabilities are defined in\n(2) The driver may park continuously on a length of road, or in an area,\nto which a permissive parking sign applies (except in a parking area\nfor people with disabilities) for the longest of the following periods\nthat applies to the driver's circumstances:\n(a) if the time limit on the sign:\n(i) is less than 30 minutes, 30 minutes; or\n(ii) is 30 minutes or more but 1 hour or less, 2 hours; or\n(iii) is more than 1 hour, twice the period indicated on the\nsign; or\n(b) if another law of this jurisdiction permits the driver to park for a\nlonger period – the longer period;\n(c) if another law of this jurisdiction permits the driver to park for\nan unlimited period – an unlimited period.\nNote\nParking area for people with disabilities is defined in rule 203.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 205\n","sortOrder":207},{"sectionNumber":"207","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking where fees are payable","content":"207 Parking where fees are payable\n(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in an\narea, to which a permissive parking sign applies if information on or\nwith the sign indicates that a fee is payable for parking .\nNote\n(2) The driver must:\n(a) pay the fee (if any) payable under the law of this jurisdiction;\nand\n(b) obey the instructions (if any):\n(i) on or with the sign or a meter, ticket or ticket-vending\nmachine; and\n(ii) in a mobile application or other electronic method used\nfor the payment of fees under this rule, being an\napplication or method indicated on or with the sign or a\nmeter, ticket or ticket-vending machine.\n","sortOrder":208},{"sectionNumber":"Div 8","sectionType":"division","heading":"Parallel parking","content":"Division 8 Parallel parking\n","sortOrder":209},{"sectionNumber":"208","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking on a road (except in a median strip parking","content":"208 Parallel parking on a road (except in a median strip parking\narea)\n(1) A driver who parks on a road (except in a median strip parking\narea) must position the driver's vehicle in accordance with\nsubrules (2) to (8).\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and median strip parking area are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The driver must position the vehicle to face:\n(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line\nof traffic on, or next to, the part of the road where the driver\nparks; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 206\n(b) if there is no traffic on, or next to, that part of the road – in the\ndirection in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of\nNote\n(3) If the road is a two-way road, the driver must position the vehicle\nparallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left side of the road.\nNote\nTwo-way road is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must position the vehicle\nparallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left or far right side of\nthe road, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a\nparking control sign.\nNote\nOne-way road, parking control sign and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(5) If the driver does not park in a parking bay, the driver must position\nthe vehicle at least 1 metre from the closest point of any vehicle in\nfront of it and any vehicle behind it.\nNote\nParking bay is defined in the dictionary.\n(6) If the road has a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip, the\ndriver must position the vehicle at least 3 metres from the\ncontinuous dividing line or dividing strip, unless otherwise indicated\nby information on or with a parking control sign.\nNote\nDividing line and dividing strip are defined in the dictionary.\n(7) If the road does not have a continuous dividing line or a dividing\nstrip, the driver must position the vehicle so there is at least\n3 metres of the road alongside the vehicle that is clear for other\nvehicles to pass, unless otherwise indicated by information on or\nwith a parking control sign.\n(8) The driver must position the vehicle so the vehicle does not\nunreasonably obstruct the path of other vehicles or pedestrians.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 207\n(9) This rule does not apply to:\n(a) a driver if the driver parks on a length of road, or in an area, to\nwhich a parking control sign or road marking applies, and\ninformation on or with the sign or road marking includes the\nwords ‘angle parking' or ‘angle'; or\n(b) the rider of a motor bike if the rider parks the motor bike on a\nlength of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking\nsign applies and the sign indicates that the length of road or\narea is for parking motor bikes.\n1 Motor bike and road marking are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Division 9 deals with angle parking.\n(10) Subrules (3) and (4) do not apply to the rider of a motor bike if the\nrider positions the motor bike so at least one wheel is as near as\npracticable to the far left or far right side of the road.\n(11) If a road has one or more service roads, the part of the road used\nby the main body of moving vehicles, and each service road, is\ntaken to be a separate road for this rule.\nNote\nPart of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles and service road\n(12) In this rule:\ncontinuous dividing line means:\n(a) a single continuous dividing line only; or\n(b) a single continuous dividing line to the left or right of a broken\ndividing line; or\n(c) 2 parallel continuous dividing lines.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 208\nParallel parking – minimum distance from other vehicles and dividing strip\nIn the example, the vehicles marked with an \"X\" are parked in contravention of\n","sortOrder":210},{"sectionNumber":"208A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking in a road-related area (except in a median strip","content":"208A Parallel parking in a road-related area (except in a median strip\nparking area)\n(1) A driver who parks in a road-related area (except in a median strip\nparking area) must position the driver's vehicle to face:\n(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line\nof traffic next to the part of the road-related area where the\ndriver parks; or\n(b) if there is no traffic next to that part of the road-related area –\nin the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel in the\nroad-related area; or\n(c) if the road-related area is an area that divides a road – either:\n(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or\nline of traffic to the left of the driver; or\n(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver – in the\ndirection in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that\npart of the road.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle, line of traffic, marked lane and median strip parking area\nare defined in the dictionary and road-related area is defined in rule 13.\n(2) Subrule (1) does not apply if:\n(a) another law of this jurisdiction permits the driver to park in\nanother manner in the road-related area; or\n(b) signs or road markings indicate that angle parking is required\nin the road-related area.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 209\n","sortOrder":211},{"sectionNumber":"209","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking in a median strip parking area","content":"209 Parallel parking in a median strip parking area\n(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks in a median strip parking\narea if a parking control sign or road marking applies to the area,\nand information on or with the sign or road marking indicates that\nthe driver's vehicle must be positioned parallel to the median strip.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle, median strip, median strip parking area, parking control\nsign, road marking and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The driver must position the driver's vehicle:\n(a) to face:\n(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or\nline of traffic to the left of the driver; or\n(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver – in the\ndirection in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that\npart of the road; and\n(b) parallel, and as near as practicable, to the centre of the\nmedian strip; and\n(c) if the driver does not park in a parking bay – at least 1 metre\nfrom the closest point of any vehicle in front of it and any\nvehicle behind it.\nNote\nMarked lane and parking bay are defined in the dictionary.\n(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 210\nDivision 9 Angle parking\n1 Park and stop are defined in the dictionary.\n210 Angle parking\n(1) If a driver parks in a parking area on the side of a road, or in a\nmedian strip parking area:\n(a) to which a parking control sign with the words \"angle parking\"\nor \"angle\" applies; or\n(b) to which a road marking indicating an angle applies;\nthe driver must position the driver's vehicle in accordance with\nsubrules (2) to (4).\n1 Driver's vehicle, median strip parking area, parking area, parking control sign,\nroad marking and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 212 deals with whether a driver enters a median strip parking area\nforwards or in reverse.\n(2) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle\nmust be positioned at a specified angle (other than 90°), the driver\nmust position the vehicle:\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to the\nspecified angle; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road – with the rear\n(2A) If the parking control sign or road marking does not indicate the\nangle at which the vehicle must be positioned, the driver must\nposition the vehicle:\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to 45°,\nas shown in example 1 or 2; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 211\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road – with the rear\nParking at 45°\nat the side of a two-way road\nParking at 45°\nat the right side of a one-way\nroad\n(2B) Subrules (2) and (2A) do not apply if the road marking, or\ninformation on the parking control sign, includes the words ‘rear in'\nor similar words.\n(3) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle\nmust be positioned at an angle of 90°, the driver:\n(a) must position the driver's vehicle so the vehicle is at an angle\nas near as practicable to 90°, as shown in example 3 or 4; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road:\n(i) if the road marking, or information on the parking control\nsign, includes the words ‘rear in' or ‘front in', or similar\nwords – must position the vehicle so that the front of the\nvehicle is nearest the centre of the road, or the rear of\nthe vehicle is nearest the centre of the road, in\naccordance with the road marking or sign; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 212\n(ii) otherwise – may position the vehicle either way around.\nParking at 90°\nat the side of a two-way road\nParking at 90°\nat the right side of a one-way\nroad\n(4) If the road marking, or information on the parking control sign,\nincludes the words \"rear in\", or similar words, the driver must\nposition the driver's vehicle:\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to:\n(i) the angle indicated by the road marking or parking\ncontrol sign; or\n(ii) if the road marking or parking control sign does not\nindicate an angle – 45°; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road – with the front\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 213\n(4A) Subrule (4) does not apply if the parking control sign or road\nmarking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angle of\n90°.\nExamples for subrule (4)\nParking ‘rear in' at 30° at the\nside of a road\nParking ‘rear in' at 30° in a\nmedian strip parking area\nParking ‘rear in' at 45°\nat the side of a road\nExample 8\nParking ‘rear in' at 45°\nin a median strip parking area\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 214\n(5) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.\nNote\n","sortOrder":212},{"sectionNumber":"Div 10","sectionType":"division","heading":"Other parking related rules","content":"Division 10 Other parking related rules\n","sortOrder":213},{"sectionNumber":"211","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking in parking bays","content":"211 Parking in parking bays\n(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in an\narea, that has parking bays (whether or not a park in bays only sign\napplies to the length of road or area).\nNote\nParking bay is defined in the dictionary.\nPark in bays only sign\nExample 9\nParking \"rear in\" at 60° at the\nside of a road\nExample 10\nParking \"rear in at 60° in a\nmedian strip parking area\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 215\n(2) The driver must position the driver's vehicle completely within a\nsingle parking bay, unless the vehicle is too wide or long to fit\ncompletely within the bay.\n(3) If the vehicle is too wide or long to fit completely within a single\nparking bay, the driver must park the driver's vehicle within the\nminimum number of parking bays needed to park the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":214},{"sectionNumber":"212","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering and leaving a median strip parking area","content":"212 Entering and leaving a median strip parking area\n(1) If information on or with a traffic control device indicates that a\ndriver must enter or leave a median strip parking area in a particular\ndirection, the driver must enter or leave the area in that direction.\nNote\nMedian strip parking area, traffic control device and with are defined in the\n(2) If there is no information on or with a traffic control device that\nindicates that a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking\narea in a particular direction, the driver must enter or leave the area\nby driving forward.\nLeaving median strip parking area by driving forward\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 216\n","sortOrder":215},{"sectionNumber":"213","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making a motor vehicle secure","content":"213 Making a motor vehicle secure\n(1) This rule applies to the driver of a motor vehicle who stops and\nleaves the vehicle on a road, except so far as the driver is exempt\nfrom this rule under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\n(2) Before leaving the vehicle, the driver must apply the parking brake\neffectively or, if weather conditions (for example, snow) would\nprevent the effective operation of the parking brake, effectively\nrestrain the motor vehicle's movement in another way.\n(3) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the\nvehicle, the driver must switch off the engine before leaving the\n(4) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the\nvehicle, and:\n(a) there is no-one left in the vehicle; or\n(b) there is only a child or children under 16 years old left in the\nvehicle;\nthe driver must remove the ignition key before leaving the vehicle.\n(5) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the vehicle\nand there is no-one left in the vehicle, the driver must:\n(a) if the windows of the vehicle can be secured – secure the\nwindows immediately before leaving the vehicle; and\n(b) if the doors of the vehicle can be locked – lock the doors\nimmediately after leaving the vehicle.\nNote\nWindow is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 217\n(6) For the purposes of subrule (5), a window is secure even if it is\nopen by up to 2 centimetres.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 81D of the Traffic\nPart 13 Lights and warning devices\nDivision 1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles, animals and\nanimal-drawn vehicles)\n214 Division does not apply to riders of bicycles, animals or\nanimal-drawn vehicles\nThis Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, animal or\nanimal-drawn vehicle.\n2 The rules for using lights when riding a bicycle or an animal-drawn vehicle at\nnight, or in hazardous weather conditions, are:\n• for riders of bicycles – rule 259\n• for riders of animal-drawn vehicles – rule 223.\n","sortOrder":216},{"sectionNumber":"215","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous weather","content":"215 Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous weather\nconditions\n(1) A driver must not drive at night, or in hazardous weather conditions\ncausing reduced visibility unless:\n(a) the headlights, tail lights and number plate light fitted to the\ndriver's vehicle are operating effectively and are clearly visible;\nand\n(b) if the vehicle is fitted with clearance lights or side marker\nlights – those lights are operating effectively and are clearly\nvisible.\n1 Driver's vehicle and night are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 218\n(2) However, this rule does not apply to a driver if the driver's vehicle is\nstopped or parked at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to\nwhich a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to\nstop or park at that place under the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\nLength of road and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary.\n(3) Also, a driver driving during the day in fog, or other hazardous\nweather conditions causing reduced visibility, may drive without the\nheadlights of the driver's vehicle operating if the vehicle is fitted with\nfront fog lights and those lights are operating effectively and are\nclearly visible.\n(4) In subrule (1), a reference to a kind of light fitted to a vehicle is a\nreference to a light of that kind required to be fitted to the vehicle\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 82 of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":217},{"sectionNumber":"216","sectionType":"section","heading":"Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions","content":"216 Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions\n(1) A driver must not tow a vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather\nconditions causing reduced visibility unless:\n(a) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the front of the\nvehicle:\n(i) the tail lights of the vehicle are operating effectively and\nare clearly visible; or\n(ii) the vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating; or\n(b) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the rear of the\nvehicle – the vehicle has portable rear lights that are\noperating.\nNote\nNight is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) However, this rule does not apply to the driver of a tow truck if:\n(a) the driver is towing a disabled vehicle carrying a placard load\nof dangerous goods to a place that is safely off the road; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 219\n(b) a vehicle carrying a warning to other traffic is following\nimmediately behind the disabled vehicle.\ndangerous goods, see section 6 of the Dangerous Goods (Road\nand Rail Transport) Act.\nplacard load, see regulation 2.13 of the Dangerous Goods (Road\nand Rail Transport) Regulations.\nportable rear lights means:\n(a) for a vehicle being towed from the front of the vehicle – a pair\nof lights attached to the rear of the vehicle that, when\noperating, show a red light that is clearly visible for at least\n200 metres from the rear of the vehicle; and\n(b) for a vehicle being towed from the rear of the vehicle – a pair\nof lights attached to the front of the vehicle that, when\noperating, show a red light that is clearly visible for at least\n200 metres from the front of the vehicle.\nNote\n","sortOrder":218},{"sectionNumber":"217","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using fog lights","content":"217 Using fog lights\n(1) The driver of a vehicle fitted with front fog lights or rear fog lights\nmust not operate the fog light unless the driver is driving in fog or\nother hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.\nfront fog light means a light (other than a headlight) fitted to the\nfront of a vehicle to improve illumination of the road in fog, snowfall,\nheavy rain or dust clouds.\nrear fog light means a light (other than a brake light, a tail light, a\nnumber plate light or a reversing light) fitted to the rear of a vehicle\nto make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in fog,\nsnowfall, heavy rain or dust clouds.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 220\n","sortOrder":219},{"sectionNumber":"218","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using headlights on high-beam","content":"218 Using headlights on high-beam\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not use the vehicle's headlights on\nhigh-beam, or allow the vehicle's headlights to be used on high-\nbeam, if the driver is driving:\n(a) less than 200 metres behind a vehicle travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver; or\n(b) less than 200 metres from an oncoming vehicle.\nNote\nHigh-beam and oncoming vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) However, if the driver is overtaking a vehicle, the driver may briefly\nswitch the headlights from low-beam to high-beam immediately\nbefore the driver begins to overtake the vehicle.\nNote\nLow-beam and overtake are defined in the dictionary.\nUsing headlights on low-beam when travelling less\nthan 200 metres behind another vehicle travelling in\nthe same direction\nUsing headlights on low-beam when travelling within\n200 metres of an oncoming vehicle\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 221\n","sortOrder":220},{"sectionNumber":"219","sectionType":"section","heading":"Lights not to be used to dazzle other road users","content":"219 Lights not to be used to dazzle other road users\nA driver must not use, or allow to be used, any light fitted to or in\nthe driver's vehicle to dazzle, or in a way that is likely to dazzle,\nanother road user.\n1 Driver's vehicle is defined in the dictionary, and road user is defined in\nrule 14.\n","sortOrder":221},{"sectionNumber":"220","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights on vehicles that are stopped","content":"220 Using lights on vehicles that are stopped\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road at night unless:\n(a) if the driver's vehicle is 2.2 metres wide, or wider – the\nclearance and side marker lights fitted to the vehicle are\noperating effectively and are clearly visible; or\n(b) in any other case – the parking lights fitted to the driver's\nvehicle are operating effectively and are clearly visible.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and night are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver stops on a length of\nroad, or in an area, with street lighting and the driver's vehicle is\nvisible for at least 200 metres in all directions from the vehicle.\nNote\n(3) In subrule (1), a reference to a kind of light fitted to a vehicle is a\nreference to a light of that kind required to be fitted to the vehicle\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 222\n","sortOrder":222},{"sectionNumber":"221","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using hazard warning lights","content":"221 Using hazard warning lights\n(1) The driver of a vehicle fitted with hazard warning lights must not\nuse the hazard warning lights, or allow them to be used, unless:\n(a) the vehicle is stopped and is obstructing, or is likely to\nobstruct, the path of other vehicles or pedestrians; or\n(b) the vehicle is a slow-moving vehicle and is obstructing, or is\nlikely to obstruct, the path of other vehicles or pedestrians; or\n(c) the vehicle is stopped in an emergency stopping lane; or\n(d) the driver stops the vehicle to sell a product (for example, ice\ncreams) that may attract children onto the road; or\n(e) the driver is driving in hazardous weather conditions (for\nexample, fog or smoke); or\n(f) the vehicle is a bus carrying children, and the driver stops the\nvehicle to drop off or pick up a child and is required or\npermitted to operate the hazard warning lights under another\nlaw of this jurisdiction; or\n(g) the hazard warning lights are operating as part of an anti-theft\ndevice, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the vehicle.\n1 Bus and hazard warning lights are defined in the dictionary, and\nemergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.\n3 A vehicle does not obstruct another vehicle only because the vehicle is\nstopped in traffic or is travelling more slowly than other vehicles – see the\ndefinition of obstruction in the dictionary.\nalcohol interlock device means a device in a vehicle that is\ndesigned to prevent the vehicle from being started or driven unless\nthe device is supplied with a breath sample that contains either no\nalcohol, or less than a certain concentration of alcohol.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 83(1) of the Traffic\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 223\n","sortOrder":223},{"sectionNumber":"222","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using warning lights on buses carrying children","content":"222 Using warning lights on buses carrying children\n(1) This rule applies to the driver of a bus carrying children if the bus is\nrequired to be fitted with warning lights under another law of this\nNote\n(2) The driver must not stop the bus to drop off or pick up a child\nunless the warning lights are operating as required under the law of\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 83(2) of the Traffic\nDivision 2 Lights on animal-drawn vehicles\n","sortOrder":224},{"sectionNumber":"223","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights when riding an animal-drawn vehicle at night or in","content":"223 Using lights when riding an animal-drawn vehicle at night or in\nhazardous weather conditions\nA person must not ride an animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in\nhazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the\nvehicle is fitted with, and displays:\n(a) a white light fitted at or towards the front of each side of the\nvehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the\nfront of the vehicle; and\n(b) a red light fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the\nvehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the\nrear of the vehicle; and\n(c) a red reflector fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the\nvehicle that is:\n(i) not over 1.5 metres above ground level; and\n(ii) clearly visible for at least 50 metres from the rear of the\nvehicle when light is projected onto it by another\nvehicle's headlight on low-beam.\nNote\nLow-beam and night are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 224\nDivision 3 Horns and radar detectors\n","sortOrder":225},{"sectionNumber":"224","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using horns and similar warning devices","content":"224 Using horns and similar warning devices\nA driver must not use, or allow to be used, a horn, or similar\nwarning device, fitted to or in the driver's vehicle unless:\n(a) it is necessary to use the horn, or warning device, to warn\nother road users or animals of the approach or position of the\n(b) the horn, or warning device, is being used as part of an anti-\ntheft device, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the\n1 Driver's vehicle is defined in the dictionary, road user is defined in rule 14\nand alcohol interlock device is defined in rule 221.\n","sortOrder":226},{"sectionNumber":"225","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using radar detectors and similar devices","content":"225 Using radar detectors and similar devices\n(1) A person must not drive a vehicle if the vehicle, or trailer being\ntowed by the vehicle, has in or on it a device for preventing the\neffective use of a speed measuring device, or a device for detecting\nthe use of a speed measuring device, unless the person is exempt\nfrom this rule under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nDrive includes be in control of – see the definition in the dictionary.\n(2) A person who is travelling in or on a vehicle or trailer must not have\nin his or her possession a device for preventing the effective use of\na speed measuring device, or a device for detecting the use of a\nspeed measuring device, unless the person is exempt from this rule\n(3) Subrules (1) and (2) apply whether or not the device is operating or\nin working order.\nNote\nUnder the law of this jurisdiction, radar detectors and similar devices may be\nsubject to confiscation.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 225\nDivision 4 Portable warning triangles for heavy vehicles\n","sortOrder":227},{"sectionNumber":"226","sectionType":"section","heading":"Heavy vehicles to be equipped with portable warning triangles","content":"226 Heavy vehicles to be equipped with portable warning triangles\n(1) A person must not drive a vehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes\nunless the vehicle is equipped with at least 3 portable warning\ntriangles.\nNote\nGVM and portable warning triangle is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The person must produce the portable warning triangles for\ninspection if the person is directed to do so by a police officer or an\nauthorised person.\nNote\n1 Authorised person and police officer are defined in the dictionary.\n2 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 84 of the Traffic\n227 Using portable warning triangles\n(1) This rule applies to a driver if the GVM of the driver's vehicle is over\n12 tonnes.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle and GVM is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being\ncarried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed\nlimit is 80 kilometres per hour or more and the vehicle is not visible\nat any time for at least 300 metres in all directions from that place,\nthe driver must use at least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in\naccordance with subrule (4), to warn other road users of the vehicle\nor load.\n1 Portable warning triangle is defined in the dictionary, road is defined in\nsubrule (7) and road user is defined in rule 14.\n2 See rule 220 for the requirement to operate certain lights on vehicles that are\nstopped.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 226\n(3) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being\ncarried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed\nlimit is less than 80 kilometres per hour and the vehicle is not visible\nat any time for at least 200 metres in all directions from that place,\nthe driver must use at least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in\naccordance with subrule (5), to warn other road users of the vehicle\nor load.\nNote\nSee rule 220 for the requirement to operate certain lights on vehicles that are\nstopped.\n(4) For the purposes of subrule (2), the driver must:\n(a) place 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres,\nbehind the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a)\nand the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres,\nin front of the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a\nposition that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the\nposition of the vehicle or fallen load.\nNote\nOne-way road is defined in the dictionary and divided road is defined in\nsubrule (7).\n(5) For the purposes of subrule (3), the driver must:\n(a) place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over 150 metres,\nbehind the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road –\nplace 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a)\nand the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided\nroad – place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over\n150 metres, in front of the vehicle or fallen load; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 227\n(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a\nposition that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the\nposition of the vehicle or fallen load.\n(6) A reference to \"the vehicle or fallen load\" in subrules (4) and (5) is\nto be read as a reference to \"the vehicle or fallen load, as the case\nmay be\".\ndivided road means any length of a two-way road that has a\nmedian strip that is a structure.\n1 Two-way road and median strip are defined in the dictionary, road-related\narea is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\n2 Although the presence of a median strip is necessary to establish that a road\nis a divided road, for the purposes of this rule the median strip is not part of\nthe road (as it is a road-related area).\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 84 of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":228},{"sectionNumber":"Part 14","sectionType":"part","heading":"Rules for pedestrians","content":"Part 14 Rules for pedestrians\n1 For the Australian Road Rules, a pedestrian includes:\n• a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at over\n10 kilometres per hour (on level ground)\n• a person in a non-motorised wheelchair\n• a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair\n• a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy (see rule 18).\n2 Wheelchair, wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 228\n","sortOrder":229},{"sectionNumber":"228","sectionType":"section","heading":"No pedestrians signs","content":"228 No pedestrians signs\nA pedestrian must not travel past a no pedestrians sign.\nNo pedestrians sign\n","sortOrder":230},{"sectionNumber":"229","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrians on a road with a road access sign","content":"229 Pedestrians on a road with a road access sign\nA pedestrian must not be on a length of road to which a road\naccess sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that\npedestrians are not permitted beyond the sign.\n1 Length of road and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 For the way in which a road access sign applies, see rule 97. The sign is\nusually used on a freeway.\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of the road access sign – see\n2 The sign may indicate that it applies to different or additional vehicles or\npersons – see rule 316(4).\n230 Crossing a road – general\n(1) A pedestrian crossing a road:\n(a) must cross by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) must not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the\nroad safely.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 229\n(2) However, if the pedestrian is crossing the road at an intersection\nwith traffic lights and a pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, the\npedestrian may cross the road diagonally at the intersection.\nNote\nNote\n","sortOrder":231},{"sectionNumber":"231","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing a road at pedestrian lights","content":"231 Crossing a road at pedestrian lights\n(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on\na road, with pedestrian lights and traffic lights must comply with this\nNote\nIntersection, pedestrian lights and traffic lights are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the pedestrian lights show a red pedestrian light and the\npedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road,\nthe pedestrian must not start to cross until the pedestrian lights\n1 Green pedestrian light and red pedestrian light are defined in the\n2 A traffic control device (including pedestrian lights) generally only applies to a\nperson if the device faces the person – see Part 20, Division 3, especially\nrule 340.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 230\n(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the pedestrian lights\nchange to flashing red or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the\nroad for longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the\ndirection of travel of the pedestrian) of the following:\nthe area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at\nthe intersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the nearest side of the road.\nNote\n(4) If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the\npedestrian must remain in the safety area until the pedestrian lights\n(5) However, if the pedestrian cannot operate the pedestrian lights\nfrom the safety area, the pedestrian may cross to the far side of the\nroad when:\n(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is\nno red traffic light showing; and\n(b) it is safe to do so.\nNote\nRed traffic light is defined in the dictionary.\nNote\nRed pedestrian light showing\nred pedestrian symbol\nGreen pedestrian light showing\ngreen pedestrian symbol\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 231\n","sortOrder":232},{"sectionNumber":"232","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing a road at traffic lights","content":"232 Crossing a road at traffic lights\n(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on\na road, with traffic lights, but without pedestrian lights, must comply\nNote\nIntersection, pedestrian lights and traffic lights are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light and the\npedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road,\nthe pedestrian must not start to cross until the traffic lights change\nto green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.\nNote\nGreen traffic light, red traffic light and yellow traffic light are defined in the\n(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the traffic lights change\nto yellow or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longer\nthan necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of\ntravel of the pedestrian) of the following:\nthe area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at\nthe intersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the far side of the road.\nNote\n(3A) Despite subrule (3), in the circumstances set out in that subrule the\npedestrian may instead return to the side of the road, or to the\nsafety area, that the pedestrian just left, but only if:\n(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer\nto the pedestrian than the side or safety area (whichever is the\ncloser) that the pedestrian was heading for at that time; and\n(b) the pedestrian does not stay on the road for longer than is\nnecessary to return to that side or safety area.\n(4) If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the\npedestrian must remain in the safety area until the traffic lights\nchange to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light\nshowing.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 232\nNote\n","sortOrder":233},{"sectionNumber":"233","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing a road to or from a tram","content":"233 Crossing a road to or from a tram\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road to get on a tram at a tram stop\nuntil the tram has stopped at the tram stop.\nNote\nTram is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A pedestrian crossing a road after getting off a tram:\n(a) must cross to the nearest footpath by the shortest safe route\nor, if there is no footpath, cross the road by the shortest safe\nroute; and\n(b) must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross\nthe road safely.\nNote\n(3) This rule does not apply to a pedestrian:\n(a) on a safety zone; or\n(b) crossing a road to or from a safety zone.\nNote\nSafety zone is defined in rule 162.\n(4) Subrule (2) does not apply to:\n(a) a pedestrian in a shared zone; or\n(b) an employee of a public transport operator who is in uniform\nand engaged in carrying out his or her duties.\nNote\nShared zone is defined in rule 24.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 233\n1 Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the dictionary, road-\nrelated area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\n2 For the duties of drivers where there are pedestrians getting on or off trams\nor buses, or in safety zones, see rules 162 to 164A.\n234 Crossing a road on or near a crossing for pedestrians\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road, or part of a road, within\n20 metres of a crossing on the road, except at the crossing or\nanother crossing, unless the pedestrian is:\n(a) crossing, or helping another pedestrian to cross, an area of\nthe road between tram tracks and the far left side of the road\nto get on, or after getting off, a tram or public bus; or\n(b) crossing to or from a safety zone; or\n(c) crossing at an intersection with traffic lights and a pedestrians\nmay cross diagonally sign; or\n(d) crossing in a shared zone; or\n(e) crossing a road, or a part of a road, from which vehicles are\nexcluded, either permanently or temporarily.\nNote\nIntersection, public bus, traffic lights, tram and tram tracks are defined in the\ndictionary, safety zone is defined in rule 162, and shared zone is defined in\nrule 24.\n(2) A pedestrian must not stay on a crossing on a road for longer than\nnecessary to cross the road safely.\n(3) Subrule (2) does not apply to a person who is helping pedestrians\ncross a road at a crossing if the person is permitted to do so under\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 234\ncrossing means a children's crossing, marked foot crossing or\npedestrian crossing.\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in rule 80, marked foot crossing is defined in\nthe dictionary, and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.\n","sortOrder":234},{"sectionNumber":"235","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing a level crossing","content":"235 Crossing a level crossing\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level\ncrossing unless:\n(a) there is a pedestrian facility at the crossing and the pedestrian\nuses the facility; or\n(b) there is no pedestrian facility at, or within 20 metres of, the\n1 Level crossing is defined in rule 120.\n2 If the pedestrian facility is a footpath or shared path at which there is a red\npedestrian light, rule 235A imposes further obligations on pedestrians using\nthe facility.\n(2) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level\ncrossing if:\n(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red\nlights) are flashing or warning bells are ringing; or\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening\nor closing; or\n(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 235\n(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the\ncrossing or is sounding a warning, and there would be a\ndanger of the pedestrian being struck by the train or tram if the\npedestrian entered the crossing; or\n(e) the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.\nExample for paragraph (2)(e)\na pedestrian, or by stock on the road.\nNote\nEnter and twin red lights are defined in the dictionary.\n(2A) If any of the following events occurs after a pedestrian has started\nto cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing, he or she\nmust finish crossing the line or tracks without delay:\n(a) warning lights start flashing, or warning bells start ringing;\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier starts to close;\n(c) a train or tram approaches the crossing.\npedestrian facility means a footpath, bridge or other structure\ndesigned for the use of pedestrians.\nNote\n","sortOrder":235},{"sectionNumber":"235A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing a pedestrian level crossing that has a red pedestrian","content":"235A Crossing a pedestrian level crossing that has a red pedestrian\nlight\n(1) A pedestrian level crossing is an area where a footpath or shared\npath crosses a railway line or tram tracks at substantially the same\nlevel.\nNote\nFootpath, shared path and tram tracks are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 236\n(2) If a pedestrian approaches a pedestrian level crossing that has a\nred pedestrian light, he or she must not start to cross the crossing\nwhile the light is red.\nNote\nRed pedestrian light is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) If a red pedestrian light at a pedestrian level crossing appears after\na pedestrian has started to cross the crossing, he or she must finish\ncrossing the crossing without delay.\nNote\nRed pedestrian light is defined in the dictionary.\nRed pedestrian light showing\nred pedestrian symbol\n","sortOrder":236},{"sectionNumber":"236","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard or obstruction","content":"236 Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard or obstruction\n(1) A pedestrian must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into the\npath of a driver.\n(2) A pedestrian must not unreasonably obstruct the path of any driver\nor another pedestrian.\n(3) For subrule (2), a pedestrian does not unreasonably obstruct the\npath of another pedestrian only by travelling more slowly than other\n(4) A pedestrian must not stand on, or move onto, a road to:\n(a) solicit contributions, employment or business from an\noccupant of a vehicle; or\n(b) hitchhike; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 237\n(c) display an advertisement; or\n(d) sell or offer articles for sale; or\n(e) wash or clean, or offer to wash or clean, the windscreen of a\n(5) A driver, or a passenger, in or on a vehicle must not buy, or offer to\nbuy, an article or service from a person standing on a road.\n(6) Subrules (4) and (5) do not apply to the carrying on of an activity\npermitted by another law of this jurisdiction.\nroad includes any shoulder of the road, and any median strip,\npainted island or traffic island, but does not include any other road-\nrelated area.\nNote\nMedian strip, painted island and traffic island are defined in the dictionary,\nshoulder is defined in rule 12, and road-related area is defined in rule 13.\n","sortOrder":237},{"sectionNumber":"237","sectionType":"section","heading":"Getting on or into a moving vehicle","content":"237 Getting on or into a moving vehicle\n(1) A person must not get on, or into, a moving vehicle unless:\n(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or\ncollection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage,\nand is required to get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the\nvehicle, at frequent intervals; and\n(b) the vehicle is not travelling at a speed over 5 kilometres per\nhour.\n(2) This rule does not apply to a person who is getting on or off a\nbicycle or animal.\n2 Rule 269(1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving vehicle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 238\n","sortOrder":238},{"sectionNumber":"238","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrians travelling along a road (except in or on a wheeled","content":"238 Pedestrians travelling along a road (except in or on a wheeled\nrecreational device or toy)\n(1) A pedestrian must not travel along a road if there is a footpath or\nnature strip adjacent to the road, unless it is impracticable to travel\non the footpath or nature strip.\nNote\nFootpath and nature strip are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A pedestrian travelling along a road:\n(a) must keep as far to the left or right side of the road as is\npracticable; and\n(ab) must, when moving forward, face approaching traffic that is\nmoving in the direction opposite to which the pedestrian is\ntravelling, unless it is impracticable to do so; and\n(b) must not travel on the road alongside more than one other\npedestrian or vehicle travelling on the road in the same\ndirection as the pedestrian, unless the pedestrian is overtaking\nother pedestrians.\n(2A) This rule does not apply to a pedestrian in a shared zone.\nNote\nShared zone is defined in the dictionary.\npedestrian does not include a person travelling in or on a wheeled\nrecreational device or wheeled toy.\n1 Road-related area is defined in rule 13, shoulder is defined in rule 12, and\nwheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Persons travelling on roads in or on wheeled recreational devices or wheeled\ntoys are dealt with in rule 241.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 84A of the Traffic\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 239\n","sortOrder":239},{"sectionNumber":"239","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separated footpath","content":"239 Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separated footpath\n(1) A pedestrian must not be on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated\nfootpath designated for the use of bicycles, unless the pedestrian:\n(a) is crossing the bicycle path or separated footpath by the\nshortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the bicycle path or separated footpath for\nlonger than necessary to cross the bicycle path or separated\nfootpath safely.\n1 Bicycle is defined in the dictionary, and bicycle path and separated\nfootpath are defined in subrule (4).\n2 Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are designated for\nbicycle riders and pedestrians.\n(2) However, a pedestrian may be on a bicycle path, or a part of a\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, if:\n(a) the pedestrian is:\n(i) in or pushing a wheelchair; or\n(ii) on rollerblades, rollerskates or a similar wheeled\nrecreational device; and\n(b) there is no traffic control device, or information on or with a\ntraffic control device, applying to the bicycle path or separated\nfootpath that indicates that the pedestrian is not permitted to\nbe on the bicycle path or the part of the separated footpath\ndesignated for the use of bicycles.\n1 Traffic control device, wheelchair, wheeled recreational device and with are\n2 Rule 243(2) provides that a person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or\na similar wheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the\npath of any bicycle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 240\n(3) A pedestrian who is crossing a bicycle path, or a part of a\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep\nout of the path of any bicycle, or any pedestrian who is permitted\nunder subrule (2) to be on the bicycle path, or the part of the\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles.\n(4) In the Australian Road Rules:\nbicycle path means a length of path beginning at a bicycle path\nsign or bicycle path road marking, and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) an end bicycle path sign or end bicycle path road marking;\n(b) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking;\n(c) a road (except a road-related area);\n(d) the end of the path.\nNote\nbicycle path road marking means a road marking on a path,\nconsisting of a bicycle symbol, the words ‘bicycles only', or both the\nbicycle symbol and the word ‘only'.\nNote\nBicycle symbol is defined in the dictionary.\nend bicycle path road marking means a bicycle path road\nmarking with the word ‘end'.\nend separated footpath road marking means a separated\nfootpath road marking with the word ‘end'.\nseparated footpath means a length of footpath beginning at a\nseparated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking, and\nending at the nearest of the following:\n(a) an end separated footpath sign or end separated footpath\nroad marking;\n(b) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n(c) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking;\n(d) a road (except a road-related area);\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 241\n(e) the end of the footpath.\nNote\nFootpath and no bicycles road marking are defined in the dictionary.\nseparated footpath road marking means a road marking on a\nfootpath consisting of a pedestrian symbol and a bicycle symbol\nside by side, with or without the word \"only\".\nNote\nPedestrian symbol is defined in the dictionary.\nBicycle path sign End bicycle path sign\nSeparated footpath sign End separated footpath sign\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of the bicycle path sign and\nthe end bicycle path sign, and another permitted version of each of the other\nsigns – see the diagrams in Schedule 3.\n2 A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol and the bicycle\nsymbol reversed – see rule 316(4).\nDivision 2 Rules for persons travelling in or on wheeled\nrecreational devices and wheeled toys\n1 For the Australian Road Rules, a person in or on a wheeled recreational\ndevice or wheeled toy is a pedestrian, not a rider – see rule 18(d). This\nDivision contains rules that apply only to persons travelling in or on wheeled\nrecreational devices and wheeled toys.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 242\n2 Wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the dictionary.\n3 Rules that apply to users of wheeled recreational devices also apply to users\nof motorised scooters – see the definitions of wheeled recreational device\nand motorised scooter in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":240},{"sectionNumber":"240A","sectionType":"section","heading":"No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign","content":"240A No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign\nA person on a road who is travelling in or on a wheeled recreational\ndevice or wheeled toy must not travel past a no wheeled\nrecreational devices or toys sign.\n","sortOrder":241},{"sectionNumber":"240","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wheeled recreational devices and toys not to be used on","content":"240 Wheeled recreational devices and toys not to be used on\ncertain roads\n(1) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy on:\n(a) a road with a dividing line or median strip; or\n(b) a road on which the speed-limit is greater than 50 kilometres\nper hour; or\n(c) a one-way road with more than one marked lane.\n(2) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device:\n(a) on a road that is declared, under another law of this\njurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled recreational\ndevices are prohibited; or\n(b) on a road at night; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 243\n(c) on a road at any other time if another law of this jurisdiction\nprohibits wheeled recreational devices from being on all roads,\nor that road, at that time.\nNote\nNight is defined in the dictionary\n(3) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled toy:\n(a) on a road that is declared, under another law of this\njurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled toys are prohibited;\nor\n(b) on a road at a particular time if another law of this jurisdiction\nprohibits wheeled toys on all roads, or that road, at that time.\n(3A) Subrules (1) and (2) do not apply to a person who is crossing a\nroad in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy, if the\nperson:\n(a) crosses the road by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the\nroad safely; and\n(c) is not prohibited, under another law of this jurisdiction, from\ncrossing the road in or on the wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy.\n(4) In subrules (1) and (2)(b), road does not include road-related area\nbut includes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":242},{"sectionNumber":"241","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a","content":"241 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a\nroad\n(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy on a road:\n(a) must keep as far to the left side of the road as is practicable;\nand\n(b) must not travel alongside more than one other pedestrian or\nvehicle travelling on the road in the same direction as the\nperson, unless the person is overtaking other pedestrians.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 244\nroad does not include a road-related area, but, in subrule (1)(b),\nincludes any shoulder of the road.\nNote\n","sortOrder":243},{"sectionNumber":"242","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a","content":"242 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a\nfootpath or shared path\n(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy on a footpath or shared path must:\n(a) keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is\nimpracticable to do so; and\n(b) give way to any pedestrian (except a person travelling in or on\na wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy) who is on the\nfootpath or shared path.\n1 Footpath is defined in the dictionary.\n2 For this rule, give way means the person must slow down and, if necessary,\n3 Bicycle riders on footpaths and shared paths must give way to persons\ntravelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or toys, as well as other\npedestrians – see rule 250 (2).\n4 Another law of this jurisdiction may prescribe give way rules for persons\ntravelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or toys.\n(2) A shared path is an area open to the public (except a separated\nfootpath) that is designated for, or has as one of its main uses, use\nby both the riders of bicycles and pedestrians, and includes a\nlength of path for use by both bicycles and pedestrians beginning at\na shared path sign or shared path road marking and ending at the\nnearest of the following:\n(a) an end shared path sign or end shared path road marking;\n(b) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking;\n(c) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n(d) a road (except a road-related area);\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 245\n(e) the end of the path.\nNote\nBicycle and no bicycles road marking are defined in the dictionary, road-\nrelated area is defined in rule 13, and bicycle path road marking and\nseparated footpath is defined in rule 239.\nShared path sign End shared path sign\nNo bicycles sign Bicycle path sign\nThere are a number of other permitted versions of the bicycle path sign, and\nanother permitted version of each of the other signs – see the diagrams in\nend shared path road marking means a shared path road\nmarking with the word ‘end'.\nshared path road marking means a road marking consisting of a\npedestrian symbol above a bicycle symbol.\n","sortOrder":244},{"sectionNumber":"243","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling on rollerblades etc. on a bicycle path or separated","content":"243 Travelling on rollerblades etc. on a bicycle path or separated\nfootpath\n(1) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar\nwheeled recreational device, must not be on a part of a separated\nfootpath designated for the use of pedestrians unless the person:\n(a) is crossing the separated footpath by the shortest safe route;\nand\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 246\n(b) does not stay on the separated footpath for longer than\nnecessary to cross the separated footpath safely.\nNote\nSeparated footpath is defined in rule 239.\n(2) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar\nwheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep\nout of the path of any bicycle.\nNote\nBicycle is defined in the dictionary, and bicycle path is defined in rule 239.\n","sortOrder":245},{"sectionNumber":"244","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys being towed etc.","content":"244 Wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys being towed etc.\n(1) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy that is being towed by a vehicle.\n(2) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy must not hold onto a vehicle while the vehicle is\nmoving.\n(3) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy must not travel within 2 metres of the rear of a moving\nmotor vehicle continuously for more than 200 metres\nNote\n","sortOrder":246},{"sectionNumber":"244A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meanings of scooter and motorised scooter","content":"244A Meanings of scooter and motorised scooter\n(1) In these Rules:\nscooter means a device that:\n(a) has 2 or more wheels and a footboard supported by the\nwheels; and\n(b) is steered by handlebars; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 247\n(c) is designed to be used by a single person; and\n(d) is propelled by any one or more of the following:\n(i) gravity;\n(ii) the user pushing one foot against the ground;\n(iii) an electric motor or motors; and\n(e) if it is fitted with an electric motor or motors, complies with the\nfollowing requirements:\n(i) its maker certifies (either by means of a plate attached to\nthe motor or each motor, or by means of engraving on\nthe motor or each motor) the ungoverned power output\nof the motor, or each motor;\n(ii) the maximum power output of the motor, or the\ncombined maximum power output of the motors, is not\nmore than 200 watts;\n(iii) when propelled only by the motor or motors, the scooter\nis not capable of going faster than 10 kilometres per\nhour on level ground.\nmotorised scooter means a scooter that is propelled by one or\nmore electric motors and complies with the requirements in\nparagraph (e) of the definition of scooter.\n(2) A reference in paragraph (d) or (e) of the definition of scooter, or in\nthe definition of motorised scooter, in subrule (1), to a motor\nincludes both a motor that is part of the relevant device and a motor\nthat is attached to the device.\n(3) In these Rules, a reference to a scooter includes a motorised\nscooter unless the contrary intention appears.\n","sortOrder":247},{"sectionNumber":"244B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing of helmets by users of motorised scooters","content":"244B Wearing of helmets by users of motorised scooters\nA person who is travelling on a motorised scooter on a road or\nroad-related area must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely\nfitted and fastened on his or her head, unless he or she is exempt\nfrom wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nApproved bicycle helmet and motorised scooter are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 248\n","sortOrder":248},{"sectionNumber":"244C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Motorised scooters not to be used","content":"244C Motorised scooters not to be used\nIf another law of this jurisdiction prohibits the use of motorised\nscooters on a road or road-related area, a person must not travel\non a motorised scooter on a road or road-related area.\n","sortOrder":249},{"sectionNumber":"Part 15","sectionType":"part","heading":"Additional rules for bicycle riders","content":"Part 15 Additional rules for bicycle riders\n1 This Part contains rules that apply only to bicycle riders. Most rules in the\nAustralian Road Rules apply to bicycle riders in the same way as they apply\nto drivers – see rule 19. There are some other rules that are for bicycle riders\nonly, or that have exceptions for bicycle riders. These include:\n• optional hook turn by bicycle riders – rule 35\n• bicycle riders making a hook turn contrary to a no hook turn by bicycles sign –\nrule 36\n• bicycle riders excepted from giving stop signals – rule 52\n• exception for bicycle riders riding in emergency stopping lanes – rule 95\n• bicycle riders entering and leaving roundabouts – rules 111 and 119\n• bicycle riders overtaking on the left – rule 141\n• riding alongside other riders – rule 151\n• bicycle lanes – rule 153\n• parking at a bicycle rail or in a bicycle rack – rule 166\n• stopping on footpaths – rule 197\n• stopping on a road with a bicycle parking sign – rule 201.\n2 Bicycle is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":250},{"sectionNumber":"245","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding a bicycle","content":"245 Riding a bicycle\nThe rider of a bicycle must:\n(a) be astride the rider's seat facing forwards (except if the bicycle\nis not built to be ridden astride); and\n(b) ride with at least one hand on the handlebars; and\n(c) if the bicycle is equipped with a seat – not ride the bicycle\nseated in any other position on the bicycle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 249\n","sortOrder":251},{"sectionNumber":"246","sectionType":"section","heading":"Carrying people on a bicycle","content":"246 Carrying people on a bicycle\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not carry more persons on the bicycle\nthan the bicycle is designed to carry.\nA single-seat bicycle with a child's seat attached is designed to carry 2 people,\n1 on the bicycle seat and 1 on the attached child's seat.\n(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must sit in the seat designed for the passenger.\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger unless the\npassenger complies with subrule (2).\n","sortOrder":252},{"sectionNumber":"247","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding in a bicycle lane on a road","content":"247 Riding in a bicycle lane on a road\n(1) The rider of a bicycle riding on a length of road with a bicycle lane\ndesigned for bicycles travelling in the same direction as the rider\nmust ride in the bicycle lane unless it is impracticable to do so.\nNote\nRule 153 defines a bicycle lane and deals with the use of bicycle lanes by other\nNote\nRoad-related area includes the shoulder of a road – see rule 13.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 250\n","sortOrder":253},{"sectionNumber":"247A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering a bicycle storage area","content":"247A Entering a bicycle storage area\n(1) A rider of a bicycle approaching a bicycle storage area at an\nintersection that has traffic lights or traffic arrows showing a red\ntraffic light or red arrow must not enter the bicycle storage area\nother than from a bicycle lane, unless the rider is not required to\nride in the bicycle lane under the Australian Road Rules.\nNote\n(2) Subrule (1) does not apply if:\n(a) the bicycle storage area cannot, under another law of this\njurisdiction, be entered from a bicycle lane; and\n(b) the rider enters the area in accordance with another law of this\n","sortOrder":254},{"sectionNumber":"247B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way while entering or in a bicycle storage area","content":"247B Giving way while entering or in a bicycle storage area\n(1) A rider of a bicycle must when entering a bicycle storage area, give\nway to:\n(a) any vehicle that is in the area; and\n(b) if the area is before any green or yellow traffic lights, any\nmotor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area,\nunless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject\nto a red traffic arrow; and\n(c) if the area forms part of a lane to which traffic arrows apply,\nany motor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area at\na time when those arrows are green or yellow.\nNote\n(2) A rider of a bicycle that is in a bicycle storage area that extends\nacross more than one lane of a multi-lane road must, if the area is\nbefore any green or yellow traffic lights, give way to a motor vehicle\nthat is in any lane other than the lane that the bicycle is directly in\nfront of, unless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is\nsubject to a red traffic arrow.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 251\n","sortOrder":255},{"sectionNumber":"248","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding across a crossing","content":"248 Riding across a crossing\n(1) A rider of a bicycle riding across a road, or part of a road, on a\nchildren's crossing, marked foot crossing or pedestrian crossing\nmust:\n(a) keep to the left of the crossing unless it is impracticable to do\nso; and\n(b) give way to any pedestrians on the crossing.\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in rule 80, marked foot crossing is defined in\nthe dictionary and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.\n(2) This rule does not apply if another law of this jurisdiction prohibits a\nrider of a bicycle from riding on a children's crossing, marked foot\ncrossing or pedestrian crossing.\n","sortOrder":256},{"sectionNumber":"249","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding on a separated footpath","content":"249 Riding on a separated footpath\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride on a part of a separated\nfootpath designated for the use of pedestrians.\n1 Separated footpath is defined in rule 239, and pedestrian is defined in\nrule 18.\n2 Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are designated for\nbicycle riders and pedestrians.\n250 Riding on a footpath or shared path\n(1) The rider of a bicycle who is 12 years old or older must not ride on\na footpath if another law of this jurisdiction prohibits the rider from\nriding on the footpath.\nExample of another law of this jurisdiction\nAnother law of this jurisdiction may provide that a commercial courier must not\nride a bicycle on any footpath or any footpath in a particular area, or that an adult\nmust not ride a bicycle on a footpath unless the adult is accompanying a child\nunder 12 years who is also riding on the footpath.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 252\n(1A) The rider does not have to comply with subrule (1) if:\n(a) the rider is carrying a medical certificate that states a medical\npractitioner believes the rider should be allowed to ride on the\nfootpath because of a medical condition that the rider has; and\n(b) the rider is complying with any conditions stated in the medical\ncertificate; and\nNote\n(1B) Also, the rider does not have to comply with subrule (1) if:\n(a) the rider is with another rider who is riding on a footpath; and\n(b) the other rider is:\n(i) carrying a medical certificate that states a medical\npractitioner believes the rider should be allowed to ride\non the footpath because of a medical condition that the\nrider has; or\n(ii) a child under 12 years of age.\n(1C) However, the rider is exempt under subrule (1A) or (1B) only if the\nrider who is carrying the medical certificate immediately produces\nthe medical certificate when an authorised person or police officer\nasks to see the certificate.\nNote\nAuthorised person, medical certificate, medical practitioner and police\nofficer are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) The rider of a bicycle riding on a footpath or shared path must:\n(a) keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is\nimpracticable to do so; and\n(b) give way to any pedestrian on the footpath or shared path.\n1 Pedestrian is defined in rule 18, and shared path is defined in rule 242.\n2 For subrule (2), give way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary,\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 253\nfootpath does not include a separated footpath.\nNote\nSeparated footpath is defined in rule 239.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 85 of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":257},{"sectionNumber":"251","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding to the left of oncoming bicycle riders on a path","content":"251 Riding to the left of oncoming bicycle riders on a path\nThe rider of a bicycle riding on a bicycle path, footpath, separated\nfootpath or shared path must keep to the left of any oncoming\nbicycle rider on the path.\nNote\nBicycle path and separated footpath are defined in rule 239, footpath is\ndefined in the dictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.\n","sortOrder":258},{"sectionNumber":"252","sectionType":"section","heading":"No bicycles signs and markings","content":"252 No bicycles signs and markings\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a length of road or footpath\nto which a no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies.\nNote\nFootpath, length of road and no bicycles road marking are defined in the\n(2) A no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies to a\nlength of road or footpath beginning at the sign or marking and\nending at the nearest of the following:\n(a) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n(b) a bicycle lane sign;\n(c) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking;\n(d) a shared path sign;\n(e) an end no bicycles sign;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 254\n(f) the next intersection.\nNote\nIntersection is defined in the dictionary, and bicycle path road marking and\nseparated footpath road marking are defined in rule 239.\nNo bicycles sign Bicycle path sign\nBicycle lane sign Separated footpath sign\nShared path sign End no bicycles sign\n1 There are a number of other permitted versions of the bicycle path sign and\nbicycle lane sign, and another permitted version of the no bicycles sign,\nseparated footpath sign and shared path sign – see the diagrams in\n2 A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol and the bicycle\nsymbol reversed – see rule 316(4).\n","sortOrder":259},{"sectionNumber":"253","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle riders not to cause a traffic hazard","content":"253 Bicycle riders not to cause a traffic hazard\nThe rider of a bicycle must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into\nthe path of a driver or pedestrian.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 255\n","sortOrder":260},{"sectionNumber":"254","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycles being towed etc.","content":"254 Bicycles being towed etc.\n(1) A person must not ride on a bicycle that is being towed by another\nNote\n(2) The rider of a bicycle must not hold onto another vehicle while the\nvehicle is moving.\n","sortOrder":261},{"sectionNumber":"255","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding too close to the rear of a motor vehicle","content":"255 Riding too close to the rear of a motor vehicle\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride within 2 metres of the rear of a\nmoving motor vehicle continuously for more than 200 metres.\nNote\n","sortOrder":262},{"sectionNumber":"256","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle helmets","content":"256 Bicycle helmets\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must wear an approved bicycle helmet\nsecurely fitted and fastened on the rider's head, unless the rider is\nexempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this\nNote\nApproved bicycle helmet is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and\nfastened on the passenger's head, unless the passenger is:\n(a) a paying passenger on a three or four-wheeled bicycle; or\n(b) exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 256\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger on the bicycle\nunless the passenger complies with subrule (2).\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 86 of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":263},{"sectionNumber":"257","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer","content":"257 Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not tow a bicycle trailer with a person in\nor on the bicycle trailer, unless:\n(a) the rider is 16 years old, or older; and\n(b) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is under 10 years old, or\nas otherwise provided under another law of this jurisdiction;\nand\n(c) the bicycle trailer can safely carry the person; and\n(d) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is wearing an approved\nbicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the person's\nhead, unless the person is exempt from wearing a bicycle\nhelmet under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nApproved bicycle helmet is defined in the dictionary.\nbicycle trailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed, or is\ntowed, by a bicycle.\nNote\n","sortOrder":264},{"sectionNumber":"258","sectionType":"section","heading":"Equipment on a bicycle","content":"258 Equipment on a bicycle\nA person must not ride a bicycle that does not have:\n(a) at least one effective brake; and\n(b) a bell, horn, or similar warning device, in working order.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 257\n","sortOrder":265},{"sectionNumber":"259","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding at night","content":"259 Riding at night\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride at night, or in hazardous\nweather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the bicycle, or\nthe rider, displays:\n(a) a flashing or steady white light that is clearly visible for at least\n200 metres from the front of the bicycle; and\n(b) a flashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for at least\n200 metres from the rear of the bicycle; and\n(c) a red reflector that is clearly visible for at least 50 metres from\nthe rear of the bicycle when light is projected onto it by a\nvehicle's headlight on low-beam.\nNote\nLow-beam and night are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":266},{"sectionNumber":"260","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a red bicycle crossing light","content":"260 Stopping for a red bicycle crossing light\n(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching or at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road or road-related area, with bicycle crossing lights\nmust comply with this rule.\nNote\nBicycle crossing lights is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the bicycle crossing lights show a red bicycle crossing light and\nthe rider has not already started crossing the intersection or place,\nthe rider must not start to cross until:\n(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green; or\n(b) there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light showing.\n1 Red bicycle crossing light includes a flashing red bicycle crossing light –\nsee the definition in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 258\n2 Green bicycle crossing light and yellow bicycle crossing light are\nRed bicycle\ncrossing light\nGreen bicycle\ncrossing light\nroad includes any shoulder of the road.\nNote\n","sortOrder":267},{"sectionNumber":"261","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossing light","content":"261 Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossing light\n(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching or at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road or road-related area, with bicycle crossing lights\nmust comply with this rule.\nNote\nBicycle, bicycle crossing lights and intersection are defined in the dictionary\nand rider is defined in rule 15.\n(2) If the bicycle crossing lights show a yellow bicycle crossing light\nand the rider has not already started crossing the intersection or\nplace, the rider must not start to cross until:\n(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 259\n(b) there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light showing.\n1 Yellow bicycle crossing light includes a flashing yellow bicycle crossing\nlight – see the definition in the dictionary.\n2 Green bicycle crossing light and red bicycle crossing light are defined in\nYellow bicycle crossing light\nroad includes any shoulder of the road.\nNote\n","sortOrder":268},{"sectionNumber":"262","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or","content":"262 Proceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or\nanother place on a road\n(1) The rider of a bicycle who is crossing at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road, with bicycle crossing lights and traffic lights must\ncomply with this rule.\nNote\nBicycle crossing lights, intersection and traffic lights are defined in the\n(2) If the bicycle crossing lights change from green to yellow, flashing\nyellow, red or flashing red while the rider is crossing the road, the\nrider must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross\nsafely to the nearer (in the direction of travel of the rider) of the\nthe area set aside or used by riders of bicycles to cross the\nroad at the intersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the far side of the road.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 260\n(2A) Despite subrule (2), in the circumstances set out in that subrule the\nrider may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety\narea, that the rider has just left, but only if:\n(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer\nto the rider than the side or safety area (whichever is the\ncloser) that the rider was heading for at that time; and\n(b) the rider does not stay on the road for longer than is\nnecessary to return to that side or safety area.\n(3) If, under subrule (2), the rider crosses to the safety area, the rider\nmust remain in the safety area until the bicycle crossing lights\n(4) However, if the rider cannot operate the bicycle crossing lights from\nthe safety area, the rider may cross to the far side of the road when:\n(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is\nno red traffic light showing; and\n(b) it is safe to do so.\nNote\nRed traffic light is defined in the dictionary.\n(4A) If the bicycle crossing lights show a green bicycle crossing light, the\nrider may cross at the intersection, or another place on the road,\neven though the traffic lights show a red traffic light or yellow traffic\nNote\nBicycle crossing lights, green bicycle crossing light, red traffic light, traffic\nlights and yellow traffic light are defined in the dictionary.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 261\n","sortOrder":269},{"sectionNumber":"Part 16","sectionType":"part","heading":"Rules for persons travelling in or on vehicles","content":"Part 16 Rules for persons travelling in or on vehicles\n","sortOrder":270},{"sectionNumber":"263","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application of Part to persons in or on trams","content":"263 Application of Part to persons in or on trams\nThis Part, except rule 269(1), does not apply to a person in or on a\ntram.\nNote\nRule 269(1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving vehicle.\n","sortOrder":271},{"sectionNumber":"264","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing of seatbelts by drivers","content":"264 Wearing of seatbelts by drivers\nThe driver of a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked:\n(a) must occupy a driver's seating position that is fitted with an\napproved seatbelt; and\n(b) must not occupy the same seating position as another\npassenger (whether or not the other passenger is exempt from\nwearing a seatbelt under rule 267); and\n(c) must wear the seatbelt fitted to the driver's seating position\nproperly adjusted and fastened, unless the driver is reversing\nthe vehicle or exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.\n1 Driver is defined in rule 16, and approved seatbelt, motor vehicle and park\n2 Rule 267 provides exemptions from wearing seatbelts.\n265 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older\n(1) A passenger in or on a motor vehicle that is moving, or that is\nstationary but not parked, must comply with subrule (2) if he or she:\n(a) is 16 years old or older; and\n(b) is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.\n(2) The passenger:\n(a) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with a an\napproved seatbelt; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 262\n(b) must not occupy the same seating position as another\npassenger (whether or not the other passenger is exempt from\nwearing a seat belt under rule 267); and\n(c) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.\n1 Approved seatbelt is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Subrule (4) provides that subrule (2)(b) does not apply to passengers holding\nchildren under 1 year old in their laps on buses, minibuses, taxis and tow\ntrucks in certain circumstances. Bus and taxi are defined in the dictionary.\n(3) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or taxi) that is moving,\nor that is stationary but not parked, must ensure that each\npassenger in or on the vehicle who is 16 years old or older\ncomplies with subrule (2), unless the passenger is exempt from\nwearing a seatbelt under rule 267.\nNote\nBus, motor vehicle, park and taxi are defined in the dictionary.\n(4) Subrule (2)(b) does not apply to a passenger in a bus, minibus, taxi\nor tow truck who has a child who is less than 1 year old seated in\nthe passenger's lap if no suitable approved child restraint is fitted\nand available for use and if the bus, minibus, taxi or tow truck has 2\nor more rows of seats – the passenger is not in the front row of\nseats.\nNote\nApproved child restraint is defined in rule 266(7).\n(5) Subrule (3) does not apply to the driver of a correctional vehicle,\njuvenile justice vehicle or sheriff's vehicle if either:\n(a) the vehicle has 2 or more rows of seats and the passenger is\nnot in the front row of seats or there is not a seating position\navailable for the passenger in another row of seats; or\n(b) the vehicle has a caged, or other secured, area designed for\nthe carriage of passengers and the passenger occupies a\nseating position in that area.\nNote\nCorrectional vehicle, juvenile justice vehicle and sheriff's vehicle are defined\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 263\n","sortOrder":272},{"sectionNumber":"266","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old","content":"266 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or motor bike) that is\nmoving, or is stationary but not parked, must ensure that this rule is\ncomplied with for each passenger in or on the vehicle who is under\n16 years old.\nNote\nBus, motor bike, motor vehicle and park are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) If the passenger is less than 6 months old, he or she must be\nrestrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted\nrearward facing approved child restraint.\n1 Approved child restraint is defined in subrule (7) and rearward facing is\ndefined in subrule (6A).\n2 See subrule (4B) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\n(2A) If the passenger is 6 months old or older, but is less than 4 years\nold, he or she must be restrained in a suitable and properly\nfastened and adjusted:\n(a) rearward facing approved child restraint; or\n(b) forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt\nharness.\n1 Approved child restraint is defined in subrule (7) and forward facing and\nrearward facing are defined in subrule (6A).\n2 See subrule (4C) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\n(2B) If the passenger is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years old,\nthe passenger must:\n(a) be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted\nforward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt\nharness; or\n(b) be placed on a properly positioned approved booster seat and\nbe restrained by either a suitable lap and sash type approved\nseatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, or by a\nsuitable approved child safety harness that is properly\nadjusted and fastened; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 264\n(c) if the passenger is seated in a seating position in a part of the\nvehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods:\n(i) be restrained by a suitable lap and sash type seatbelt\nthat is properly adjusted and fastened; or\n(ii) have the midsection of the passenger's body restrained\nby a suitable lap type seatbelt that is properly adjusted\nand fastened, and have the passenger's upper body\nrestrained by an approved child safety harness that is\nproperly adjusted and fastened.\n1 Approved booster seat, approved child restraint and approved child\nsafety harness are defined in subrule (7), approved seatbelt is defined in\nthe dictionary and forward facing is defined in subrule (6A).\n2 See subrule (4D) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\n3 In relation to paragraph (b), subrule (4E) permits an approved child safety\nharness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and sash seatbelt.\n4 In relation to paragraph (c), under rule 268(2), a person may only occupy a\nseating position in a part of a vehicle that is designed primarily for the\ncarriage of goods if that position is suitable for the size and weight of the\n(2C) The driver does not have to ensure subrule (2), (2A) or (2B) is\ncomplied with for a passenger if:\n(a) the driver is carrying a medical certificate that states a medical\npractitioner believes the passenger should not be restrained in\nany of the ways described in those subrules because of a\nmedical condition or disability that the passenger has; and\n(b) the passenger is properly restrained in a child restraint that\nhas been designed for, and is suitable for use by, the\npassenger or a person with the same medical condition or\ndisability as the passenger; and\n(c) the driver is complying with any conditions stated in the\n(d) no other law of this jurisdiction states that this subrule does\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 265\n(2D) However, the driver is exempt under subrule (2C) only if the driver\nimmediately produces the medical certificate when an authorised\nperson or police officer asks to see the certificate.\nNote\n(3) A passenger who is under 4 years old must not be in the front row\nof a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.\n(3A) A passenger who is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years\nold, must not be in the front row of a motor vehicle that has 2 or\nmore rows of seats unless in the row or rows behind the front row:\n(a) all of the other seats are occupied by passengers who are\nalso less than 7 years old; or\n(b) there is no empty seating position in which the passenger can\nsit in accordance with this rule.\nThis subrule would permit a 6 year old to sit in the front row of a vehicle that has\n2 rows of seats if 2 occupied approved child restraints in the back row\nencroached on an empty seating position between them in a way that made it\nimpossible for another approved child restraint or booster seat to be placed in\nthat position.\n(3B) The driver does not have to comply with subrule (3) or (3A) if:\n(a) the driver is carrying a medical certificate that states a medical\npractitioner believes the passenger should be in the front row\nof the vehicle because of a medical condition or disability that\nthe passenger has; and\n(b) the driver is complying with any conditions stated in the\nNote\n(3C) However, the driver is exempt under subrule (3B) only if the driver\nimmediately produces the medical certificate when an authorised\nperson or police officer asks to see the certificate.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 266\n(4) If the passenger is 7 years old or older but under 16 years old:\n(a) he or she must be restrained in a suitable approved child\nrestraint that is properly adjusted and fastened; or\n(b) he or she:\n(i) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with a\nsuitable seatbelt; and\n(ii) must not occupy the same seating position as another\npassenger (whether or not the other passenger is\nexempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267); and\n(iii) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.\nNote\nIn relation to paragraph (b)(iii), subrule (4E) permits an approved child safety\nharness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and sash seatbelt.\n(4A) Subrules (2), (2A), (2B) and (4) do not apply if the passenger is\nexempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.\n(4B) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubrule (2) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must\nbe restrained as if subrule (2A) applied to him or her.\n(4C) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubrule (2A) or (4B) because of his or her height or weight, he or\nshe must be restrained as if subrule (2B) applied to him or her.\n(4D) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubrule (2B) or (4C) because of his or her height or weight, he or\nshe must be restrained as if subrule (4) applied to him or her.\n(4E) In the case of a passenger sitting in a seating position that is fitted\nwith a lap and sash type seatbelt, it is sufficient compliance with\nsubrule (2B)(b) or (4)(b)(iii), as the case may be, if, instead of using\nthe sash part of the seatbelt, an approved child safety harness that\nis properly adjusted and fastened is used to restrain the upper body\nof the passenger.\nNote\nApproved child safety harness is defined in subrule (7).\n(5) The driver of a public minibus or taxi is exempt from subrules (2),\n(2A) and (2B) in relation to a passenger if:\n(a) there is no suitable approved child restraint available in the\nminibus or taxi for the passenger; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 267\n(b) if the minibus or taxi has 2 or more rows of seats – the\npassenger is not in the front row of seats; and\n(c) there is not another law of this jurisdiction requiring all\npassengers in a minibus or taxi who are the same age as the\npassenger to be restrained in an approved child restraint.\n1 Public minibus and taxi are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Despite the exemption provided by this subrule, in order to comply with\nsubrule (5A) the driver of a taxi or public minibus must ensure that\npassengers who are 1 year old or older, but less than 7 years old, wear an\napproved seatbelt.\n(5A) If the exemption set out in subrule (5) applies to a driver in relation\nto a passenger who is 1 year old or older, but less than 7 years old,\nand who is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267, the\npassenger must wear an approved seatbelt that is properly\nadjusted and fastened to the best extent that is possible given the\nheight and weight of the passenger.\n(5B) The driver of a public minibus, taxi or tow truck is exempt from\nsubrules (2) and (2A) in relation to a passenger who is under 1 year\nold if no suitable approved child restraint is fitted and available for\nuse and the public minibus, taxi or tow truck has 2 or more rows of\nseats and the passenger is not in the front row of seats and:\n(a) the passenger under 1 year old is seated in the lap of a\npassenger who is 16 years old or older; and\n(b) in the case of a tow truck, the passenger under 1 year old is\nbeing transported from a location where the vehicle that the\npassenger was travelling in is being towed by the tow truck if it\nis necessary to tow the vehicle because the vehicle has\nbroken down or has been involved in a crash.\n(5C) This rule does not apply to the driver of a correctional vehicle,\njuvenile justice vehicle or sheriff's vehicle.\nNote\nCorrectional vehicle, juvenile justice vehicle and sheriff's vehicle are defined\n(6) For this rule:\n(a) an approved child restraint is available in the motor vehicle for\na passenger if an approved child restraint is fitted in the\nvehicle and is not occupied by someone else under 16 years\nold; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 268\n(b) an approved child restraint or seatbelt is suitable for a\npassenger if it is suitable for restraining, or to be worn by the\npassenger.\n(6A) For this rule, a child restraint that is properly fastened and adjusted:\n(a) is forward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her\nhead is closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her feet;\n(b) is rearward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her\nfeet are closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her head.\napproved booster seat means a booster seat approved, for the\nAustralian Road Rules, under another law of this jurisdiction.\napproved child restraint means a child restraint approved, for the\nAustralian Road Rules, under another law of this jurisdiction.\napproved child safety harness means a child safety harness\napproved, for the Australian Road Rules, under another law of this\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 86A of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":273},{"sectionNumber":"267","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemptions from wearing seatbelts","content":"267 Exemptions from wearing seatbelts\n(1) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:\n(a) the person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under another\nlaw of this jurisdiction and is complying with the conditions (if\nany) of the exemption; and\n(b) the person is a passenger in or on a motor vehicle with 2 or\nmore rows of seats and there is not another law of this\njurisdiction permitting the person to sit in the front row of\nseats, and the person is not in the front row of seats.\nNote\n(1A) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt\nif:\n(a) the seating position that he or she occupies is not fitted with a\nseatbelt; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 269\n(b) there is no requirement for that seating position to be fitted\nwith a seatbelt; and\n(c) all passengers in the vehicle who are exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt are complying with subrule (8).\n(1B) Subrule (1A) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years old.\n(1C) To avoid doubt, subrule (1A) does not authorise a passenger to\nwhom rule 266(3) or (3A) applies to occupy a seat in the front row\nof seats in a vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.\n(2) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt\nif:\n(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or\ncollection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage,\nand is required to get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the\nvehicle, at frequent intervals; and\n(b) the vehicle is not travelling over 25 kilometres per hour.\n(2A) Subrule (2) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years old.\n(3) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:\n(a) the person (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicle in or\non which the person is a passenger) is carrying a certificate\n(other than a medical certificate issued under subrule (3A)),\nissued under another law of this jurisdiction, stating that the\nperson is not required to wear a seatbelt; and\n(b) the person is complying with the conditions (if any) stated in\nthe certificate.\n(3A) A person who is in, or on, a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt if:\n(a) the person or, if the person is a passenger, the driver of the\nvehicle is carrying a medical certificate that states a medical\npractitioner believes the person should not wear a seatbelt\nbecause of a medical condition or disability that the person\nhas; and\n(b) the person is complying with any conditions stated in the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 270\nNote\n(4) However, the person is exempt under subrule (3) or (3A) only if the\nperson who is carrying the certificate immediately produces the\ncertificate when an authorised person or police officer asks to see\nthe certificate.\nNote\n(5) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:\n(a) the person is a passenger in or on a police or emergency\nvehicle; and\n(b) either:\n(i) if the vehicle has 2 or more rows of seats – the person is\nnot in the front row of seats or there is not a seating\nposition available for the person in another row of seats;\nor\n(ii) if the vehicle is a police vehicle and has a caged, or\nother secured, area designed for the carriage of\npassengers – the person occupies a seating position in\nthat area.\nNote\nEmergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n(6) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if he or she is providing\nor receiving medical treatment of an urgent and necessary nature\nwhile in or on a vehicle.\n(7) If a truck or bus has a sleeper compartment, a two-up driver of the\ntruck or bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt while he or she\noccupies the sleeper compartment for rest purposes.\nNote\nBus and truck are defined in the dictionary.\n(8) If a vehicle does not have seatbelts or approved child restraints\nfitted to all its passenger seating positions, a passenger who is\nexempt from wearing a seatbelt under this rule must not occupy a\nseating position that is fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child\nrestraint if the result would be that a passenger who is not exempt\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 271\nfrom wearing a seatbelt under this rule would be required to occupy\na seating position that is not fitted with a seatbelt or an approved\nchild restraint.\n(9) In this rule:\ntwo-up driver means a person accompanying a driver of a truck or\nbus on a journey, or part of a journey, who has been, is or will be\nsharing the task of driving the truck or bus during the journey.\n","sortOrder":274},{"sectionNumber":"268","sectionType":"section","heading":"How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle","content":"268 How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle\n(1) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is\nnot a part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or\ngoods.\nNote\n(2) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is a\npart designed primarily for the carriage of goods unless:\n(a) the part is enclosed; and\n(b) he or she occupies a seating position that is suitable for the\nsize and weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.\n1 Enclosed is defined in subrule (7).\n2 Rule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or\nolder, and rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers under\n16 years old.\n(3) A person must not travel in or on a motor vehicle with any part of\nthe person's body outside a window or door of the vehicle, unless\nthe person is the driver of the vehicle and is giving a hand signal:\n(a) for changing direction to the right in accordance with rule 50;\nor\n(b) for stopping or slowing in accordance with rule 55.\nNote\nWindow is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 272\n(4) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus) must not drive with a\npassenger if any part of the passenger's body is outside a window\nor door of the vehicle.\nNote\n(4A) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or\non a part of the vehicle that is not a part designed primarily for the\ncarriage of passengers or goods.\n(4B) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or\non a part of the vehicle that is a part designed primarily for the\ncarriage of goods unless:\n(a) the part is enclosed; or\n(b) the person occupies a seating position that is suitable for the\nsize and weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.\nNote\nRule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older,\nand rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years\nold.\n(5) This rule does not apply to a person who is:\n(a) in or on a police or emergency vehicle; or\n(b) on a motor bike; or\n(c) engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or\nin the collection of waste or garbage, in or on a motor vehicle\nthat is not travelling over 25 kilometres per hour.\nNote\nEmergency vehicle, motor bike, and police vehicle are defined in the\n(6) This rule also does not apply to a person if:\n(a) the person is exempt from this rule under another law of this\njurisdiction and is complying with the conditions (if any) of the\nexemption; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 273\n(b) the vehicle is exempt from this rule under another law of this\n(7) For this rule:\nenclosed, for a part of a vehicle, means enclosed by:\n(a) the structure of the vehicle; or\n(b) a canopy, cage or other device fitted to the vehicle that is\napproved, for the Australian Road Rules, under another law of\n","sortOrder":275},{"sectionNumber":"269","sectionType":"section","heading":"Opening doors and getting out of a vehicle etc.","content":"269 Opening doors and getting out of a vehicle etc.\n(1) A person must not get off, or out of, a moving vehicle, unless the\nperson is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of\ngoods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and the vehicle is\nnot travelling over 5 kilometres per hour.\n1 Vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n2 Rule 237 deals with persons getting on, or into, a moving vehicle.\n(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to a person getting off a bicycle or\nanimal.\n(3) A person must not cause a hazard to any person or vehicle by\nopening a door of a vehicle, leaving a door of a vehicle open, or\ngetting off, or out of, a vehicle.\n(4) The driver of a bus must not drive the bus unless the doors of the\nbus are closed while the bus is moving.\nNote\n","sortOrder":276},{"sectionNumber":"270","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing motor bike helmets","content":"270 Wearing motor bike helmets\n(1) The rider of a motor bike that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must:\n(a) wear an approved motor bike helmet securely fitted and\nfastened on the rider's head; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 274\n(b) not ride with a passenger unless the passenger complies with\nsubrule (2).\nNote\nMotor bike and park are defined in the dictionary.\n(1A) However, the rider of a motor bike that is moving, or is stationary\nbut not parked, is exempt from wearing an approved motor bike\nhelmet if:\n(a) the motor bike's engine is not on; and\n(b) the rider is pushing the motor bike; and\n(c) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider not to wear the\nhelmet.\n(2) A passenger on a motor bike that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must wear an approved motor bike helmet securely fitted\nand fastened on the passenger's head.\napproved motor bike helmet means a helmet:\n(a) made in compliance with:\n(i) AS 1698; or\n(ii) AS/NZ 1698; or\n(iii) the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe\nstandard 22.05; and\n(b) that has an identifying mark certifying compliance with a\nstandard mentioned in paragraph (a); and\n(c) that is in good repair and proper working order and condition.\nExamples of a helmet that is in good repair and proper working order and\ncondition\n1 A helmet that is scratched or marked but the scratch or mark has not:\n(a) penetrated the helmet's outer shell; or\n(b) damaged the helmet's retention system; or\n(c) damaged the helmet's inner lining.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 275\n2 A helmet that is damaged to a degree that might reasonably be expected\nfrom the normal use of the helmet.\npassenger, of a motor bike, includes a person on a passenger seat\nof the motor bike (including the pillion seat), or in a sidecar.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 86B of the Traffic\n","sortOrder":277},{"sectionNumber":"271","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding on motor bikes","content":"271 Riding on motor bikes\n(1) Unless subrule (1A) applies, the rider of a motor bike that is moving\n(other than a motor bike that is being pushed by a rider who is\nwalking beside it), or the rider of a motor bike that is stationary but\nnot parked, must:\n(a) sit astride the rider's seat facing forwards; and\n(b) if the motor bike is moving:\n(i) keep at least one hand on the handlebars; and\n(ii) keep both feet on the footrests or footboard designed for\nthe rider's use.\nNote\nMotor bike and park are defined in the dictionary.\n(1A) The rider of a motor bike that is moving may:\n(a) stand on the motor bike's footrests or footboard designed for\nthe rider’s use if:\n(i) the rider has both feet on the footrests or footboard; and\n(ii) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider to do so; or\n(b) remove a foot from the footrest or footboard designed for the\nrider's use if:\n(i) the rider is sitting on the rider's seat; and\n(ii) at least one foot is on a footrest or footboard; and\n(iii) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider to do so; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 276\n(c) remove both feet from the footrests or footboard designed for\nthe rider's use if the motor bike is moving at less than\n10 kilometres per hour and:\n(i) the rider is manoeuvring the motor bike in order to park\nthe motor bike; or\n(ii) the motor bike is decelerating to come to a stop; or\n(iii) the motor bike is accelerating from being stopped.\nNote\n(2) A passenger on a motor bike (except a passenger in a sidecar or\non a seat designed for a passenger, other than a pillion seat) that is\nmoving, or is stationary but not parked, must:\n(a) sit astride the pillion seat facing forwards; and\n(b) keep both feet on the footrests designed for use by a pillion\npassenger on the motor bike.\n(3) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with a passenger (except a\npassenger in a sidecar or other seat designed for a passenger)\nunless the passenger complies with subrule (2).\n(4) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with more than\none passenger (excluding any passenger in a sidecar or other seat\ndesigned for a passenger, other than a pillion seat).\n(5) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with more passengers in a\nsidecar, or on a seat designed for a passenger, than the sidecar, or\nseat, is designed to carry.\n(5A) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with a passenger who is\nunder 8 years old unless the passenger is in a sidecar.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 277\n(5B) A passenger must not ride in a sidecar of a motorbike unless the\npassenger is seated safely.\n(5C) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with a passenger in a\nsidecar unless the passenger complies with subrule (5B).\n(6) A provision of this rule does not apply to a person if the person is\nexempt from the provision under another law of this jurisdiction .\n","sortOrder":278},{"sectionNumber":"272","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with the driver's control of the vehicle etc.","content":"272 Interfering with the driver's control of the vehicle etc.\nA passenger in or on a vehicle must not:\n(a) interfere with the driver's control of the vehicle; or\n(b) obstruct the driver's view of the road or traffic.\n","sortOrder":279},{"sectionNumber":"Part 17","sectionType":"part","heading":"Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram","content":"Part 17 Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram\nrecovery vehicles and public buses\n1 This Part contains rules about T lights and B lights. These are traffic signals\nthat operate in the same way as, or together with, traffic lights but apply only\nto drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles, public buses and, in the case of B\nlights, to other vehicles if specified by another law of this jurisdiction. An\nexample of a T light is shown in rule 278 and an example of a B light is\nshown in rule 285.\n2 Rule 309 sets out a number of exemptions from the Australian Road Rules\nfor drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles and public buses travelling along\ntram tracks. Some other rules have exceptions for drivers of trams or\nparticular trams.\nDivision 1 Trams\nNote\nPublic bus, T lights, tram, tram recovery vehicle and travelling along tram\ntracks are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":280},{"sectionNumber":"273","sectionType":"section","heading":"Division also applies to tram recovery vehicles and public","content":"273 Division also applies to tram recovery vehicles and public\nbuses travelling along tram tracks\n(1) This Division applies to the driver of a tram recovery vehicle as if a\nreference in the Division to a tram included a reference to a tram\nrecovery vehicle.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 278\n(2) This Division applies to the driver of a public bus travelling along\ntram tracks as if a reference in the Division to a tram included a\nreference to a public bus travelling along tram tracks.\n","sortOrder":281},{"sectionNumber":"274","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a red T light","content":"274 Stopping for a red T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a red T light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the T lights – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the T lights – as near as\nT lights.\n1 Red T light and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 276 explains when the driver of a tram does not have to stop for a red\nT light.\n275 Stopping for a yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a yellow\nT light must stop:\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the T lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the stop line – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the T lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the T lights – as near as\nT lights.\n1 Yellow T light and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 276 explains when the driver of a tram does not have to stop for a\nyellow T light.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 279\n","sortOrder":282},{"sectionNumber":"276","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exception to stopping for a red or yellow T light","content":"276 Exception to stopping for a red or yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a red or\nyellow T light does not have to stop if a white traffic arrow is also\nNote\nRed T light, white traffic arrow and yellow T light are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":283},{"sectionNumber":"277","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow T light","content":"277 Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram who stops for T lights showing a red or yellow\nT light must not proceed until:\n(a) a white T light is showing; or\n(b) no T light is showing and traffic lights at or near the T lights\nare showing a green traffic light.\nNote\nGreen traffic light, red T light, traffic lights, white T light and yellow T light\nare defined in the dictionary. A diagram of a white T light is shown in rule 278.\n","sortOrder":284},{"sectionNumber":"278","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white T light or white","content":"278 Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white T light or white\ntraffic arrow is showing\n(1) The driver of a tram approaching or at a white T light at or near\ntraffic lights showing a red traffic light may proceed straight ahead,\nor turn, despite the red traffic light.\nNote\nRed traffic light, straight ahead, traffic lights and white T light are defined in\n(2) The driver of a tram approaching or at a white traffic arrow at or\nnear traffic lights showing a red traffic light may turn in the direction\nindicated by the arrow, despite the red traffic light.\nNote\nWhite traffic arrow is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 280\nWhite T light\n","sortOrder":285},{"sectionNumber":"279","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when a white T light or white traffic arrow is no","content":"279 Proceeding when a white T light or white traffic arrow is no\nlonger showing\n(a) the driver of a tram at an intersection with T lights showing a\nwhite T light who has stopped after the stop line, or nearest or\nonly T lights, at the intersection; or\n(b) the driver of a tram at an intersection with traffic arrows\nshowing a white traffic arrow who is turning in the direction\nindicated by the arrow and has stopped after the stop line, or\nnearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.\nThe driver of a tram may stop after the stop line at an intersection with T lights\nshowing a white T light, and not proceed through the intersection, because the\nintersection, or a road beyond the intersection, is blocked by traffic.\nNote\nIntersection, stop line, traffic arrows, white T light and white traffic arrow\n(2) If the T lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has not entered the\nintersection, the driver must not proceed until:\n(a) a white T light is showing; or\n(b) there is no T light showing, and traffic lights at or near the\nT lights are showing a green traffic light; or\n(c) if the driver is turning at the intersection – a white traffic arrow\nis showing that indicates the direction in which the driver is\nturning.\nNote\nEnter, green traffic light, red traffic arrow and yellow traffic arrow are\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 281\n(3) If the T lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has entered the\nintersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the\nDivision 2 Public buses\nNote\nB lights and public bus are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":286},{"sectionNumber":"280","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application of Division","content":"280 Application of Division\n(1) This Division applies to the driver of a public bus who is driving in a\nbus lane.\nNote\nThe rules in Division 1 of this Part apply to drivers of public buses travelling along\ntram tracks – see rule 273.\n(2) This Division applies to the driver of a vehicle other than a public\nbus, in the same way as it applies to the driver of a public bus, if:\n(a) the vehicle being driven by the driver is in a class of vehicles\nspecified for this rule by another law of this jurisdiction; and\n(b) the driver is driving in a bus lane to which B lights apply; and\n(c) the driver is permitted to drive in the lane under another law of\n","sortOrder":287},{"sectionNumber":"281","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a red B light","content":"281 Stopping for a red B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a red\nB light must stop:\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the B lights – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the B lights – as near as\nB lights.\n1 Red B light and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 283 explains when the driver of a public bus does not have to stop for a\nred B light.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 282\n","sortOrder":288},{"sectionNumber":"282","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for a yellow B light","content":"282 Stopping for a yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a\nyellow B light must stop:\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the B lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the stop line – as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the B lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the B lights – as near as\nB lights.\n1 Yellow B light and stop line are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 283 explains when the driver of a public bus does not have to stop for a\nyellow B light.\n283 Exception to stopping for a red or yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a red\nor yellow B light does not have to stop if a white traffic arrow is also\nNote\nRed B light, white traffic arrow and yellow B light are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":289},{"sectionNumber":"284","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow B light","content":"284 Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus who stops for B lights showing a red or\nyellow B light must not proceed until:\n(a) a white B light is showing; or\n(b) no B light is showing and traffic lights at or near the B lights\nare showing a green traffic light.\nNote\nGreen traffic light, red B light, traffic lights, white B light and yellow B light\nare defined in the dictionary. A diagram of a white B light is shown in rule 285.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 283\n","sortOrder":290},{"sectionNumber":"285","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white B light or white","content":"285 Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white B light or white\ntraffic arrow is showing\n(1) The driver of a public bus approaching or at a white B light at or\nnear traffic lights showing a red traffic light may proceed straight\nahead, or turn, despite the red traffic light.\nNote\nRed traffic light, straight ahead, traffic lights and white B light are defined in\n(2) The driver of a public bus approaching or at a white traffic arrow at\nor near traffic lights showing a red traffic light may turn in the\ndirection indicated by the arrow, despite the red traffic light.\nNote\nWhite traffic arrow is defined in the dictionary.\nWhite B light\n","sortOrder":291},{"sectionNumber":"286","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when a white B light or white traffic arrow is no","content":"286 Proceeding when a white B light or white traffic arrow is no\nlonger showing\n(a) the driver of a public bus at an intersection with B lights\nshowing a white B light who has stopped after the stop line, or\nnearest or only B lights, at the intersection; or\n(b) the driver of a public bus at an intersection with traffic arrows\nshowing a white traffic arrow who is turning in the direction\nindicated by the arrow and has stopped after the stop line, or\nnearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.\nThe driver of a public bus may stop after the stop line at an intersection with\nB lights showing a white B light, and not proceed through the intersection,\nbecause the intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, is blocked by traffic.\nNote\nIntersection, stop line, traffic arrows, white B light and white traffic arrow\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 284\n(2) If the B lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has not entered the\nintersection, the driver must not proceed until:\n(a) a white B light is showing; or\n(b) there is no B light showing, and traffic lights at or near the\nB lights are showing a green traffic light; or\n(c) if the driver is turning at the intersection – a white traffic arrow\nis showing that indicates the direction in which the driver is\nturning.\nNote\nEnter, green traffic light, red traffic arrow and yellow traffic arrow are\n(3) If the B lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has entered the\nintersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the\nPart 18 Miscellaneous road rules\nDivision 1 Miscellaneous rules for drivers\n287 Duties of a driver involved in a crash\n(1) A driver involved in a crash must comply with this rule.\n1 Crash is defined in the dictionary.\n2 The law of this jurisdiction also requires a driver involved in a crash to stop\nand give assistance to anyone who is injured.\n(2) The driver must stop at the scene of the crash and give the driver's\nrequired particulars, within the required time and, if practicable, at\nthe scene of the crash, to:\n(a) any other driver (or that driver's representative) involved in the\ncrash; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 285\n(b) any other person involved in the crash who is injured, or the\nperson's representative; and\n(c) the owner of any property (including any vehicle) damaged in\nthe crash (or the owner's representative), unless, in the case\nof damage to a vehicle, the particulars are given to the driver\nof the vehicle (or the driver's representative).\n(3) The driver must also give the driver's required particulars, within the\nrequired time, to a police officer if:\n(a) anyone is killed or injured in the crash; or\n(b) the driver does not, for any reason, give the driver's required\nparticulars to each person mentioned in subrule (2); or\n(c) the required particulars for any other driver involved in the\ncrash are not given to the driver; or\n(d) a vehicle involved in the crash is towed or carried away by\nanother vehicle (except if another law of this jurisdiction\nprovides that the crash is not required to be reported); or\n(e) the crash is required to be reported to a police officer under\nNote\nPolice officer is defined in the dictionary.\n(4) For this rule:\nrequired particulars, for a driver involved in crash, means:\n(a) the driver's name and address; and\n(b) the name and address of the owner of the driver's vehicle; and\n(c) the vehicle's registration number (if any); and\n(d) any other information necessary to identify the vehicle;\nand, for subrule (3), includes any other information required to be\ngiven to a police officer about the crash under another law of this\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 286\nrequired time, for a driver involved in a crash, means as soon as\npossible but, except in exceptional circumstances, within 24 hours\nafter the crash.\n","sortOrder":292},{"sectionNumber":"288","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on a path","content":"288 Driving on a path\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive on a path,\nunless subrule (2) or (3) applies to the driver.\nNote\nBicycle is defined in the dictionary, and path is defined in subrule (6).\n(2) A driver may drive on a path if the driver is:\n(a) driving on a part of the path indicated by information on or with\na traffic control device as a part where vehicles may drive; or\n(b) driving on the path to enter or leave, by the shortest\npracticable route, a road-related area or adjacent land and\nthere is not a part of the path indicated by information on or\nwith a traffic control device as a part where vehicles may\n(c) permitted to drive on the path under another law of this\nNote\nAdjacent land, traffic control device and with are defined in the dictionary, and\nroad-related area is defined in rule 13.\n(3) A driver may drive a motorised wheelchair on a path if:\n(a) the unladen mass of the wheelchair is not over 110 kilograms;\nand\n(b) the wheelchair is not travelling over 10 kilometres per hour;\nand\n(c) because of the driver's physical condition, the driver has a\nreasonable need to use a wheelchair.\nNote\nWheelchair is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 287\n(4) A driver on a path (except the rider of a bicycle, or a driver driving\non the path to enter a road from a road-related area or adjacent\nland, or to enter a road-related area or adjacent land from a road)\nmust give way to all other road users, and to animals, on the path.\n1 Road user is defined in rule 14.\n2 For this subrule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if\n3 Rules 74 and 75 deal with drivers giving way when crossing a footpath or\nother path to enter or leave a road-related area or adjacent land.\n4 Rules 249 to 251 deal with bicycle riders riding on footpaths, separated paths\nand shared paths.\n(5) This rule does not apply to the rider of an animal riding the animal\non a footpath.\n1 Footpath is defined in the dictionary.\n2 The rider of an animal on a footpath must give way to a pedestrian on the\npath – see rule 302.\n(5A) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike (with or without\na trailer attached) that is a postal vehicle if:\n(a) the rider gives way to pedestrians and other vehicles and\ntakes reasonable precautions to avoid collision or danger or\nobstruction to any person or thing on or next to the path; and\n(b) the rider does not exceed 10 kilometres per hour; and\n(c) the motor bike has an engine capacity not exceeding 125cc.\nNote\nMotor bike and postal vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\npath means a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, footpath is defined in the dictionary and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 288\n","sortOrder":293},{"sectionNumber":"289","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on a nature strip","content":"289 Driving on a nature strip\n(1) A driver must not drive on a nature strip adjacent to a length of road\nin a built-up area, unless the driver is:\n(a) entering or leaving, by the shortest practicable route, an area\non the nature strip indicated by information on or with a traffic\ncontrol device as an area where vehicles may drive; or\n(b) driving on a part of the nature strip indicated by information on\nor with a traffic control device as a part where vehicles may\n(c) driving on the nature strip to enter or leave, by the shortest\npracticable route, a road-related area or adjacent land and\nthere is not a part of the nature strip indicated by information\non or with a traffic control device as a part where vehicles may\n(d) riding a bicycle or animal, and there is not another law of this\njurisdiction prohibiting the rider from riding a bicycle or animal\non the nature strip; or\n(e) driving a ride-on lawnmower that is cutting grass on the nature\nstrip; or\n(f) driving a motorised wheelchair; or\n(g) permitted to drive on the nature strip under another law of this\nNote\nAdjacent land, bicycle, built-up area, length of road, nature strip, traffic\ncontrol device, wheelchair and with are defined in the dictionary, and road-\nrelated area is defined in rule 13.\n(2) A driver driving on a nature strip (except the rider of an animal, or a\ndriver driving on the nature strip to enter a road from a road-related\narea or adjacent land, or to enter a road-related area or adjacent\nland from a road) must give way to all other road users, and to\nanimals, on the nature strip.\n1 Road user is defined in the dictionary.\n2 For subrule (2), give way means the driver must slow down and, if\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 289\n3 Rules 74 and 75 deal with drivers giving way when crossing a nature strip\nadjacent to a road to enter or leave a road-related area or adjacent land.\n4 The rider of an animal on a nature strip must give way to any pedestrian on\nthe nature strip – see rule 302.\n(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike (with or without\na trailer attached) that is a postal vehicle if:\n(a) the rider gives way to pedestrians and other vehicles and\ntakes reasonable precautions to avoid collision or danger or\nobstruction to any person or thing on or next to the nature\nstrip; and\n(b) the rider does not exceed 10 kilometres per hour; and\n(c) the motor bike has an engine capacity not exceeding 125cc.\nNote\nMotor bike and postal vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":294},{"sectionNumber":"290","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on a traffic island","content":"290 Driving on a traffic island\nA driver must not drive on a traffic island (except the central traffic\nisland in a roundabout), unless:\n(a) the traffic island is designed to allow vehicles to be driven on\nit; or\n(b) the driver is permitted to drive on the traffic island under\n1 Roundabout is defined in rule 109, and traffic island is defined in the\n2 A driver must drive to the left of the central traffic island in a roundabout\nexcept in certain circumstances – see rule 115.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 290\n","sortOrder":295},{"sectionNumber":"291","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making unnecessary noise or smoke","content":"291 Making unnecessary noise or smoke\nA person must not start a vehicle, or drive a vehicle, in a way that\nmakes unnecessary noise or smoke.\nCausing the wheels of the driver's vehicle to lose traction and spin on the road\nsurface may make unnecessary noise or smoke.\nNote\nOther laws of this jurisdiction also deal with vehicles and equipment that make\nnoise or smoke.\n","sortOrder":296},{"sectionNumber":"292","sectionType":"section","heading":"Insecure or overhanging load","content":"292 Insecure or overhanging load\n(1) A driver must not drive or tow a vehicle if the vehicle is carrying a\nload that:\n(a) is not properly secured to the vehicle; or\n(b) is placed on the vehicle in a way that causes the vehicle to be\nunstable; or\n(c) projects from the vehicle in a way that is likely to injure a\nperson, obstruct the path of other drivers or pedestrians, or\ndamage a vehicle or anything else (for example, the road\nsurface).\nNote\nOther laws of this jurisdiction may deal with the loading of vehicles and carrying\nloads on vehicles.\n(2) This rule is not limited by rule 292A.\n","sortOrder":297},{"sectionNumber":"292A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Restricting movement of load","content":"292A Restricting movement of load\n(1) A driver must not drive or tow a vehicle carrying a load unless the\nload is restrained by a load restraint system that:\n(a) prevents the load from moving in relation to the vehicle (other\nthan movement allowed under subrule (2)) in the\ncircumstances mentioned in subrule (3); and\n(b) at a minimum, is capable of withstanding the forces that would\nresult in the circumstances mentioned in subrule (3).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 291\n(2) A load may move in relation to the vehicle if:\n(a) the vehicle's stability and weight distribution are not adversely\naffected by the movement; and\n(b) the load does not become dislodged from the vehicle.\nExamples of load movement that may be permitted under subrule (2)\n1 A load contained within the sides or enclosure of the vehicle that is restrained\nfrom moving horizontally may be able to move vertically.\n2 A load of very light objects, or a loose bulk load, that is contained within the\nsides or enclosure of the vehicle may be able to move horizontally and\nvertically.\n3 A bulk liquid load contained within the sides or enclosure of the vehicle.\n(3) For subrule (1)(b), the circumstances are that the vehicle is subject\nto:\n(a) any of the following, separately:\n(i) 0.8g deceleration in a forwards direction;\n(ii) 0.5g deceleration in a rearwards direction;\n(iii) 0.5g acceleration in a lateral direction; and\n(b) if friction or limited vertical displacement is relied on to comply\nwith paragraph (a) – 0.2g acceleration in a vertical direction\nrelative to the load.\ng means gravitational acceleration or 9.81 m/s2.\n","sortOrder":298},{"sectionNumber":"293","sectionType":"section","heading":"Removing fallen etc. things from the road","content":"293 Removing fallen etc. things from the road\n(1) This rule applies to a driver if:\n(a) something falls onto the road from the driver's vehicle, or the\ndriver, or a passenger in or on the driver's vehicle, puts\nsomething on the road; and\n(b) there is a possibility that the thing, if left on the road, may\ninjure a person, obstruct the path of other drivers or\npedestrians, or damage a vehicle or anything else (for\nexample, the road surface).\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 292\n(2) The driver must remove the thing, or take action to have the thing\nremoved, from the road as soon as the driver can do so safely.\nExamples of things\n1 Fallen loads.\n2 Oil or grease.\n3 Debris from an accident.\n4 Wheel chocks.\nNote\nRule 165(e) provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence\nagainst a provision of Part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking) if the driver\nstops to comply with another provision of the Australian Road Rules (including\nthis rule).\nput, something onto the road, includes:\n(a) throw, drop or propel the thing onto the road; and\n(b) otherwise cause the thing to be on the road.\n","sortOrder":299},{"sectionNumber":"294","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping control of a vehicle being towed","content":"294 Keeping control of a vehicle being towed\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle must not tow another motor vehicle\n(a) either:\n(i) the driver can control the movement of the towed\n(ii) the brakes and steering of the towed vehicle are in\nworking order and a person who is licensed to drive the\ntowed vehicle is sitting in the driver's seat of the towed\nvehicle, and is in control of its brakes and steering; and\n(b) it is safe to tow the towed vehicle.\nNote\n(2) The driver of a motor vehicle must not tow a trailer unless:\n(a) the driver can control the movement of the trailer; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 293\n(b) it is safe to tow the trailer.\nNote\nTrailer is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":300},{"sectionNumber":"295","sectionType":"section","heading":"Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with a towline","content":"295 Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with a towline\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle towing another vehicle using a chain,\nrope, fabric, strap or wire (the towline) must comply with this rule.\nNote\nMotor vehicle is defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n(2) If neither of the vehicles is a motor bike, the driver must keep a\ndistance of not over 4 metres between the vehicles.\nNote\n(3) If at least one of the vehicles is a motor bike, the driver must keep a\ndistance of not over 2.5 metres between the vehicles.\n(4) If the towline is longer than 2 metres, the driver must attach a white\nor brightly coloured flag, piece of cloth or other similar material (the\nwarning material) to the towline in accordance with subrule (5).\n(5) The warning material must:\n(a) be substantially square or rectangular with 2 adjacent sides at\nleast 300 millimetres long; and\n(b) be attached midway along the towline; and\n(c) be visible for at least 100 metres from either side of the\nwarning material.\n(6) Subrule (2), (3) or (4) does not apply to a driver if the driver is\nexempt from the subrule under another law of this jurisdiction and is\ncomplying with the conditions (if any) of the exemption.\n","sortOrder":301},{"sectionNumber":"296","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving a vehicle in reverse","content":"296 Driving a vehicle in reverse\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not reverse the vehicle unless the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 294\n(2) The driver of a vehicle must not reverse the vehicle further than is\nreasonable in the circumstances.\n","sortOrder":302},{"sectionNumber":"297","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driver to have proper control of a vehicle etc.","content":"297 Driver to have proper control of a vehicle etc.\n(1) A driver must not drive a vehicle unless the driver has proper\ncontrol of the vehicle.\n(1A) A person must not drive a vehicle if a person or an animal is in the\ndriver's lap.\n(2) A driver must not drive a motor vehicle unless the driver has a clear\nview of the road, and traffic, ahead, behind and to each side of the\ndriver.\nNote\n(3) The rider of a motor bike must not ride with an animal on the motor\nbike between the rider and the handlebars, or in another position\nthat interferes with the rider's ability to control the motor bike or to\nhave a clear view of the road.\nNote\n(4) Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a motor bike who rides\nwith an animal between the rider and the handle bars for a distance\nof not more than 500 metres on a road for the purpose of a farming\nactivity that the rider is carrying out.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 295\n","sortOrder":303},{"sectionNumber":"298","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving with a person in a trailer","content":"298 Driving with a person in a trailer\nA driver must not drive a motor vehicle towing a trailer with a\nperson in or on the trailer, unless the trailer is exempt from this rule\n1 Motor vehicle and trailer are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 257 deals with persons travelling in or on bicycle trailers.\n299 Television receivers and visual display units in motor vehicles\n(1) A driver must not drive a vehicle that has a television receiver or\nvisual display unit in or on the vehicle operating while the vehicle is\nmoving, or is stationary but not parked, if any part of the image on\nthe screen:\n(a) is visible to the driver from the normal driving position; or\n(b) is likely to distract another driver.\nNote\nPark is defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n(2) This rule does not apply to the driver if:\n(a) the driver is driving a bus and the visual display unit is, or\ndisplays, a destination sign or other bus sign; or\n(ab) the vehicle is a motor bike and the visual display unit is, or is\npart of, a driver’s aid, and the driver is not holding the visual\ndisplay unit in the driver's hand; or\n(b) the vehicle is not a motor bike and the visual display unit is, or\nis part of, a driver's aid and either –\n(i) is an integrated part of the vehicle design; or\n(ii) is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while\nbeing used; or\n(ba) the visual display unit is a mobile data terminal fitted to a\npolice vehicle or an emergency vehicle; or\nNote\nPolice vehicle and emergency vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 296\n(bb) the visual display unit is part of a mobile phone that is being\nused as a driver's aid as permitted by rule 300(1)(ab); or\n(c) the driver or vehicle is exempt from this rule under another law\nof this jurisdiction.\n(3) For the purposes of subrule (2)(b)(ii), a visual display unit is\nsecured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle if, and only if:\n(a) the mounting is commercially designed and manufactured for\nthat purpose; and\n(b) the unit is secured in the mounting, and the mounting is\naffixed to the vehicle, in the manner intended by the\nmanufacturer.\n(4) For the purpose of this rule, a vehicle may be parked even though:\n(a) the key to the vehicle is located in the vehicle's ignition lock; or\n(b) the engine of the vehicle is running.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 86C of the Traffic\nExamples of driver's aids\n1 Closed-circuit television security cameras.\n2 Dispatch systems.\n3 Navigational or intelligent highway and vehicle system equipment.\n4 Rearview screens.\n5 Ticket-issuing machines.\n6 Vehicle monitoring devices.\nNote\n300 Use of mobile phones\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not use a mobile phone while the\nvehicle is moving, or is stationary but not parked, unless:\n(a) the phone is being used to make or receive an audio phone\ncall and the body of the phone:\n(i) is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while\nbeing so used; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 297\n(ii) is not secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle and is\nnot being held by the driver, and the use of the phone\ndoes not require the driver, at any time while using it, to\npress any thing on the body of the phone or to otherwise\nmanipulate any part of the body of the phone; or\n(ab) the phone is being used as a driver's aid and:\n(i) the body of the phone is secured in a mounting affixed to\nthe vehicle while being so used; and\n(ii) the use of the phone does not require the driver, at any\ntime while using it, to press any thing on the body of the\nphone or otherwise to manipulate any part of the body of\nthe phone; or\n(b) the vehicle is an emergency vehicle or a police vehicle; or\n(c) the driver is exempt from this rule under another law of this\nNote\nEmergency vehicle, park and police vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\nExamples of driver's aids\n1 Closed-circuit television security cameras.\n2 Dispatch systems.\n3 Navigational or intelligent highway and vehicle system equipment.\n4 Rearview screens.\n5 Ticket-issuing machines.\n6 Vehicle monitoring devices.\n(2) For the purposes of this rule, a mobile phone is secured in a\nmounting affixed to the vehicle if, and only if:\n(a) the mounting is commercially designed and manufactured for\nthat purpose; and\n(b) the mobile phone is secured in the mounting, and the\nmounting is affixed to the vehicle, in the manner intended by\nthe manufacturer.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 298\n(3) For the purposes of this rule, a driver does not use a phone to\nreceive a text message, video message, email or similar\ncommunication if:\n(a) the communication is received automatically by the phone;\nand\n(b) on and after receipt, the communication itself (rather than any\nindication that the communication has been received) does\nnot become automatically visible on the screen of the phone.\n(3A) For the purpose of this rule, a vehicle may be parked even though:\n(a) the key to the vehicle is located in the vehicle's ignition lock; or\n(b) the engine of the vehicle is running.\nNote\nThe application of this rule is modified by regulation 86C of the Traffic\naffixed to, in relation to a vehicle, includes forming part of the\naudio phone call does not include an email, text message, video\ncall, video message or other similar communication.\nbody, in relation to a mobile phone, means the part of the phone\nthat contains the majority of the phone's mechanisms.\nheld includes held by, or resting on, any part of the driver's body,\nbut does not include held in a pocket of the driver's clothing or in a\npouch worn by the driver.\nmobile phone does not include a CB radio or any other two-way\nradio.\nuse, in relation to a mobile phone, includes any of the following\nactions by a driver:\n(a) holding the body of the phone in her or his hand (whether or\nnot engaged in a phone call), except while in the process of\ngiving the body of the phone to a passenger in the vehicle;\n(b) entering or placing, other than by the use of voice, anything\ninto the phone, or sending or looking at anything that is in the\nphone;\n(c) turning the phone on or off;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 299\n(d) operating any other function of the phone.\n","sortOrder":304},{"sectionNumber":"300A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with or interrupting funeral procession","content":"300A Interfering with or interrupting funeral procession\nA driver must not interfere with, or interrupt, the free passage along\nany length of road of:\n(a) any funeral procession; or\n(b) any vehicle or person apparently forming part of a funeral\nprocession.\nDivision 2 Rules for people in charge of animals\n","sortOrder":305},{"sectionNumber":"301","sectionType":"section","heading":"Leading an animal while in or on a vehicle","content":"301 Leading an animal while in or on a vehicle\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle must not lead an animal, including by\ntethering the animal to the motor vehicle, unless the driver is\npermitted to do so under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\n(2) A person who is a passenger in, or on any part of, a motor vehicle\nmust not lead an animal while the motor vehicle is moving unless\nthe passenger is permitted to do so under another law of this\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not lead an animal, including by\ntethering the animal to the bicycle, unless the rider is permitted to\ndo so under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 300\n","sortOrder":306},{"sectionNumber":"302","sectionType":"section","heading":"Rider of an animal on a footpath or nature strip to give way to","content":"302 Rider of an animal on a footpath or nature strip to give way to\npedestrians\nThe rider of an animal must give way to any pedestrian on a\nfootpath or nature strip.\n1 Footpath and nature strip are defined in the dictionary, and pedestrian is\ndefined in rule 18.\n2 For this rule, give way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary,\n303 Riding an animal alongside more than one other rider\n(1) The rider of an animal must not ride on a road that is not a multi-\nlane road alongside more than one other rider, unless subrule (3)\napplies to the rider.\nNote\nMulti-lane road is defined in the dictionary, and rider is defined in rule 17.\n(2) The rider of an animal must not ride in a marked lane alongside\nmore than one other rider in the marked lane, unless subrule (3)\napplies to the rider.\nNote\n(3) The rider of an animal may ride alongside more than one other rider\nif the rider is:\n(a) overtaking the other riders or droving stock; or\n(b) permitted to do so under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\n(4) If the rider of an animal is riding on a road that is not a multi-lane\nroad alongside another rider, or in a marked lane alongside another\nrider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not over 1.5 metres\nfrom the other rider.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 301\nroad does not include a road-related area, but includes a bicycle\npath, shared path and any shoulder of the road.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, road-related area is defined in rule 13,\nshared path is defined in rule 242, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.\nDivision 3 Obeying directions\n","sortOrder":307},{"sectionNumber":"304","sectionType":"section","heading":"Direction by a police officer or authorised person","content":"304 Direction by a police officer or authorised person\n(1) A person must obey any reasonable direction for the safe and\nefficient regulation of traffic given to the person by a police officer or\nauthorised person, whether or not the person may contravene\nanother provision of the Australian Road Rules by obeying the\ndirection.\nNote\n(2) It is a defence to the prosecution of a person for an offence against\na provision of the Australian Road Rules if, at the time of the\noffence, the person was obeying a direction given to the person\nunder subrule (1).\n","sortOrder":308},{"sectionNumber":"Part 19","sectionType":"part","heading":"Exemptions","content":"Part 19 Exemptions\n","sortOrder":309},{"sectionNumber":"305","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for drivers of police vehicles","content":"305 Exemption for drivers of police vehicles\n(1) A provision of the Australian Road Rules does not apply to the\ndriver of a police vehicle if:\n(a) in the circumstances:\n(i) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n(ii) it is reasonable that the provision should not apply; and\n(b) if the vehicle is a motor vehicle that is moving – the vehicle is\ndisplaying a blue or red flashing light or sounding an alarm.\nNote\nMotor vehicle and police vehicle is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 302\n(2) Subrule (1)(b) does not apply to the driver if, in the circumstances, it\nis reasonable:\n(a) not to display the light or sound the alarm; or\n(b) for the vehicle not to be fitted or equipped with a blue or red\nflashing light or an alarm.\n","sortOrder":310},{"sectionNumber":"306","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for drivers of emergency vehicles","content":"306 Exemption for drivers of emergency vehicles\nA provision of the Australian Road Rules does not apply to the\ndriver of an emergency vehicle if:\n(a) in the circumstances:\n(i) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n(ii) it is reasonable that the rule should not apply; and\n(b) if the vehicle is a motor vehicle that is moving – the vehicle is\ndisplaying a blue or red flashing light or sounding an alarm.\nNote\nEmergency vehicle and motor vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":311},{"sectionNumber":"307","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and parking exemption for police and emergency","content":"307 Stopping and parking exemption for police and emergency\nvehicles and authorised persons\n(1) A provision of Part 12 does not apply to the driver of a police\nvehicle or emergency vehicle if, in the circumstances:\n(a) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n1 Emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A provision of Part 12 does not apply to a driver who is an\nauthorised person driving a vehicle in the course of his or her duty\nas an authorised person if, in the circumstances:\n(a) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\nNote\nAuthorised person is defined in the dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 303\n","sortOrder":312},{"sectionNumber":"308","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for police officers and emergency workers on foot","content":"308 Exemption for police officers and emergency workers on foot\nA provision in Part 14 does not apply to a police officer or\nemergency worker acting in the course of his or her duty if, in the\ncircumstances:\n(a) the police officer or emergency worker is taking reasonable\ncare; and\n1 Emergency worker and police officer are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Part 14 provides rules for pedestrians.\n309 Exemption for drivers of trams etc.\nThe following provisions do not apply to the driver of a tram, the\ndriver of a tram recovery vehicle engaged in accessing or\nrecovering a disabled tram, or the driver of a public bus travelling\nalong tram tracks:\n• Part 4 (Making turns), Division 1 (Left turns at intersections)\n• rule 88 (Left turn signs)\n• rule 89 (Right turn signs)\n• rule 90 (No turns signs)\n• rule 91 (No left turn and no right turn signs)\n• rule 92 (Traffic lane arrows)\n• rule 99 (Keep left and keep right signs)\n• rule 100 (No entry signs)\n• Part 9 (Roundabouts)\n• Part 11 (Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules),\nDivisions 2 (Keeping to the left), 3 (Overtaking),\nand 7 (Passing trams and safety zones)\n• Part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking).\nNote\nPublic bus, tram, tram recovery vehicle and travelling along tram tracks are\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 304\n","sortOrder":313},{"sectionNumber":"310","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for road workers etc.","content":"310 Exemption for road workers etc.\n(1) A provision mentioned in subrule (2) does not apply to a person at\nthe site of, and engaged in, roadworks if, in the circumstances:\n(a) it is not practicable for the person to comply with the provision;\nand\n(b) sufficient warning of the roadworks has been given to other\nroad users.\nNote\nRoadworks is defined in subrule (4).\n(2) Subrule (1) applies to the following provisions:\n• Part 4 (Making turns), Division 1 (Left turns) and Division 2\n(Right turns)\n• Part 7 (Giving way), except:\n– rule 67 (Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop\nline at an intersection without traffic lights)\n– rule 68 (Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop\nline at other places)\n– rule 69 (Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at\nan intersection)\n– rule 70 (Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or\nlength of narrow road)\n– rule 71 (Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at\nother places)\n• Part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings), except:\n– rule 102 (Clearance and low clearance signs)\n– rule 103 (Load limit signs)\n• rule 224 (Using horns and similar warning devices)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 305\n• Part 14 (Rules for pedestrians), except rule 236 (1) (which is\nabout causing a traffic hazard by moving into the path of an\napproaching vehicle)\n• rule 264 (Wearing of seatbelts by drivers)\n• rule 265 (Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old, or\nolder)\n• rule 268 (How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle)\n• rule 290 (Driving on a traffic island)\n• rule 295 (Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with a towline)\n• rule 296 (Driving a vehicle in reverse)\n• rule 297 (2) (which requires a driver to have a clear view of the\nsurrounding road and traffic)\n• rule 298 (Driving with a person in a trailer).\n(3) Rule 20 (Obeying the speed-limit) does not apply to a driver:\n(a) driving a snow-clearing vehicle and engaged in snow-clearing;\nor\n(b) driving a motor vehicle and engaged in speed zoning tests\nauthorised under another law of this jurisdiction.\nroadworks means:\n(a) construction or maintenance of a road; or\n(b) road cleaning; or\n(c) installation or maintenance work authorised under another law\nof this jurisdiction on, above or below a road; or\n(d) installation or maintenance of a traffic control device, traffic-\nrelated item or traffic monitoring device; or\n(e) a traffic survey authorised under another law of this\njurisdiction; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 306\n(f) a road surface survey test.\nNote\n1 Traffic control device and traffic-related item are defined in the dictionary.\n2 A person may need to be authorised under another law of this jurisdiction to\ncarry out roadworks or tests mentioned in this rule\n311 Exemption for oversize vehicles\n(1) A provision mentioned in subrule (2) does not apply to the driver of\nan oversize vehicle, or the driver of a vehicle escorting or piloting\nan oversize vehicle, if:\n(a) it is not practicable for the driver to comply with the provision;\nand\n(b) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n(c) the driver is complying with any other relevant law of this\njurisdiction relating to oversize vehicles, including the\nconditions of any permit or authority issued in relation to the\noversize vehicle\nNote\nOversize vehicle is defined in the dictionary.\n• Part 7 (Giving way), except:\n– rule 67 (Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop\nline at an intersection without traffic lights)\n– rule 68 (Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop\nline at other places)\n– rule 69 (Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at\nan intersection)\n– rule 70 (Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or\nlength of narrow road)\n– rule 71 (Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at\nother places)\n• Part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings), except:\n– rule 102 (Clearance and low clearance signs)\n– rule 103 (Load limit signs)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 307\n• rule 111 (3) (which is about entering a roundabout from the\nright marked lane or line of traffic)\n• rule 116 (Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving\na roundabout)\n• rule 268 (How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle)\n• rule 290 (Driving on a traffic island)\n• rule 296 (Driving a vehicle in reverse)\n• rule 297 (2) (which requires a driver to have a clear view of the\nsurrounding road and traffic).\n","sortOrder":314},{"sectionNumber":"312","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for tow truck drivers","content":"312 Exemption for tow truck drivers\n(1) It is a defence to the prosecution of the driver of a tow truck for an\noffence against a provision mentioned in subrule (2) if, at the time\nof the offence:\n(a) the driver is engaged in loading, or connecting to, a vehicle to\nwhich this rule applies; and\n(c) the tow truck is displaying a flashing light; and\n• Part 4 (Making turns)\n• Part 6 (Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red lights)\n• Part 7 (Giving way), Division 1 (Places with stop signs, stop\nlines, give way signs or give way lines)\n• Part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings)\n• Part 9 (Roundabouts)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 308\n• rule 290 (Driving on a traffic island).\n(3) This rule applies to the following vehicles:\n(a) a vehicle at the scene of a crash;\n(b) a disabled vehicle;\n(c) a vehicle unsafely or unlawfully parked that the driver is\nauthorised to tow away under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nCrash is defined in the dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n","sortOrder":315},{"sectionNumber":"313","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for postal vehicles","content":"313 Exemption for postal vehicles\n(1) Another law of this jurisdiction may provide that a provision\nmentioned in subrule (2) does not apply to the driver of a postal\nNote\nPostal vehicle is defined in the dictionary.\n(2) This rule applies to the following provisions:\n• rule 179 (Stopping in a loading zone)\n• rule 180 (Stopping in a truck zone)\n• rule 182 (Stopping in a taxi zone)\n• rule 184 (Stopping in a minibus zone)\n• rule 185 (Stopping in a permit zone)\n• rule 186 (Stopping in a mail zone)\n• rule 189 (Double parking)\n• rule 190 (Stopping in or near a safety zone)\n• rule 191 (Stopping near an obstruction)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 309\n• rule 192 (Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc.)\n• rule 193 (Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up area)\n• rule 198 (Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway\netc.).\nNote\n1 Exemptions for postal vehicles that are motorbikes (with or without a trailer)\nare contained in rule 288 and rule 289.\n2 The application of this rule is modified by regulation 87 of the Traffic\n313A Exemption for garbage truck drivers etc.\nAnother law of this jurisdiction may provide that a provision of the\nAustralian Road Rules that is specified in the other law does not\napply to the driver of a garbage or waste disposal truck while:\n(a) the driver is engaged in the collection of waste or garbage;\nand\n(c) the garbage or waste disposal truck is displaying a flashing\nlight; and\n","sortOrder":316},{"sectionNumber":"313B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for breakdown vehicles","content":"313B Exemption for breakdown vehicles\n(1) Another law of this jurisdiction may provide that a provision\nmentioned in subrule (2) does not apply to the driver of a\nbreakdown vehicle while:\n(a) the driver is engaged in repairing a disabled vehicle or is\nassisting a person to gain access to a vehicle in which the\nperson has locked the person's vehicle access key; and\n(c) the breakdown vehicle is displaying a flashing light; and\n• rule 137 (Keeping off dividing strips)\n• rule 138 (Keeping off a painted island)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 310\n• rule 147 (Moving from one marked lane to another marked lane\nacross a continuous line separating the lanes)\n• rule 197 (Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip or\npainted island)\n• rule 288(1) (Driving on a path)\n• rule 290 (Driving on a traffic island).\nbreakdown vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person who is:\n(a) a breakdown worker; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of his or her duties as a\nbreakdown worker.\n1 Vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nbreakdown worker means a person who is a breakdown worker\nfor this rule under another law of this jurisdiction.\n","sortOrder":317},{"sectionNumber":"Part 20","sectionType":"part","heading":"Traffic control devices and traffic-related items","content":"Part 20 Traffic control devices and traffic-related items\nNote\nTraffic control device and traffic-related item are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":318},{"sectionNumber":"314","sectionType":"section","heading":"Diagrams of traffic control devices, traffic-related items and","content":"314 Diagrams of traffic control devices, traffic-related items and\nsymbols\n(1) A diagram in the Australian Road Rules of a traffic control device,\ntraffic-related item, or symbol, represents a likeness of the device,\nitem or symbol.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 311\n(2) If there are 2 or more diagrams of a traffic sign in Schedules 2\nand 3, or of a traffic-related item or symbol in Schedule 4, each\ndiagram represents a likeness of a permitted version of the sign,\nitem or symbol.\n1 Traffic sign is defined in the dictionary.\n2 A number of traffic signs, traffic-related items or symbols have 2 or more\npermitted versions.\n(3) If a diagram of a traffic sign in Schedule 2 or 3, or of a traffic-related\nitem or symbol in Schedule 4, is in black and white, the permitted\nversion of the sign, item or symbol is in black and white only.\n(4) If a diagram of a traffic sign, traffic-related item or symbol in a rule\nof the Australian Road Rules is in black and white and the sign,\nitem or symbol is not in black and white only in Schedule 2, 3 or 4,\nthe diagram is a black and white representation of the sign, item or\nsymbol, and is not a permitted version of the sign, item or symbol.\nNote\nThe permitted version is the version shown in Schedule 2, 3 or 4 (which is in\ncolour) – see rules 316(1)(a) and 320(1)(a).\n","sortOrder":319},{"sectionNumber":"315","sectionType":"section","heading":"Legal effect of traffic control devices mentioned in the","content":"315 Legal effect of traffic control devices mentioned in the\n(1) A traffic control device of a kind mentioned in the Australian Road\nRules has effect for the Rules if:\n(a) the device is on a road; and\n(b) the device complies substantially with the Rules.\n2 Rule 322(1) and (2) explain the meaning of a traffic control device on a road.\n(2) A traffic control device is taken to comply substantially with the\nAustralian Road Rules unless the contrary is proved.\n","sortOrder":320},{"sectionNumber":"316","sectionType":"section","heading":"When do traffic control devices comply substantially with the","content":"316 When do traffic control devices comply substantially with the\n(1) A traffic sign complies substantially with the Australian Road Rules\nif:\n(a) it is a reasonable likeness of a diagram in Schedule 2 or 3 of\nthat kind of traffic sign; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 312\n(b) for a traffic sign of a kind for which there is not a diagram in\n","sortOrder":321},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 2","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"or 3 – it complies substantially with a description","content":"Schedule 2 or 3 – it complies substantially with a description\nof that kind of traffic sign in the Rules and, if the description\nincludes a symbol for which there is a diagram in Schedule 4,\nthe symbol on the sign is a reasonable likeness of the\ndiagram.\n1 Traffic sign is defined in the dictionary.\n2 The diagrams of traffic signs in Schedules 2 and 3 are in alphabetical order.\n(2) A road marking complies substantially with the Australian Road\nRules if it complies substantially with a description of that kind of\nroad marking in the Rules and, if the description includes a symbol\nfor which there is a diagram in Schedule 4, the symbol in the road\nmarking is a reasonable likeness of the diagram.\nNote\n(3) A traffic control device (except a traffic sign or a road marking)\ncomplies substantially with the Australian Road Rules if the device\ncomplies substantially with a description of that kind of traffic control\ndevice in the Rules and, if the description includes a symbol for\nwhich there is a diagram in Schedule 4, the symbol on the device is\na reasonable likeness of the diagram.\n1 A children's crossing may have a red and white post missing temporarily. The\nmissing post does not prevent the crossing from meeting the description of\nsuch a crossing that is set out in rule 80(6).\n2 A freeway may have several freeway signs missing. The missing signs do not\nprevent the area from still being considered to be a freeway.\n(4) A traffic sign may be a reasonable likeness of a diagram of a kind of\ntraffic sign mentioned in the Australian Road Rules even though:\n(a) the dimensions of the sign, or of anything on the sign, are\ndifferent; or\n(b) the sign has additional information on or with it; or\n(c) the number on the sign is different; or\n(d) the sign has a different number of panels; or\n(e) the sign is combined on a single panel with one or more other\ntraffic signs; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 313\n(f) for a parking control sign – words, figures, symbols, or\nanything else, on the sign are differently arranged; or\n(g) for a bus lane sign, emergency stopping lane only sign, one-\nway sign or parking control sign – the sign has an arrow\npointing in a different direction; or\n(h) for a separated footpath sign or an end separated footpath\nsign – the pedestrian and bicycle symbols are reversed; or\n(i) for a road access sign – information on or with the sign\nindicates (whether by different wording or in another way) that\nit applies to different or additional vehicles or persons; or\n(j) there is a variation in shade or brightness between a colour on\nthe sign and the equivalent colour in the diagram.\nExample of subrule (4)(b)\nA speed-limit sign near a school may say that the sign has effect at certain times.\nThis additional information does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness\nof the diagram of a speed-limit sign in Schedule 2.\nExample of subrule (4)(c)\nThe diagram of the area speed-limit sign in Schedule 2 has the number ’60’. A\nparticular area speed-limit sign may have another number eg ’50’ The different\nnumber on the sign does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness of the\ndiagram.\nExamples of subrule (4)(d)\n1 A school zone sign may have the indicated speed limit, the words ‘school\nzone’, and the times of operation, on a single panel or separate panels.\n2 An end bicycle path sign may have the word \"end\" on a separate panel or on\nthe same panel as the rest of the sign.\nExample of subrule (4)(e)\nA no parking sign that operates at certain times may be combined on a single\npanel with a permissive parking sign allowing pay parking at other times.\nExample of subrule (4)(f)\nA permissive parking sign limiting parking to 2 hours may have the time limit\nabove, or below, the word \"parking\".\nExample of subrule (4)(i)\nThe diagram of the road access sign in Schedule 2 says \"no pedestrians bicycles\nanimals beyond this point\". The replacement of the word \"bicycles\" by the word\n\"tractors\" on a particular sign does not prevent the sign being a reasonable\nlikeness of the diagram.\nNote\nBicycle symbol, parking control sign, pedestrian symbol and with are\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 314\n(5) A variable illuminated message sign may also be a reasonable\nlikeness of a diagram of a kind of traffic sign in Schedule 2 or 3\neven though the colour of the sign, or of anything else on the sign,\nis different.\nNote\nVariable illuminated message sign is defined in the dictionary.\nExample of standard sign and variable illuminated message sign\nSpeed-limit signs\n(Variable illuminated message\nsign)\n(6) A symbol on or in a traffic control device may be a reasonable\nlikeness of a diagram of a kind of symbol mentioned in the\nAustralian Road Rules even though the dimensions of the symbol,\nor of anything on the symbol, are different.\npanel includes a board, plate and screen.\n","sortOrder":322},{"sectionNumber":"317","sectionType":"section","heading":"Information on or with traffic control devices","content":"317 Information on or with traffic control devices\n(1) A traffic control device may, by the use of words, figures, symbols\nor anything else, indicate any of the following:\n(a) the times, days or circumstances when it applies or does not\napply;\n(b) the lengths of road or areas where it applies or does not apply;\n(c) the persons to whom it applies or does not apply;\n(d) the vehicles to which it applies or does not apply;\n(e) other information.\nExamples of circumstances\n1 A speed-limit sign may indicate that it applies when the lights at a children's\ncrossing are flashing.\n2 A speed-limit sign may indicate that it applies when children are present.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 315\ntraffic control device includes a board, device, plate, screen,\nword, figure, symbol, or anything else, with a traffic control device\nthat provides information about the application of the traffic control\nExamples of information with a traffic control device\n1 A plate erected immediately below a no U-turn sign indicating that the sign\napplies on Monday to Friday between 8 am and 6 pm.\n2 An illuminated board erected close to, but not next to, a no entry sign\nindicating that commercial trucks are permitted to pass the sign when the\nwords on the board are illuminated.\nNote\nWith includes accompanying or reasonably associated with – see the definition in\n","sortOrder":323},{"sectionNumber":"318","sectionType":"section","heading":"Limited effect of certain traffic control devices","content":"318 Limited effect of certain traffic control devices\n(1) If information on a traffic control device indicates that the device\napplies during particular times, on particular days, in particular\ncircumstances, to a particular length of road or area, or to particular\npersons or vehicles, the device has effect only for the indicated\ntimes, days, circumstances, length of road, area, persons or\nA shared zone sign on a road into an area indicating that the sign applies on\nMonday to Friday between 7 am and 6 pm.\n(2) If information on a traffic control device indicates that the device\ndoes not apply during particular times, on particular days, in\nparticular circumstances, to a particular length of road or area, or to\nparticular persons or vehicles, the device does not have effect for\nthe indicated times, days, circumstances, length of road, area,\npersons or vehicles.\n1 A plate erected next to a pedestrian crossing sign at a place indicating that\nthe sign does not apply on a particular day.\n2 A board erected close to a bus lane sign above a marked lane indicating that\nthe sign does not apply when the words on the board are illuminated.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 316\n(3) If information on a traffic control device that is at a place indicates\nthat it applies on a particular day of the week, the device does not\nhave effect on a day that is a public holiday for the place unless\ninformation on the device states otherwise.\nIf a loading zone sign indicates that it applies on Monday to Friday between 9 am\nand 4 pm and information on or with the sign does not indicate that it applies on\npublic holidays, the sign does not have effect on any public holiday falling on a\nMonday to Friday.\nNote\nPublic holiday is defined in the dictionary.\ntraffic control device includes a board, device, plate, screen,\nword, figure, symbol, or anything else, with a traffic control device\nthat provides information about the application of the traffic control\n","sortOrder":324},{"sectionNumber":"319","sectionType":"section","heading":"Legal effect of traffic-related items mentioned in the Australian","content":"319 Legal effect of traffic-related items mentioned in the Australian\nRoad Rules\n(1) A traffic-related item of a kind mentioned in the Australian Road\nRules has effect for the Rules if:\n(a) the item is on a road, or on a vehicle on a road; and\n(b) the item complies substantially with the Rules.\n(2) A traffic-related item is taken to comply with the Australian Road\nRules unless the contrary is proved.\n2 Rule 322(1) and (2) explain the meaning of a traffic control device on a road.\n","sortOrder":325},{"sectionNumber":"320","sectionType":"section","heading":"When do traffic-related items comply substantially with the","content":"320 When do traffic-related items comply substantially with the\n(1) A traffic-related item complies substantially with the Australian\nRoad Rules if:\n(a) it is a reasonable likeness of a diagram in Schedule 4 of that\nkind of traffic-related item; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 317\n(b) for a traffic-related item of a kind for which there is not a\ndiagram in Schedule 4 – it complies substantially with a\ndescription of that kind of traffic-related item in the Rules and,\nif the description includes a symbol for which there is a\ndiagram in Schedule 4, the symbol on the item is a reasonable\nlikeness of the diagram.\n(2) A traffic-related item may be a reasonable likeness of a diagram of\na kind of traffic-related item mentioned in the Australian Road Rules\neven though:\n(a) the dimensions of the item, or of anything on the item, are\ndifferent; or\n(b) the item has additional information.\n(3) A symbol on a traffic-related item may be a reasonable likeness of\na diagram of a kind of symbol mentioned in the Australian Road\nRules even though the dimensions of the symbol, or of anything on\nthe symbol, are different.\n","sortOrder":326},{"sectionNumber":"321","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of information on or with traffic control devices and","content":"321 Meaning of information on or with traffic control devices and\ntraffic-related items\nA word, figure, symbol or anything else used on or with a traffic\ncontrol device or traffic-related item has the same meaning as in\nNote\nRule 347 and Schedule 1 deal with the meaning of certain abbreviations and\nsymbols.\n","sortOrder":327},{"sectionNumber":"322","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to traffic control devices and traffic-related items","content":"322 References to traffic control devices and traffic-related items\non a road etc.\n(1) A traffic control device or traffic-related item above or near a road is\ntaken to be on the road.\n1 A speed-limit sign erected on a post at the side of a road is taken to be a\nspeed-limit sign on the road.\n2 A traffic lane arrow on a structure immediately above the road is taken to be a\ntraffic lane arrow on the road.\n3 A do not overtake turning vehicle sign attached to a vehicle on a road is taken\nto be a do not overtake turning vehicle sign on the road.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 318\n(2) However, the device or item is taken to be on the road only if it is\nclearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to apply.\nA shared zone sign erected on a post near the side of a road is a traffic sign on\nthe road only if it is clearly visible to drivers driving on the road during the day\nand in normal weather conditions.\nNote\nClearly visible is defined in subrule (8).\n(3) A traffic control device or traffic-related item above or near an area\nor place is taken to be in or at the area or place.\n1 Traffic lights erected outside the area of an intersection, but near that area,\nare taken to be traffic lights at the intersection.\n2 A hook turn only sign fixed to a structure above a road that is close to, but\nbefore, an intersection is taken to be a hook turn only sign at the intersection.\n3 A parking control sign near the side of a road is taken to be at the side of the\n4 A parking control sign near the centre of a road is taken to be at the centre of\n(4) However, the device or item is taken to be in or at the area or place\nonly if it is clearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to\napply.\nA no right turn sign suspended from wires above a road close to, but before, an\nintersection is a traffic sign at the intersection only if it is clearly visible to drivers\napproaching the intersection during the day and in normal weather conditions.\n(5) Without limiting subrule (3), a traffic control device or traffic-related\nitem above or near a break in a dividing strip is taken to be at the\nbreak.\nA no U-turn sign erected in a dividing strip close to, but before, a break in the\ndividing strip is taken to be at the break.\nNote\nDividing strip is defined in the dictionary.\n(6) However, the device or item is taken to be at the break only if it is\nclearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to apply.\n(7) A traffic control device or traffic-related item is taken to comply with\nsubrule (2), (4) or (6) unless the contrary is proved.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 319\n(8) In this rule:\nclearly visible means:\n(a) for a traffic signal – clearly visible during the day and night in\nnormal weather conditions; or\n(b) for another traffic control device or a traffic-related item –\nclearly visible during the day in normal weather conditions.\nNote\nNight is defined in the dictionary.\nday means the period between sunrise on a day and sunset on the\nsame day.\nnormal weather conditions means weather conditions that are not\nhazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.\n","sortOrder":328},{"sectionNumber":"323","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to lights that are traffic signals","content":"323 References to lights that are traffic signals\nA reference in the Australian Road Rules to a light that is, or is part\nof, traffic signals is a reference to a steady light, unless otherwise\nexpressly stated.\nNote\nTraffic signals is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":329},{"sectionNumber":"323A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Audible lines","content":"323A Audible lines\n(1) An audible line is a line on a road that is made up of a series of\nclosely spaced raised pieces of material designed to create a\ncontinuous noise or vibration if driven on by a motor vehicle.\nNote\n(2) A reference in the Australian Road Rules to a line is to be taken to\ninclude a reference to an audible line, unless otherwise expressly\nstated.\n(3) For the purposes of the Australian Road Rules:\n(a) an audible line is to be taken to be continuous even if there is\nno physical link between the pieces of material that make up\nthe line;\n(b) if there is no physical link between those pieces, the colour of\nthe audible line is to be taken to be the visible colour of those\npieces.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 320\nDivision 2 Application of traffic control devices to lengths of\nroads and areas\nNote\nArea, length of road and traffic control device are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":330},{"sectionNumber":"324","sectionType":"section","heading":"Purpose of Division","content":"324 Purpose of Division\n(1) This Division contains rules explaining when traffic control devices\napply to lengths of road and areas.\n(2) Other relevant rules are found elsewhere in the Australian Road\nRules.\nNote\nThese rules include:\n• rule 21(3) – length of road to which a speed-limit sign applies\n• rule 22(2) – speed-limited area\n• rule 23(2) – school zone\n• rule 24(2) – shared zone\n• rule 39(3) – length of road to which a no U-turn sign applies\n• rule 93(2) – length of road to which a no overtaking or passing sign applies\n• rule 97(2) – length of road to which a road access sign applies\n• rule 98(2) – length of road to which a one-way sign applies\n• rule 108(3) – length of road to which a trucks and buses low gear sign applies\n• rule 130(3) – length of road to which a keep left unless overtaking sign\napplies\n• rule 159(2) – length of road to which a traffic sign indicating a marked lane for\na particular kind of vehicle applies\n• rule 176(2) and (3) – length of road to which a clearway sign applies\n• rule 177(3) – length of road to which a freeway sign applies\n• rule 252(2) – length of road or footpath to which a no bicycles sign, or no\nbicycles road marking, applies.\n","sortOrder":331},{"sectionNumber":"325","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to traffic control devices – application to lengths of","content":"325 References to traffic control devices – application to lengths of\nroad and areas\nIn applying the Australian Road Rules to a length of road or an\narea, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference to a traffic\ncontrol device is a reference to a traffic control device applying to\nthe length of road or area.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 321\n","sortOrder":332},{"sectionNumber":"326","sectionType":"section","heading":"When do traffic control devices apply to a length of road or","content":"326 When do traffic control devices apply to a length of road or\narea – the basic rules\n(1) A traffic control device applies to a length of road or an area if:\n(a) the device applies to the length of road or area under one or\nmore provisions of the Australian Road Rules; or\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the length of\nroad or area.\nNote\n(2) A traffic control device does not apply to a length of road or an area\nif information on or with the device expressly indicates that it does\nnot apply to the length of road or area.\n(3) Subrule (2) applies despite any other provision of this Division.\n","sortOrder":333},{"sectionNumber":"327","sectionType":"section","heading":"Length of road to which a traffic sign (except a parking control","content":"327 Length of road to which a traffic sign (except a parking control\nsign) applies\nThe length of road to which a traffic sign on a road (except a\nparking control sign) applies is worked out in the direction driven by\na driver, or travelled by a pedestrian, on the road who faces the\nsign before passing it.\nRule 21(3) provides that a speed-limit sign applies to the length of road beginning\nat the sign and ending at the nearest of a different speed-limit sign, an end\nspeed-limit sign, or speed derestriction sign, and the end of the road. Only the\nnearest of those things, in the direction driven by a driver, or travelled by a\npedestrian, who faces the sign before passing it, is relevant.\n1 Parking control sign and traffic sign are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 332 deals with parking control signs that display an arrow. These signs\napply to lengths of road.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 322\n","sortOrder":334},{"sectionNumber":"328","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to a traffic control device applying to a length of","content":"328 References to a traffic control device applying to a length of\nroad\nIf, under the Australian Road Rules, a traffic control device on a\nroad applies to a length of road, the device applies only to a length\nof road on that road, unless otherwise expressly stated.\nA speed-limit sign on a road does not apply to roads leading off from the road.\nNote\n","sortOrder":335},{"sectionNumber":"329","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control devices applying to a marked lane","content":"329 Traffic control devices applying to a marked lane\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to a marked\nlane if:\n(a) it is above the marked lane; or\n(b) it is near the marked lane, and the device, the position of the\ndevice, or information on or with the device, indicates that it\napplies to the marked lane.\nAn emergency stopping lane only sign applies to the marked lane indicated by\nthe arrow on the sign.\nNote\nMarked lane, road marking and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A road marking applies to a marked lane if it is on the surface of the\n(3) However, a traffic control device does not apply to a marked lane if\ndoes not apply to the marked lane.\n","sortOrder":336},{"sectionNumber":"330","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control devices applying to a slip lane","content":"330 Traffic control devices applying to a slip lane\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to a slip lane\nif:\n(a) it is above the slip lane; or\n(b) it is near the slip lane and on the left side of the slip lane; or\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 323\n(c) it is near the slip lane, and the device, the position of the\ndevice, or information on or with the device, indicates that it\napplies to the slip lane.\nNote\nRoad marking, slip lane and with are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A road marking applies to a slip lane if it is on the surface of the slip\n(3) However, a traffic control device does not apply to a slip lane if\ndoes not apply to the slip lane.\n(4) In subrule (1)(c):\n","sortOrder":337},{"sectionNumber":"331","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control devices applying to an intersection","content":"331 Traffic control devices applying to an intersection\nA traffic control device applies to an intersection if it is at the\nintersection and does not apply to a slip lane at the intersection,\nunless information on or with the device expressly indicates that the\ndevice does not apply to the intersection.\n1 Intersection, slip lane and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device at an\narea, including an intersection.\n3 Rule 330 explains when a traffic control device applies to a slip lane.\n332 Parking control signs applying to a length of road\n(1) If a parking control sign displays an arrow and is at the side of a\nroad, then, unless information on or with the sign indicates\notherwise, the sign applies to the length of road between the sign\nand the nearest (in the direction indicated by the arrow) of the\n(a) a parking control sign at that side of the road that displays an\narrow indicating the opposite direction;\n(b) a yellow edge line on the road;\n1 Edge line, parking control sign, T-intersection and with are defined in the\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 324\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device in or at\nan area or place.\n(2) If a parking control sign displays an arrow and is at the centre of a\nroad or on a dividing strip, then, unless information on or with the\nsign indicates otherwise, the sign applies to the length of road\nbetween the sign and the nearest (in the direction indicated by the\narrow) of the following:\n(a) a parking control sign at the centre of the road or on the\ndividing strip that displays an arrow indicating the opposite\ndirection;\n(b) a yellow edge line on the road;\nNote\nCentre of the road and dividing strip are defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":338},{"sectionNumber":"333","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking control signs applying to a length of road in an area to","content":"333 Parking control signs applying to a length of road in an area to\nwhich another parking control sign applies etc.\n(1) If a parking control sign that applies to a length of road is in an area\nto which another parking control sign applies in accordance with\nrule 335, the first parking control sign applies in the same way as it\nwould apply if it were not in that area, and the second parking\ncontrol sign does not apply to the length of road.\nParking control signs that establish a loading zone or taxi zone may operate on a\nlength of road in an area where parking is otherwise restricted to residents only\nby other parking control signs on each road into the area.\nNote\n(2) If the area indicated by a people with disabilities road marking is in\nan area to which a parking control sign applies in accordance with\nrule 335, the road marking applies in the same way as it would\napply if it were not in that area, and the parking control sign does\nnot apply to the area indicated by the road marking.\nNote\nPeople with disabilities road marking is defined in rule 203.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 325\n","sortOrder":339},{"sectionNumber":"334","sectionType":"section","heading":"How parking control signs apply to a length of road","content":"334 How parking control signs apply to a length of road\n(1) If a permissive parking sign, bicycle parking sign or motor bike\nparking sign, or a zone sign mentioned in Part 12, Division 5\napplies to a length of road and there are parking bays on the length\nof road, the sign applies only to the parking bays, unless\ninformation on or with the sign indicates otherwise.\n1 Parking bay and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 201 deals with bicycle parking signs, rule 202 deals with motor bike\nparking signs, and rule 204 deals with permissive parking signs.\n(2) If a parking control sign applies to a length of road, the sign is at the\nside of the road, and there are no parking bays to which the sign\napplies, then, unless information on or with the sign indicates\notherwise, the sign applies to:\n(a) any shoulder of the road on that side of the road; and\n(b) the part of the road on the length of road that extends from the\nfar side of the road (excluding any road-related area) on that\nside of the road for:\n(i) if the sign, or information on or with the sign, includes\nthe words ‘angle parking' or ‘angle' – 6 metres; or\n(ii) in any other case – 3 metres.\nNote\nPart of a road to which a\nparking control sign indicating\nangle parking applies\nPart of a road to which a\nparking control sign (except a\nsign indicating angle parking)\napplies\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 326\n(3) If a parking control sign applies to a length of road, the sign is at the\ncentre of the road or on a dividing strip, and there are no parking\nbays to which the sign applies, then, unless information on or with\nthe sign indicates otherwise, the sign applies to:\n(a) if the sign is at the centre of the road, but not on a dividing\nstrip – the part of the road on that length of road that extends\n3 metres from the centre of the road on each side of the road;\nor\n(b) if the sign is on a dividing strip – the dividing strip on that\nlength of road and the part of the road on that length of road\nthat extends 3 metres from each edge of the dividing strip.\n1 Centre of the road and dividing strip are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 322(3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device in or at\nan area or place.\n335 Traffic control devices applying to an area\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to an area if:\n(a) it is in the area; and\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the area.\n1 Road marking and with are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 332 deals with parking control signs that display arrows. These signs\napply to lengths of road.\n(2) A traffic control device (except a road marking) also applies to an\narea if:\n(a) there is an identical kind of traffic control device (the first\ntraffic control device) on each road into the area; and\n(b) the traffic control device is a traffic control device applying to\nan area, or information on or with the device indicates that it\napplies to an area; and\n(c) information on or with a traffic control device on each road out\nof the area indicates that the first traffic control device no\nlonger applies or that the area has ended.\nExamples of traffic control devices applying to an area\n1 A school zone sign (in some circumstances – see rule 23).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 327\n2 A shared zone sign.\n3 A no stopping sign or no parking sign with the word \"area\".\n4 A permissive parking sign with the words \"parking area\".\n5 An end no parking area sign.\n6 An end no stopping area sign.\n7 An end parking area sign.\n(3) A road marking applies to an area if:\n(a) it is on the surface of the area; and\n(b) the road marking, the position of the road marking, or\ninformation in or with the road marking, indicates that the road\nmarking applies to the area.\n(4) However, a traffic control device does not apply to an area if\ndoes not apply to the area.\n(5) A parking control sign that applies to an area applies to parking\nbays on each length of road in the area, and to other parts of each\nlength of road, as if it were a parking control sign that applied only\nto that length of road.\n1 Parking bay and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 334 sets out how a parking control sign that applies to a length of road\nalso applies to parking bays and other parts of the road.\nroad, in subrule (2)(a) and (c) and for an area of road, does not\ninclude a road-related area.\nthe device, in subrule (1)(b), includes another traffic control device.\nthe road marking, in subrule (3)(b), includes another traffic control\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 328\n","sortOrder":340},{"sectionNumber":"336","sectionType":"section","heading":"How separated footpath signs and separated footpath road","content":"336 How separated footpath signs and separated footpath road\nmarkings apply\n(1) A separated footpath sign, or separated footpath road marking, on\na footpath applies in the way set out in this rule.\nNote\nFootpath is defined in the dictionary, and separated footpath and separated\nfootpath road marking are defined in rule 239.\n(2) The part of the footpath to the left of the centre of the footpath is\ndesignated:\n(a) if a pedestrian symbol is on the left side of the sign or the\npath – for the use of pedestrians; or\n(b) if a bicycle symbol is on the left side of the sign or the path –\nfor the use of bicycles.\nNote\nBicycle, bicycle symbol and pedestrian symbol are defined in the dictionary,\nand pedestrian is defined in rule 18.\n(3) The part of the footpath to the right of the centre of the footpath is\ndesignated:\n(a) if a pedestrian symbol is on the right side of the sign or the\npath – for the use of pedestrians; or\n(b) if a bicycle symbol is on the right side of the sign or the path –\nfor the use of bicycles.\nDivision 3 Application of traffic control devices to persons\nNote\nTraffic control device is defined in the dictionary.\n","sortOrder":341},{"sectionNumber":"337","sectionType":"section","heading":"Purpose of Division","content":"337 Purpose of Division\nThis Division explains when a traffic control device applies to a\n","sortOrder":342},{"sectionNumber":"338","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to traffic control devices – application to persons","content":"338 References to traffic control devices – application to persons\nIn applying the Australian Road Rules to a person, unless the\ncontrary intention appears, a reference to a traffic control device is\na reference to a traffic control device applying to the person.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 329\n","sortOrder":343},{"sectionNumber":"339","sectionType":"section","heading":"When do traffic control devices apply to a person – the basic","content":"339 When do traffic control devices apply to a person – the basic\nrules\n(1) A traffic control device applies to a person if:\n(a) the device applies to the person under a provision of this\nDivision; or\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the person.\nNote\n(2) A traffic control device does not apply to a person if information on\nor with the device expressly indicates that it does not apply to the\n(3) Subrule (2) applies despite any other provision of this Division.\n","sortOrder":344},{"sectionNumber":"340","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control devices (except road markings and parking","content":"340 Traffic control devices (except road markings and parking\ncontrol signs)\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking or parking control\nsign) applies to a person if:\n(a) the device faces the person; or\n(b) the person has passed the device and the device faced the\nperson as the person approached it.\n1 Parking control sign and road marking are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 341 deals with road markings, and rule 346 with parking control signs.\n(2) However, the device does not apply to the person if the position of\nthe device indicates that it does not apply to the person.\n1 If a driver is driving in a marked lane of a multi-lane road, a traffic lane arrow\nabove another marked lane does not apply to the driver.\n2 If a driver is turning left using a slip lane at an intersection, a traffic light on\nthe right side of the painted island or traffic island that separates the slip lane\nfrom other parts of the road does not apply to the driver.\n3 If a driver is driving on a two-way road, a speed-limit sign facing only traffic\ntravelling in the opposite direction does not apply to the driver.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 330\n","sortOrder":345},{"sectionNumber":"341","sectionType":"section","heading":"Road markings","content":"341 Road markings\nA road marking on the surface of a road applies to a person on the\nroad unless the position of the road marking indicates that it does\nnot apply to the person.\n1 If a driver is driving on a road that is not a multi-lane road or one-way road, a\nroad marking to the right of the centre of the road does not apply to the driver.\n2 If a driver is driving in a marked lane of a multi-lane road, a road marking in\nanother marked lane does not apply to the driver.\n3 At an intersection, or on a roundabout, road markings indicating the edge of a\nmarked lane for use by traffic coming from another direction do not apply to\n1 Road marking is defined in the dictionary.\n2 A person may, under another rule, be exempt from complying with particular\nroad markings – see, for example, rules 134, 138, 139, 147 and 150.\n342 Traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to a\nlength of road\n(1) A traffic sign (except a parking control sign) that applies to a length\nof road and to drivers applies to a driver driving on the length of\nroad if the driver is driving in the same direction as a driver on the\nroad who faces the sign before passing it.\nNote\nLength of road, parking control sign and traffic sign are defined in the\n(2) A traffic sign that applies to a length of road and to pedestrians\napplies to a pedestrian travelling on the length of road if the\npedestrian is travelling in the same direction as a pedestrian on the\nroad who faces the sign before passing it.\n(3) The traffic sign applies to the driver or pedestrian even though the\ndriver or pedestrian does not pass the sign.\nIf a driver turns from a side road or private land onto a length of road to which a\ntraffic sign applies, the traffic sign applies to the driver even though the driver\ndoes not pass the sign.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 331\n","sortOrder":346},{"sectionNumber":"343","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to an area","content":"343 Traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to an area\n(1) A traffic sign (except a parking control sign) that applies to an area\nand to drivers applies to a driver driving on any road in the area.\n1 Area, parking control sign and traffic sign are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 342 deals with traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to a\nlength of road, and rule 346 deals with the application of parking control signs\nto lengths of road and areas.\n3 Road includes a road-related area – see rule 11(2).\n(2) A traffic sign that applies to an area and to pedestrians applies to a\npedestrian on any road in the area.\n(3) The traffic sign applies to the driver or pedestrian even though the\ndriver or pedestrian does not pass the sign.\nThe shared zone signs on the roads into a shared zone apply to a driver who\nstarts a journey inside the shared zone.\n","sortOrder":347},{"sectionNumber":"344","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control devices applying to a driver in a marked lane","content":"344 Traffic control devices applying to a driver in a marked lane\nA traffic control device applying to a marked lane applies to a driver\napproaching, in or leaving the marked lane unless the position of\nthe device indicates that it does not apply to the driver.\nAn overhead lane control device above a marked lane that the driver does not\nface as the driver approaches it does not apply to the driver.\n1 Marked lane is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 329 deals with when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.\n345 Traffic control devices applying to a driver in a slip lane\nA traffic control device applying to a slip lane applies to a driver\napproaching, in or leaving the slip lane.\n1 Slip lane is defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 330 deals with when a traffic control device applies to a slip lane.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 332\n","sortOrder":348},{"sectionNumber":"346","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking control signs","content":"346 Parking control signs\n(1) A parking control sign that applies to a length of road applies to a\ndriver on the length of road.\n1 Length of road and parking control sign are defined in the dictionary.\n2 Rule 332 deals with parking control signs with arrows. These signs apply to\nlengths of road.\n(2) A parking control sign that applies to an area applies to a driver in\nNote\nArea is defined in the dictionary.\n(3) A parking control sign applies to a driver mentioned in subrule (1)\nor (2) even though the driver does not pass the sign.\n","sortOrder":349},{"sectionNumber":"Part 21","sectionType":"part","heading":"General","content":"Part 21 General\n","sortOrder":350},{"sectionNumber":"347","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of abbreviations and symbols","content":"347 Meaning of abbreviations and symbols\n(1) Schedule 1 provides the meaning of certain abbreviations and\nsymbols used in the Australian Road Rules and on traffic control\ndevices and traffic-related items.\nNote\nTraffic control device and traffic-related item are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) Another law of this jurisdiction may provide the meaning of other\nabbreviations or symbols on traffic control devices and traffic-\nrelated items.\n","sortOrder":351},{"sectionNumber":"348","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to a driver doing something etc.","content":"348 References to a driver doing something etc.\nIf the context permits, a reference in the Australian Road Rules to a\ndriver doing or not doing something is a reference to the driver\ncausing the driver's vehicle to do or not to do the thing.\nThe reference in rule 27 to a driver turning left at an intersection is a reference to\nthe driver causing the driver's vehicle to turn left at the intersection.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 333\n","sortOrder":352},{"sectionNumber":"349","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to certain kinds of roads","content":"349 References to certain kinds of roads\nA reference in the Australian Road Rules to a road of a particular\nkind is a reference to a road of that kind at any relevant place.\nRule 31 deals with a driver starting a right turn at an intersection from a road\n(except a multi-lane road). The rule applies to a particular driver only if the road\nfrom which the driver is turning is not a multi-lane road at the intersection. In\napplying the rule to the driver, it is irrelevant that the road is, or is not, a multi-\nlane road at another place away from the intersection.\n","sortOrder":353},{"sectionNumber":"350","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to stopping or parking on a length of road etc.","content":"350 References to stopping or parking on a length of road etc.\n(1) A driver stops or parks on a length of road, or in an area, if the\ndriver stops or parks the driver's vehicle so any part of the vehicle is\non the length of road or in the area.\nNote\nArea, driver's vehicle and length of road are defined in the dictionary.\n(2) A driver stops or parks within a particular distance from, before, or\nafter, something if the driver stops or parks the driver's vehicle so\nany part of the vehicle is within that distance.\nExample for subrule (2)\nRule 190 provides that a driver must not stop on a road within 10 metres before\nor after a safety zone. The example diagram in rule 190 shows a vehicle stopped\nso part of the vehicle is within 10 metres of the zone. For rule 190, the vehicle is\ntaken to be stopped within 10 metres of the zone.\n(3) A driver stops or parks on or across a driveway or other way of\naccess for vehicles if the driver stops or parks the driver's vehicle\nso that any part of the vehicle is on or across the driveway or way\nof access.\npark has the same meaning as in Part 12.\nstop has the same meaning as in Part 12.\n1 Part 12 deals with restrictions on stopping and parking.\n2 Park and stop are defined in the dictionary. The definitions apply for Part 12.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 334\n","sortOrder":354},{"sectionNumber":"351","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to left and right","content":"351 References to left and right\n(1) In applying the Australian Road Rules to a person, a reference to\nleft is a reference to:\n(a) in relation to the person – the left-hand side of the person; or\n(b) in relation to a line, sign or anything else – the left-hand side\nof the line, sign or other thing when viewed from the person's\nperspective.\n(2) In applying the Australian Road Rules to a person, a reference to\nright is a reference to:\n(a) in relation to the person – the right-hand side of the person; or\n(b) in relation to a line, sign or anything else – the right-hand side\nof the line, sign or other thing when viewed from the person's\nperspective.\n(3) A driver drives to the left, or right, of a line, sign or anything else\nonly if the driver's vehicle is completely to the left, or right, of the\nline, sign or other thing.\nNote\n","sortOrder":355},{"sectionNumber":"352","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to stopping as near as practicable to a place","content":"352 References to stopping as near as practicable to a place\nA requirement in the Australian Road Rules for a driver to stop as\nnear as practicable to a place is not complied with only because the\ndriver stops behind a vehicle that has stopped at the place.\nIf a driver stops behind a vehicle that has stopped at a stop sign or stop line in\naccordance with rule 67, 68 or 121, the driver must, after the vehicle has\nproceeded, stop at the stop sign or stop line in accordance with the rule.\n","sortOrder":356},{"sectionNumber":"353","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to pedestrians crossing a road","content":"353 References to pedestrians crossing a road\n(1) If a driver who is turning from a road at an intersection is required to\ngive way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is\nentering, the driver is only required to give way to the pedestrian if\nthe pedestrian's line of travel in crossing the road is essentially\nperpendicular to the edges of the road the driver is entering – the\ndriver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing\nthe road the driver is leaving.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 335\n(2) In these Rules, a reference to a pedestrian crossing a road includes\na reference to a person who is crossing only part of a road (for\nexample, a person walking to a safety zone or a median strip, or to\nthe middle of a road to display a hand-held stop sign).\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 336\n","sortOrder":357},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 1","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Abbreviations and symbols","content":"Schedule 1 Abbreviations and symbols\n(rule 347)\nAbbreviation/Symbol Meaning\nMON Monday\nTUE Tuesday\nWED Wednesday\nTHU Thursday\nFRI Friday\nSAT Saturday\nSUN Sunday\nJAN January\nFEB February\nMAR March\nAPR April\nJUN June\nJUL July\nAUG August\nSEP September\nOCT October\nNOV November\nDEC December\nAM the time after midnight and\nending at noon\nPM the time after noon and ending\nat midnight\nHOLS holidays\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 337\nAbbreviation/Symbol Meaning\nMAX maximum\nMINS minutes\nPUB public\nVEH vehicle\nt tonnes\nm metres\nkm kilometres\nkm/h kilometres per hour\n° degree\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 338\nSchedule 2 Standard or commonly used traffic signs\n(rule 316)\nBicycle parking sign\n(rule 201)\nBridge load limit (gross mass) sign\n(rule 107)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 339\n(\nChildren crossing flag\nChildren's crossing sign\nClearance sign\n(rule 102)\nClearway sign\n(rule 176)\nElectric-powered vehicle symbol\n(rule 203B)\nElectric-powered vehicle charging symbol\n(rule 203C)\nEmergency stopping lane only sign\n(rule 95)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 340\nEnd bicycle lane sign\n(rule 153)\nEnd bus lane sign\nEnd clearway sign\n(rule 176)\nEnd keep left unless overtaking sign\nEnd no bicycles sign\n(rule 252)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 341\nEnd no overtaking or passing sign\n(rule 93)\nEnd no parking area sign\nEnd no stopping area sign\nEnd parking area sign\nEnd road access sign\nEnd separated footpath sign\nEnd shared path sign\n(rule 242)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 342\nEnd speed-limit sign\nEnd tram lane sign\n(End transit lane (T2) sign)\n(End transit lane (T3) sign)\nEnd trucks and buses low gear sign\nEnd truck lane sign\nEnd trucks use left lane sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 343\n(rules 69, 70, 71, 122)\nGross load limit sign\nHook turn only sign\n(rule 34)\nKeep left sign\n(rule 99)\nKeep left unless overtaking sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 344\nLeft lane must turn left sign\nLeft turn on red after stopping sign\n(rule 59)\nLow clearance sign\n(rule 102)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 345\nMail zone sign\n(rule 186)\n(rule 86)\nMinibus zone sign\n(rule 184)\nMotor bike parking sign\n(rule 202)\nNo buses sign\n(rule 106)\nNo hook turn by bicycles sign\n(rule 36)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 346\n(rule 94)\nNo overtaking or passing sign\n(rule 93)\nNo pedestrians sign\n(rule 228)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 347\nNo trucks sign\n(rule 104)\nNo turns sign\n(rule 90)\nOne-way sign\nOne-way sign\nPark in bays only sign\n(rule 211)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 348\nPedestrian crossing sign\n(rule 81)\n(rules 230, 234)\nPeople with disabilities parking sign\nPermissive parking sign displaying a people with\nPermissive parking sign displaying a people with\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 349\nRight lane must turn right sign\nRoundabout sign\n(rule 109)\n(rules 162, 190)\nSeparated footpath sign\n(rules 239, 252)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 350\nShared path sign\n(rules 242, 252)\nSpeed derestriction sign\n(rules 21, 316)\n(rules 21, 316)\nStop here on red arrow sign\nStop here on red signal sign\nSlow vehicle turn out lane\nsign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 351\n(rules 67, 68, 121)\nTraffic light–stop sign\n(rule 63)\nTramway sign End tramway sign\n(Transit lane (T2) sign)\n(Transit lane (T3) sign)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 352\nTruck lane sign\nTrucks use left lane sign\n(rule 180)\n(rules 98, 132, 136)\nU-turn permitted sign\n(rule 40)\n(rule 181)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 353\nSchedule 3 Other permitted traffic signs\n(rule 316)\nNote\nThe traffic signs in this Schedule are alternative versions of the signs in\nSchedule 2. These signs are not included in the Australian Standard AS1742\n(Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices), but are still in use in some\njurisdictions.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 354\n(rule 107)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 355\nChildren's crossing sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 356\nEnd bicycle lane sign\n(rule 153)\nEnd bus lane sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 357\nEnd keep left unless overtaking sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 358\nEnd separated footpath sign\nEnd shared path sign\n(rule 242)\nEnd speed-limit sign\nEnd tram lane sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 359\nEnd tramway sign\n(rule 155A)\nEnd truck lane sign\nEnd trucks and buses low gear sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 360\nLeft lane must turn left sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 361\n(rule 86)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 362\n(rule 94)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 363\n(Various illuminated message sign)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 364\n(rule 240A)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 365\n(rule 240A) One-way sign\n(rule 230, 234)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 366\nRight lane must turn right sign\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 367\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 368\nSeparated footpath sign\n(rules 239, 252)\nShared path sign\n(rules 242, 252)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 369\nStop here on red signal sign\nTramway sign\n(rule 155A)\nONLY\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 370\nTrucks use left lane sign\n(rule 180)\n(rules 98, 132, 136)\nTRUCK\nARRESTER\nBED\nTRUCK\nARRESTER\nBED\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 371\n(rule 181)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 372\n","sortOrder":358},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 4","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Symbols and traffic-related items","content":"Schedule 4 Symbols and traffic-related items\n(rule 320)\nDo not overtake turning vehicle sign\n(rules 28, 32, 143)\nDo not overtake turning vehicle sign\n(rules 28, 32, 143)\nFire hydrant indicator (example)\nFire hydrant indicator (example)\nFire plug indicator (example)\nGive way to buses sign\n(rule 77)\nGreen bicycle symbol\n(rule 260)\nGreen pedestrian symbol\n(rule 231)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 373\nPeople with disabilities symbol\nPeople with disabilities symbol\nRed bicycle symbol\n(rule 260)\nRed pedestrian symbol\n(rule 231)\nWhite B-light\n(rule 285)\nWhite T-light\n(rule 278)\nYellow bicycle symbol\n(rule 261)\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 374\nDictionary\n(rule 4)\nadjacent land, for a road, means land next to the road (whether or\nnot it adjoins the road), but does not include a road or road-related\narea.\n1 Land includes premises or a part of premises – see the definition in this\n2 Road is defined in rule 12, and road-related area in rule 13.\nalcohol interlock device, see rule 221.\nangle parking, see rule 210.\napproaching, for a driver, means approaching from any direction.\napproved bicycle helmet means a protective helmet for bicycle\nriders that is approved, for the Australian Road Rules, under\napproved seatbelt means a seatbelt approved, for the Australian\nRoad Rules, under another law of this jurisdiction.\narea includes:\n(a) a bridge; and\n(b) a network of roads; and\n(c) a slip lane.\nNote\nSlip lane is defined in this dictionary.\nauthorised person, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\nmeans a person who is appointed under another law of this\njurisdiction to be an authorised person for the Rules or the\nprovision.\nbicycle means a vehicle with 2 or more wheels that is built to be\npropelled by human power through a belt, chain or gears (whether\nor not it has an auxiliary motor), and:\n(a) includes a pedicab, penny-farthing and tricycle; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 375\n(b) includes a power-assisted pedal cycle within the meaning of\nvehicle standards determined under the Motor Vehicle\nStandards Act 1989 (Cth), as amended from time to time; but\n(c) does not include a wheelchair, wheeled recreational device,\nwheeled toy, or any vehicle (other than a vehicle referred to in\nparagraph (b)) with an auxiliary motor capable of generating a\npower output over 200 watts (whether or not the motor is\noperating).\n1 Vehicle is defined in rule 15, and wheelchair, wheeled recreational device\nand wheeled toy are defined in this dictionary.\n2 Power assisted pedal cycle is defined in the Australian Design Rules –\nDefinitions and Vehicle Categories which are vehicle standards determined\nunder section 7 of the Motor Vehicle Standards Act 1989 (Cth). The definition\nincludes vehicles referred to as pedalecs.\nbicycle crossing light means a green, yellow or red bicycle\ncrossing light.\nNote\nGreen bicycle crossing light, yellow bicycle crossing light and red bicycle\ncrossing light are defined in this dictionary.\nbicycle crossing lights means a device designed to show a\nbicycle crossing light, or 2 or more bicycle crossing lights at\ndifferent times.\nNote\nBicycle crossing light is defined in this dictionary.\nbicycle hook turn storage area means an area between an\nintersection and a marked foot crossing, or if there is no marked\nfoot crossing, a stop line, before the intersection that has painted on\nit one or more bicycle symbols and one or more right traffic lane\narrows, and includes any line that delineates the right side of the\narea, and any line that delineates the left side of the area that is not\nalso a stop line or part of a marked foot crossing and excludes any\nbicycle storage area.\n1 Intersection, bicycle symbol, right traffic lane arrows and marked foot\ncrossing are defined in this dictionary and hook turns are described in\nrules 34 and 35.\n2 See example in rule 35.\nbicycle lane, see rule 153.\nbicycle path, see rule 239.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 376\nbicycle path road marking, see rule 239.\nbicycle storage area means:\n(a) an area of a road before an intersection with traffic lights:\n(i) that has painted on it one or more bicycle symbols; and\n(ii) that is between two parallel stop lines, regardless of\nwhether the lines are of equal length; and\n(iii) that opens out from a bicycle lane;\nbut does not include any stop line; or\n(b) if another law of this jurisdiction defines a bicycle storage\narea, that area as defined under that law.\nNote\nIntersection, traffic lights, bicycle symbol and stop line are defined in this\nbicycle symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a\nbicycle.\nNote\nThe symbol is, for example, used in a bicycle lane sign, a bicycle path sign and a\nseparated footpath sign – see Schedule 2.\nB light means a red, white or yellow B light.\nNote\nRed B light, white B light and yellow B light are defined in this dictionary.\nB lights means a device designed to show a B light, or 2 or more\nB lights at different times.\nbuilt-up area, in relation to a length of road, means an area in\nwhich either of the following is present for a distance of at least\n500 metres or, if the length of road is shorter than 500 metres, for\nthe whole road:\n(a) buildings, not over 100 metres apart, on land next to the road;\n(b) street lights not over 100 metres apart.\nNote\nLength of road, is defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 377\nbus means a motor vehicle built mainly to carry people that seats\nover 12 adults (including the driver).\nNote\nMotor vehicle is defined in this dictionary.\nbus lane, see rule 154.\nbus only lane, see rule 154A.\nbus only lane road marking means a road marking consisting of\nthe words ‘bus only’.\nNote\nRoad marking is defined in this dictionary.\nbus zone, see rule 183.\ncentre of the road, for a driver on a two-way road, means the far\nright side of the part of the road used by traffic travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver.\nchanges direction, see rule 45.\nchildren's crossing, see rule 80.\ncombination means a group of vehicles consisting of a motor\nvehicle connected to one or more vehicles.\nNote\nMotor vehicle is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\ncontinuing road, for a T-intersection, means the road (except a\nroad-related area) that meets the terminating road at the\nT-intersection.\nNote\nRoad-related area is defined in rule 13, and terminating road and\nT-intersection are defined in this dictionary.\ncorrectional vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\n(a) a correctional worker for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the correctional worker's\nduties as a correctional worker.\nNote\nCorrectional worker is defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 378\ncorrectional worker, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\nmeans a person who is a correctional worker for the Rules, or the\ncrash includes:\n(a) a collision between 2 or more vehicles; or\n(b) any other accident or incident involving a vehicle in which a\nperson is killed or injured, property is damaged, or an animal\nin someone's charge is killed or injured.\nNote\ncrossing means a children's crossing, level crossing, marked foot\ncrossing or pedestrian crossing.\nNote\nChildren's crossing is defined in rule 80, level crossing is defined in rule 120,\nmarked foot crossing is defined in this dictionary, and pedestrian crossing is\ndefined in rule 81.\ndividing line means a road marking formed by a line, or 2 parallel\nlines, whether broken or continuous, designed to indicate the parts\nof the road to be used by vehicles travelling in opposite directions.\nNote\nRoad marking is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\ndividing strip means an area or structure that divides a road\nlengthways, but does not include a nature strip, bicycle path,\nfootpath or shared path.\nNote\nBicycle path is defined in rule 239, footpath and nature strip are defined in this\ndictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.\ndrive includes be in control of.\ndriver, see rules 16 and 19.\ndriver's vehicle, for a driver, means the vehicle being driven by the\ndriver.\nedge filtering, see rule 151A(6).\nedge line, for a road, means a line marked along the road at or\nnear the far left or far right side of the road (except any road-related\narea of the road).\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 379\nelectric-powered vehicle, see rule 203B.\nemergency stopping lane see rule 95.\nemergency vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\n(a) an emergency worker for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of his or her duties as an\nemergency worker.\n1 Emergency worker is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in\nrule 15.\nemergency worker, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\nmeans a person who is an emergency worker for the Rules, or the\nend bus only lane road marking means a road marking consisting\nof the words ‘end bus only’.\nNote\nRoad marking is defined in this dictionary.\nend no filtering sign, see rule 151A(7).\nenter an intersection or crossing, for the driver of a vehicle or a\ntrain, means enter the intersection or crossing with any part of the\nvehicle or train.\nNote\nCrossing and intersection are defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined\nin rule 15.\nfootpath, except in rule 13(1), means an area open to the public\nthat is designated for, or has as one of its main uses, use by\nNote\nRule 13 defines road-related area.\nfreeway, see rule 177.\nfront fog light, see rule 217.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 380\ngive way, for a driver or pedestrian, means:\n(a) if the driver or pedestrian is stopped – remain stationary until it\nis safe to proceed; or\n(b) in any other case – slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid\na collision.\ngive way line means a broken line that is marked across all or part\nof a road and is not part of a marked foot crossing.\n1 Marked foot crossing is defined in this dictionary.\n2 There is an example of a give way line in rule 69.\ngreen bicycle crossing light means an illuminated green bicycle\nsymbol as shown in the diagram in Schedule 4.\nNote\ngreen pedestrian light means:\n(a) an illuminated green pedestrian symbol; or\n(b) the word \"walk\" illuminated in green (whether or not flashing).\nNote\nGreen pedestrian symbol is defined in this dictionary.\ngreen pedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture\nof a pedestrian as shown in the diagram in green in Schedule 4.\ngreen traffic arrow means an illuminated green arrow.\ngreen traffic light means an illuminated green disc.\nGVM, for a vehicle, means the maximum loaded mass of the\nvehicle:\n(a) specified by the manufacturer on an identification plate on the\n(b) if there is no specification by the manufacturer on an\nidentification plate on the vehicle or if the specification is not\nappropriate because the vehicle has been modified – certified\nby a vehicle registration authority.\nNote\nThis definition is modified by regulation 87A of the Traffic Regulations 1999.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 381\nhalfway around, for a roundabout, see rule 110.\nhazard warning lights means a pair of yellow direction indicator\nlights fitted to a vehicle under another law of this jurisdiction that\ndisplay regular flashes of light at the same time, and at the same\nrate, as each other, but does not include warning lights fitted, under\nanother law of this jurisdiction, to a bus used for carrying children.\nNote\nBus is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nheavy vehicle means a vehicle with a GVM of more\nthan 4.5 tonnes.\nhigh-beam, for a headlight fitted to a vehicle, means that the\nheadlight is built or adjusted so, when the vehicle is standing on\nlevel ground, the top of the main beam of light projected is above\nthe headlight's low-beam.\nNote\nLow-beam is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nhook turn, see rules 34 and 35.\nintersection means the area where 2 or more roads (except any\nroad-related area) meet, and includes:\n(a) any area of the roads where vehicles travelling on different\nroads might collide; and\n(b) the place where any slip lane between the roads meets the\nroad into which traffic on the slip lane may turn;\nbut does not include any road-related area.\nNote\nRoad is defined in rule 12, road-related area is defined in rule 13, slip lane is\ndefined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\njuvenile justice vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road\nRules, means any vehicle driven by a person who is:\n(a) a juvenile justice worker for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of his or her duties as a\njuvenile justice worker.\nNote\nJuvenile justice worker is defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 382\njuvenile justice worker, for a provision of the Australian Road\nRules, means a person who is a juvenile justice worker for the\nRules, or the provision, under another law of this jurisdiction.\nkeep clear marking, see rule 96.\nlane filtering, see rule 151A(1).\nland includes premises or a part of premises.\nleft, for a person or in relation to something, see rule 351(1)\nleft change of direction signal means a change of direction signal\ngiven in accordance with rule 47.\nleft traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a direction to the left.\nNote\nMarked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in this dictionary.\nlength, of road, includes:\n(a) a marked lane or a part of a marked lane; and\n(b) another part of a length of road.\nNote\nMarked lane is defined in this dictionary.\nlevel crossing, see rule 120.\nline of traffic means:\n(a) 2 or more vehicles travelling in line along a road (whether or\nnot the vehicles are actually moving, but not including vehicles\nin a marked lane); or\n(b) a single vehicle, other than a vehicle that is part of a line of\ntraffic under paragraph (a), that is travelling along a road\n(whether or not the vehicle is actually moving, but not\nincluding a vehicle in a marked lane).\n1 A vehicle travelling along a road (except in a marked lane) in line behind\nanother vehicle (the leading vehicle) forms part of a line of traffic with the\nleading vehicle.\n2 A vehicle travelling along a road (except in a marked lane) with no other\nvehicles in the vicinity constitutes a line of traffic by itself.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 383\n3 Two vehicles travelling in the same direction on a road (except in a marked\nlane), but not in line, are 2 lines of traffic.\nloading zone, see rule 179.\nlow-beam, for a headlight fitted to a vehicle, means that the\nheadlight is built or adjusted so, when the vehicle is standing on\nlevel ground, the top of the main beam of light projected is:\n(a) not higher than the centre of the headlight, when measured\n8 metres in front of the vehicle; and\n(b) not over 1 metre higher than the level where the vehicle is\nstanding, when measured 25 metres in front of the vehicle.\nNote\nmail zone see rule 186.\nmarked foot crossing means an area of a road:\n(a) at a place with pedestrian lights facing pedestrians crossing\nthe road and traffic lights facing vehicles driving on the road;\nand\n(b) indicated by a different road surface, or between 2 parallel\ncontinuous or broken lines, or rows of studs or markers, on the\nroad surface substantially from one side of the road to the\nother.\nExample of a different road surface\nThe area of road could be indicated by brick paving across a bitumen road.\nNote\nPedestrian lights and traffic lights are defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is\nmarked lane means an area of a road marked by continuous or\nbroken lines, or rows of studs or markers, on the road surface that\nis designed for use by a single line of vehicles.\nNote\nmechanical signalling device means a device that is declared to\nbe a mechanical signalling device for the Australian Road Rules\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 384\nmedian strip means a dividing strip designed or developed to\nseparate vehicles travelling in opposite directions.\nNote\nDividing strip is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nmedian strip parking area means a parking area on or in a\nmedian strip.\nNote\nParking area is defined in this dictionary.\nmedical certificate means a certificate that:\n(a) is signed by a medical practitioner; and\n(b) states a date of issue; and\n(c) if another law of this jurisdiction does not exempt the medical\ncertificate from displaying an expiry date – states an expiry\ndate that is not more than 1 year after the date of issue; and\n(d) has not expired.\nmedical practitioner, see section 17 of the Interpretation Act 1978.\nminibus zone, see rule 184.\nmotor bike means a motor vehicle with 2 wheels, and includes:\n(a) a 2-wheeled motor vehicle with a sidecar attached to it that is\nsupported by a third wheel; and\n(b) a motor vehicle with 3 wheels that is ridden in the same way\nas a motor vehicle with 2 wheels.\nmotorised scooter, see rule 244A.\nmotor vehicle means a vehicle (other than a motorised scooter)\nthat is built to be propelled by a motor that forms part of the vehicle.\nmulti-lane road, for a driver, means a one-way road, or a two-way\nroad, with 2 or more marked lanes (except bicycle lanes) that are:\n(a) on the side of the dividing line or median strip where the driver\nis driving; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 385\n(b) for the use of vehicles travelling in the same direction.\nNote\nBicycle lane is defined in rule 153, dividing line, marked lane, median strip,\none-way road and two-way road are defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is\nnature strip, except in rule 13(1), means an area between a road\n(except a road-related area) and adjacent land, but does not\ninclude a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\n1 Adjacent land and footpath are defined in this dictionary, bicycle path is\ndefined in rule 239, road is defined in rule 12, and shared path is defined in\nrule 242.\n2 Rule 13 defines a road-related area.\nnight means the period between sunset on one day and sunrise on\nthe next day.\nno bicycles road marking means a road marking consisting of a\nbicycle symbol with a diagonal line across it, or the words \"no\nbicycles\", or both the symbol and the words.\nNote\nBicycle symbol and road marking are defined in this dictionary.\nno filtering sign, see rule 151A(7).\nobstruction includes a traffic hazard, but does not include a\nvehicle only because the vehicle is stopped in traffic or is travelling\nmore slowly than other vehicles.\nNote\noncoming vehicle, for a driver, means a vehicle approaching the\ndriver travelling in the opposite direction to the direction in which the\nNote\none-way road means a road with one or more marked lanes, all of\nwhich are for the use of vehicles travelling in the same direction.\nNote\nMarked lane is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 386\noverhead lane control device means an overhead lane control\nsign or signal.\noverhead lane control sign means a traffic sign displaying a red\ndiagonal cross that is installed on a structure over a road or part of\na road.\nNote\nTraffic sign is defined in this dictionary.\noverhead lane control signal means:\n(a) an illuminated red diagonal cross (whether or not flashing); or\n(b) an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow pointing\ndownwards or indicating one or more directions.\noverhead lane control signals means a device on a structure over\na road, or part of a road, that is designed to display an overhead\nlane control signal, or 2 or more overhead lane control signals.\noversize vehicle means a vehicle that is declared to be an\noversize vehicle for the Australian Road Rules under another law of\nNote\novertake, for a driver, means the action of:\n(a) approaching from behind another driver travelling in the same\nmarked lane or line of traffic; and\n(b) moving into an adjacent marked lane or part of the road on\nwhich there is room for a line of traffic (whether or not the lane\nor part of the road is for drivers travelling in the same\ndirection); and\n(c) passing the other driver while travelling in the adjacent marked\nlane or line of traffic.\nNote\nMarked lane is defined in this dictionary.\npainted island means an area of a road:\n(a) that has painted on it stripes or chevrons in white or another\ncolour that contrasts with the colour of the road; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 387\n(b) that is surrounded either:\n(i) by a line or lines (whether broken or continuous); or\n(ii) partly by a combination of a line or lines (whether broken\nor continuous) and partly by a kerb or by a structure on\nor next to the road.\npark, in Part 12 and for a driver, includes stop and allow the driver's\nvehicle to stay (whether or not the driver leaves the vehicle).\n1 Driver's vehicle is defined in this dictionary.\nparking area means a length of road or area designed for parking\nNote\nparking area for people with disabilities, see rule 203.\nparking bay means an area for parking a single vehicle (other than\na combination) that is indicated by:\n(a) road markings consisting of lines, studs or other similar\ndevices; or\n(b) a different road surface.\nNote\nCombination and road marking are defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is\nparking control sign means any of the following:\n(a) a bicycle parking sign;\n(b) a bus zone sign;\n(c) a clearway sign;\n(ca) an electric vehicle parking sign;\n(d) a loading zone sign;\n(e) a mail zone sign;\n(f) a minibus zone sign;\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 388\n(g) a motor bike parking sign;\n(h) a no parking sign;\n(i) a no stopping sign;\n(j) a people with disabilities parking sign;\n(k) a permissive parking sign;\n(l) a permit zone sign;\n(m) a taxi zone sign;\n(n) a truck zone sign;\n(o) a works zone sign.\nparking permit for people with disabilities means a permit,\nissued under another law of this jurisdiction or the law of another\njurisdiction, that includes a people with disabilities symbol.\nNote\nPeople with disabilities symbol is defined in this dictionary.\npart of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles\nmeans the area of the road, except:\n(a) any road-related area; and\n(b) if the road has one or more service roads – the area of any\nservice road.\n1 Road-related area is defined in rule 13, and service road is defined in this\n2 A road-related area includes any shoulder of the road – see rule 13.\npedestrian, see rule 18.\npedestrian crossing, see rule 81.\npedestrian lights means a device designed to show, at different\ntimes, a green or red pedestrian light.\nNote\nGreen pedestrian light and red pedestrian light are defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 389\npedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a\npedestrian.\nNote\nThe symbol is, for example, used in a separated footpath sign – see Schedule 2.\npeople with disabilities road marking, see rule 203.\npeople with disabilities symbol means a picture of a person\nseated in a wheelchair as shown in the diagrams in Schedule 4.\npermit zone, see rule 185.\npolice officer, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means\na person who is a police officer for the Rules, or the provision,\npolice vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means\nany vehicle driven by a person who is:\n(a) a police officer for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of his or her duties as a police\n1 Police officer is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nportable warning triangle means a portable warning triangle\napproved, for the Australian Road Rules, under another law of this\npostal vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means\na vehicle driven by a person who is:\n(a) a postal worker for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of his or her duties as a postal\nworker.\n1 Postal worker is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\npostal worker, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means\na person who delivers letter mail and parcels within Australia, on\nbehalf of Australia Post, as an employee or as a contractor.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 390\npublic bus, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means a\nvehicle that is declared to be a public bus for the Rules, or the\nNote\npublic holiday, for a place, means a public holiday at the place\nunder the law of this jurisdiction.\npublic minibus, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\nmeans a vehicle that is declared to be a public minibus for the\nRules, or the provision, under another law of this jurisdiction.\nNote\nred bicycle crossing light means an illuminated red bicycle\nsymbol (whether or not flashing) as shown in the diagram in\nNote\nred B light means an illuminated red B.\nred pedestrian light means:\n(a) an illuminated red pedestrian symbol (whether or not flashing);\nor\n(b) the words \"dont walk\" illuminated in red (whether or not\nflashing).\nNote\nRed pedestrian symbol is defined in this dictionary.\nred pedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of\na pedestrian as shown in the diagram in red in Schedule 4.\nred T light means an illuminated red T.\nred traffic arrow means an illuminated red arrow.\nred traffic light means an illuminated red disc.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 391\nride, for the rider of a motor bike or animal-drawn vehicle, includes\nbe in control of.\nNote\nMotor bike is defined in this dictionary.\nrider, see rule 17.\nright, for a person or in relation to something, see rule 351(2)\nright change of direction signal means a change of direction\nsignal given in accordance with rule 49.\nright traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a direction to the right.\nNote\nMarked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in this dictionary.\nroad see rules 11(2) and 12.\nroad marking means a word, figure, symbol, mark, line, raised\nmarker or stud, or something else, on the surface of a road to direct\nor warn traffic, but does not include a painted island.\nNote\nPainted island is defined in this dictionary.\nroad-related area, see rule 13.\nroad user, see rule 14.\nroundabout, see rule 109.\nsafety zone, see rule 162.\nschool zone, see rule 23.\nscooter, see rule 244A.\nseparated footpath, see rule 239.\nseparated footpath road marking, see rule 239.\nservice road means the part of a road that:\n(a) is separated from other parts of the road by a dividing strip\nthat is not designed or developed, wholly or mainly, to\nseparate vehicles travelling in opposite directions; and\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 392\n(b) is:\n(i) designed or developed to be used, wholly or mainly, by\ntraffic servicing adjacent land; or\n(ii) indicated to be a service road by information on or with a\ntraffic control device on the road.\nNote\nAdjacent land, dividing strip, traffic, traffic control device and with are\ndefined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nshared path, see rule 242.\nshared zone, see rule 24.\nsheriff's officer, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\nmeans a person who is a sheriff's officer for the Rules, or the\nsheriff's vehicle, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules,\n(a) a sheriff's officer for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the person's duties as a\nsheriff's officer.\nNote\nsheriff's officer is defined in this dictionary.\nshoulder, see rule 12.\nslip lane means an area of road for vehicles turning left that is\nseparated, at some point, from other parts of the road by a painted\nisland or traffic island but not by a median strip.\nNote\nMedian strip, painted island and traffic island are defined in this dictionary,\nand vehicle is defined in rule 15.\nspecial purpose lane means a marked lane, or the part of a\nmarked lane, that is a bicycle lane, bus lane, emergency stopping\nlane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane.\nNote\nBicycle lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in rule 154, emergency\nstopping lane is defined in rule 95, marked lane is defined in this dictionary,\ntram lane is defined in rule 155, transit lane is defined in rule 156, and truck\nlane is defined in rule 157.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 393\nspeed-limited area, see rule 22.\nstop, in Part 12 and for a driver, includes park, but does not include\nstop to reverse the driver's vehicle into a parking bay or other\nparking space.\n1 Driver's vehicle, park and parking bay are defined in this dictionary.\nstop line means a continuous line that:\n(a) is marked across all or part of a road; and\n(b) is not part of a marked foot crossing, a keep clear marking or\na bicycle storage area for hook turns.\n1 Keep clear marking is defined in rule 96, and marked foot crossing is\ndefined in this dictionary.\n2 There is an example of a stop line in rule 67.\nstraight ahead includes substantially straight ahead.\nT-intersection means an intersection, other than a roundabout,\nwhere 2 roads meet (whether or not at right angles) and one of the\nroads ends.\nNote\nIntersection is defined in this dictionary.\nT light means a red, white or yellow T light.\nNote\nRed T light, white T light and yellow T light are defined in this dictionary.\nT lights means a device designed to show a T light, or 2 or more\nT lights at different times.\ntaxi, for a provision of the Australian Road Rules, means a vehicle\nthat is declared to be a taxi for the Rules, or the provision, under\nNote\ntaxi zone, see rule 182.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 394\nterminating road, for a T-intersection, means:\n(a) if a road (except a road-related area) at the intersection is\ndesignated by traffic signs or road markings, or in another\nway, as a road that ends at the intersection – that road; or\n(b) in any other case – a road (except a road-related area) that\nends at the intersection.\nNote\nRoad is defined in rule 12, road-related area is defined in rule 13, and\nT-intersection is defined in this dictionary.\ntractor does not include a motor vehicle built to tow a semi-trailer.\nNote\nMotor vehicle is defined in this dictionary.\ntraffic includes vehicles and pedestrians.\nNote\nPedestrian is defined in rule 18, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\ntraffic arrow means a green, white or red traffic arrow, or a yellow\ntraffic arrow (whether or not flashing).\nNote\nGreen traffic arrow, red traffic arrow, white traffic arrow and yellow traffic\narrow are defined in this dictionary.\ntraffic arrows means a device designed to show a traffic arrow, or\n2 or more traffic arrows at different times.\ntraffic control device means a traffic sign, road marking, traffic\nsignals, or other device, to direct or warn traffic on, entering or\nleaving a road.\nNote\ntraffic island means a structure on a road to direct traffic, but does\nnot include a road marking or painted island.\nNote\nPainted island and road marking are defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 395\ntraffic lane arrows means a traffic sign, road marking or device\nthat displays arrows indicating one or more directions and is\ndesigned to apply to one or more marked lanes, but does not\ninclude traffic arrows.\nNote\nMarked lane, road marking, traffic arrow and traffic sign are defined in this\ntraffic light means a green traffic light, or a red or yellow traffic light\n(whether or not flashing).\nNote\nGreen traffic light, red traffic light and yellow traffic light are defined in this\ntraffic lights means a device designed to show a traffic light, or\n2 or more traffic lights in a vertical arrangement and at different\ntimes, and includes any traffic arrows installed with or near the\ntraffic lights pole means a pole or other structure on which traffic\nlights are installed.\ntraffic-related item means any of the following:\n(a) a do not overtake turning vehicle sign;\n(b) a give way to buses sign;\n(c) a fire hydrant indicator or fire plug indicator.\nNote\nExamples of a fire hydrant indicator and fire plug indicator are shown in\ntraffic sign means a board, plate, screen, or another device,\nwhether or not illuminated, displaying words, figures, symbols or\nanything else to direct or warn traffic on, entering or leaving a road,\nand includes a children crossing flag, a hand-held stop sign, a\nparking control sign and a variable illuminated message sign, but\ndoes not include traffic signals.\nNote\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 396\ntraffic signals means bicycle crossing lights, B lights, overhead\nlane control signals, pedestrian lights, T lights, traffic arrows, traffic\nlights or twin red or yellow lights.\nNote\ntrailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed, or is towed, by a\nmotor vehicle, but does not include a motor vehicle that is being\ntowed.\nNote\nMotor vehicle is defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.\ntram includes a light rail vehicle.\ntram lane, see rule 155.\ntram recovery vehicle means a vehicle used by a tram operator to\naccess and recover disabled trams for which the tram operator is\nresponsible.\ntram stop means a place on a road at which there is a sign\nindicating that trams will stop to enable people to get on or off.\ntram tracks includes a rail designed for a light rail vehicle to run on.\ntramway, see rule 155A.\ntransit lane, see rule 156.\ntravelling along tram tracks, for a bus, means being driven along\nthe area where the tram tracks are laid.\nNote\nBus and tram tracks are defined in this dictionary.\ntrolley includes a shopping trolley and any other kind of handcart.\ntruck means a motor vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes, except a\nbus, tram or tractor.\nNote\nBus, GVM, motor vehicle, tram and tractor are defined in this dictionary.\ntruck lane, see rule 157.\ntruck zone, see rule 180.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 397\nturning lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane,\nfor vehicles travelling in one direction to which:\n(a) a left turn only sign, a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic\nlane arrows apply; or\n(b) a right turn only sign, a right lane must turn right sign or right\ntraffic lane arrows apply; or\n(c) a U-turn permitted sign or U-turn traffic lane arrows apply.\nNote\nLeft traffic lane arrows, marked lane, right traffic lane arrows and U-turn\ntraffic lane arrows are defined in this dictionary, and vehicle is defined in\nrule 15.\nturn line means a road marking, at an intersection, consisting of a\nline (whether broken or continuous) that is designed to indicate how\na turn is to be made at the intersection.\ntwin red lights means a device showing, in a horizontal or diagonal\narrangement, 2 illuminated red discs that flash alternately.\ntwin yellow lights means a device showing, in a horizontal or\ndiagonal arrangement, 2 illuminated yellow discs that flash\nalternately.\ntwo-way road means a road for use by vehicles travelling in\nopposite directions.\nNote\nU-turn means a turn made by a driver so that the driver's vehicle\nfaces in approximately the opposite direction from which it was\nfacing immediately before the turn was made, but does not include\na turn made at a roundabout.\nNote\nDriver's vehicle is defined in this dictionary, and roundabout is defined in\nrule 109.\nU-turn traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a U-turn direction.\nNote\nU-turn is defined in this dictionary.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 398\nvariable illuminated message device means a device designed to\ndisplay, and to change or turn off from time to time by electronic or\noptical means, illuminated words, figures, symbols, or anything\nelse, to direct or warn traffic on, entering or leaving a road, but does\nnot include traffic signals.\nNote\nTraffic is defined in this dictionary.\nvariable illuminated message sign means the illuminated words,\nfigures, symbols, or other things, displayed at any relevant time on\na variable illuminated message device.\nvehicle, see rule 15.\nwheelchair means a chair mounted on 2 or more wheels that is\nbuilt to transport a person who is unable to walk or has difficulty in\nwalking, but does not include a pram, stroller or trolley.\nNote\nTrolley is defined in this dictionary.\nwheeled recreational device means a wheeled device, built to\ntransport a person, propelled by human power or gravity, and\nordinarily used for recreation or play, and:\n(a) includes rollerblades, rollerskates, a skateboard, scooter,\nunicycle or similar wheeled device; but\n(b) does not include a golf buggy, pram, stroller or trolley, a\nmotor-assisted device other than a motorised scooter\n(whether or not the motor is operating), or a bicycle,\nwheelchair or wheeled toy.\nNote\nBicycle, trolley, wheelchair and wheeled toy are defined in this dictionary.\nwheeled toy means a child's pedal car, scooter (other than a\nmotorised scooter) or tricycle or a similar toy, but only when it is\nbeing used only by a child who is under 12 years old.\nwhite B light means an illuminated white B as shown in the\ndiagram in Schedule 4.\nwhite T light means an illuminated white T as shown in the\ndiagram in Schedule 4.\nwhite traffic arrow means an illuminated white arrow.\n\nTraffic Regulations – Australian Road Rules 399\nwindow, in relation to a vehicle, includes any sunroof fitted to the\nwith, for information about the application of a traffic control device,\nincludes accompanying or reasonably associated with the device.\nworks zone, see rule 181.\nyellow bicycle crossing light means an illuminated yellow bicycle\nsymbol (whether or not flashing) as shown in the diagram in\nNote\nyellow B light means an illuminated yellow B.\nyellow T light means an illuminated yellow T.\nyellow traffic arrow means an illuminated yellow arrow.\nyellow traffic light means an illuminated yellow disc.","sortOrder":359}],"analysis":{"issue_detection":{"absurdities":[],"contradictions":[]},"flash_summary_failed":{"failed":true,"reason":"Unauthenticated. Configure AI_GATEWAY_API_KEY or use a provider module. Learn more: https://ai-sdk.dev/unauthenticated-ai-gateway","source":"analysis-cron"},"summary":{"complexity_score":3,"scope_assessment":{"changed":false,"description":"Based on the available information, this appears to be a straightforward adoption of the Australian Road Rules 1999 into local traffic regulations as originally intended. There is no evidence from the provided text of scope expansion or contraction from the original purpose of implementing nationally consistent road rules."},"complexity_factors":["The document itself contains very limited substantive content — it is a schedule reference rather than a full set of rules","The Australian Road Rules 1999 that it incorporates by reference are themselves a large and detailed document, adding indirect complexity","Jurisdictional layering: national model rules adopted into local/territory law creates a two-tier structure users must navigate","Minimal metadata provided (no gazette number, no maker identified, no reprint details beyond a reference number), making it harder to track legislative history","The repetitive heading structure in the source document suggests possible formatting or publishing issues, which could cause confusion"],"plain_english_summary":"## Traffic Regulations Schedule 3 — Australian Road Rules 1999\n\nThis is a **schedule (an attachment) to traffic regulations** that incorporates the Australian Road Rules 1999 into local law. In plain terms, it sets out the **road rules that drivers, cyclists, pedestrians, and other road users must follow**.\n\n### Who does this affect?\n- **Everyone who uses roads** — drivers, motorcyclists, cyclists, and pedestrians\n- Applies to anyone operating a vehicle or moving on public roads in the relevant jurisdiction\n\n### What does it do?\n- Adopts the nationally consistent Australian Road Rules as part of local traffic law\n- Makes those rules legally enforceable — meaning police can issue fines and penalties for breaking them\n- Covers things like speed limits, give way rules, lane use, parking, seatbelts, mobile phone use, and much more\n\n### Why does it matter?\n- Breaking these rules can result in **fines, demerit points, licence suspension, or even criminal charges** in serious cases\n- These are the rules that apply every time you get behind the wheel or ride a bike on a public road\n\n### Key detail\nThis version commenced on **31 July 2024**, so any updates or amendments to the road rules from that date are reflected here."},"flash_summary":{"complexity_score":9,"scope_assessment":{"changed":true,"description":"Compared to the original high‑level purpose of creating uniform road rules (rule 3), the instrument has broadened in scope to cover new vehicle classes, technologies and infrastructure needs. Recent additions or detailed inclusions include micromobility (motorised scooters: rules 244A–244C), explicit rules for electric vehicle parking and charging bays (rules 203B–203C), and extensive device/technology references (visual display units, mobile phone usage rules — rule 299–300). The Schedule also contains many operational exemptions and defences for specific operational actors (postal, garbage, tow, breakdown, oversize vehicles — Part 19, rules 305–313B), and detailed technical prescriptions for signage and sign‑compliance (Part 20, rules 314–320). Those inclusions expand the instrument beyond a simple, uniform code of core traffic behaviours into a more granular regulatory regime that integrates evolving transport modes and operational exceptions."},"complexity_factors":["Length and breadth: 21 Parts plus multiple Divisions, 4 Schedules and a lengthy Dictionary (comprehensive coverage of driving, pedestrian, bicycle, tram, bus and parking rules)","Extensive cross‑referencing: frequent intra‑Part and inter‑Part references (e.g. Part 20 references how signs apply across many other Parts such as Parts 3, 8, 11 and 12)","Large number of defined terms: a dedicated Dictionary with several hundred terms and sign/diagram definitions (rule 4 and the Dictionary)","Numerous conditional rules and nested exceptions (eg. multiple conditional speed rules — rules 21–25; many turn and lane exceptions for long vehicles — rules 28, 32, 29)","Multiple vehicle/road‑user classes with bespoke rules (drivers, riders, pedestrians, cyclists, micromobility, trams, buses, heavy vehicles, postal vehicles, emergency vehicles)","Many device‑ and signage‑dependent legal effects (rules 315–336): legal obligations often hinge on whether a sign or marking is present and whether it 'complies substantially' (rule 316)","Layered exemption and defence regimes (Part 19) produce special‑case law and enforcement complexity","Technical interaction with other laws and standards (vehicle standards, Dangerous Goods rules, local authorisations and permits — multiple cross‑references to other jurisdictional laws)","Highly prescriptive operational detail (e.g. exact metre distances for stopping/parking, placement of portable warning triangles, seatbelt/child restraint regimes) leading to many factual determinations in enforcement"],"plain_english_summary":"This instrument adopts the Australian Road Rules into the Northern Territory’s Traffic Regulations, creating uniform, legally enforceable rules for use of roads and road‑related areas. It governs all road users — drivers, cyclists, pedestrians, micromobility riders, commercial fleets and authorities — and ties legal obligations to signage, markings and device compliance.\n\nIt matters because it standardises safety expectations while shifting compliance and operational costs to users and local authorities, expands coverage to emerging modes (e‑vehicles, scooters) and makes enforcement highly dependent on consistent signage."},"kimi_summary":{"_metrics":{"completionTokens":717},"content_quality":"ok","complexity_score":9,"scope_assessment":{"changed":false,"description":"This appears to be the original 1999 version of the Australian Road Rules as adopted in the Northern Territory. The scope remains consistent with the stated objects in rule 3: providing uniform rules for all road users across Australia. While comprehensive, the rules have not expanded beyond their original purpose of standardising road use behaviour."},"complexity_factors":["Over 350 individual rules across 21 Parts with multiple Divisions each","Extensive cross-referencing between rules (e.g., rule 19 states that 'driver' includes 'rider' unless stated otherwise)","Multiple defined terms in a Dictionary with signpost definitions pointing to other rules","Complex conditional logic with many exceptions (e.g., rule 147 has 6 separate exceptions for crossing continuous lane lines)","Nested geographical and temporal conditions (speed limits vary by area type, time of day, vehicle type)","Detailed specifications for traffic control devices with multiple permitted versions of signs in Schedules","Special rules for specific vehicle categories (buses, trams, trucks, bicycles, motorised scooters) with their own sub-rules","Mathematical precision in measurements (distances in metres, times in seconds, speeds in km/h)","Integration with other Territory laws through numerous references to 'another law of this jurisdiction'","Bicycle storage areas, hook turns, and lane filtering create additional layers of complexity for specific scenarios"],"plain_english_summary":"This is the **Australian Road Rules** — a comprehensive national code that governs how everyone uses roads across Australia. Think of it as the rulebook for driving, riding, walking, and parking.\n\n**What it covers:**\n- **Who it applies to**: Drivers, motorbike riders, cyclists, pedestrians, and even people on scooters or skateboards\n- **Where it applies**: Roads, footpaths, bike paths, and \"road-related areas\" (things like nature strips, median strips, and car parks)\n\n**Key areas of rules:**\n- **Speed limits** — how to read signs, default limits, school zones, shared zones\n- **Turning** — left turns, right turns, hook turns (a special Melbourne-style turn), and U-turns\n- **Traffic lights and signs** — when to stop, when you can go, what flashing lights mean\n- **Giving way** — complex rules about who goes first at intersections, roundabouts, and crossings\n- **Roundabouts** — lane choice, signalling, and giving way\n- **Keeping left and overtaking** — lane discipline, when you can cross lines, safe passing distances\n- **Parking and stopping** — where you can't stop, time limits, special zones (loading zones, bus zones, etc.)\n- **Lights and safety** — headlights, hazard lights, warning triangles for trucks\n- **Pedestrians and cyclists** — special rules for crossings, bike lanes, helmets, and equipment\n- **Special vehicles** — rules for trams, buses, trucks, and emergency vehicles\n\n**Why it matters:** These rules create uniform road laws across all Australian states and territories, so someone driving from Darwin to Melbourne follows the same basic rules. Breaking them can result in fines and demerit points.\n\n**Notable features:** The rules are extremely detailed with many diagrams, examples, and exceptions. They define everything precisely — even what counts as a \"road\" versus a \"road-related area.\""}},"importantCases":[],"_links":{"self":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999","history":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999/history","analysis":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999/analysis","conflicts":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999/conflicts","importantCases":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999/important-cases","documents":"/api/acts/traffic-regulations-schedule-3-australian-road-rules-1999/documents"}}